Color Toolbox

Color Toolbox
Prinect
abcde
Information
Color Toolbox
Version 2015
User’s Guide
Revision 1.0
ABC
dress Copyright © 2014 Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG.

Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG. Kurfuersten-Anlage 52–60
No part of this book may be repro- 69115 Heidelberg
duced without prior written permis- Germany
sion. Phone +49 6221 92-00
Fax +49 6221 92-6999
www.heidelberg.com
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important notice: Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG If any problems occur with the product
We are dedicated to improving and assumes no responsibility for informa- described in this manual, please con-
enhancing our products. Conse- tion and description as far as third- tact the Heidelberg agency which is
quently, the information in this man- party products are concerned. responsible for you.
ual is subject to technical The information contained in this
modifications and other changes with- manual about performance and speed Version 2015
out notice. as well as technical data concerning Printed in Germany.
application of our products is not
legally binding as it does not consti-
tute a written contract of features.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Prinect Signa Station 1

Color Toolbox 1
Table of Contents
3
Before you start ...

About This Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Structure of this Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

What you should already know . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Other documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Symbols and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
What's New?
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
What's New and Enhanced in Version 2015? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
General Information about Color Toolbox

What is Color Toolbox? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
User Interface
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Structure of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Operating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Caption Bar (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Moving Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Application Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Main Function Bar (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
"Measure" main function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
"Compare" Main Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
"Analysis" Main Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
"Create" Main Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
"Edit" Main Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
"Process standard" Main Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Header/Menu Bar (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tabs (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Central Workspace (5 and 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents
Button Bar (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Status Bar (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Explorer Panel (9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Recently Used Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
List Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Check Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Check box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Radio Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Text Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Folder/Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Column Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Forwards/Backwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Full Text Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Print/Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
"Measure" Main Function
Working with "Measure" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Creating a File with Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Selecting and Printing a Test Chart ...................................... 42
Measuring the Test Chart, Test Strip or Linearization Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Measuring and Evaluating Spot Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Measuring a Spot Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Evaluating a Spot Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Evaluation With the Color Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Menus, Buttons and Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
"Color Toolbox - New measurement file" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
"Edit control strip" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Loading a Combined Test Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4 Version 2015
Table of Contents
"Color measurement of test chart" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

"Mean calculation of test chart data" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
"Color patch editor" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Easy Way to Modify Several Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Calculate from profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
"Extracting test chart data" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
"Smoothing of color data" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
"Correction of color data" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
"Conversion of color data" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Information about the Conversion of Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
"Conversion of color data - color values" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
"Conversion of color data - paper white" dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
"Conversion of color data - Test chart values" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
"Conversion of color data - Calibration data" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
"Process parameters" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
"Store parameter set" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
"Load parameter set" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Main Program Function "Measure / Process Standard / Evalua-

tion"
Views and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
"Test chart" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Right-click Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Viewing Locked Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
"Process Standards" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
"Process standard" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting the Process Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Individual Quality Index (IQI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CIELab color values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
ab diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Substrate (paper white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Gray balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Dot gain curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Process Standards: Proof Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Supported Mini Spots and Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Selecting, Administrating and Editing Various Proof References in a Single Process

Table of Contents
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Proof Check Under Measurement Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Process Standards: Digital Print Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Digital Printing Check Under Measurement Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Measuring a Digital Press with the Digital Printing Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Process Standards: G7 check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
G7 Check Under Measurement Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
"Substrate" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
"Color values" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
"Dot gain" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dot gain curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Printing Characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
"Gray values" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Minispots for the evaluation of gray balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
"Ink zones" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Show density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Show Delta E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Show density table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Show Delta E table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
"Gradual fading" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Show density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Show Delta E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Show density table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Show Delta E table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
"Compare" Main Function
Working with "Compare" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Menus, Buttons and Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Notes on the Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6 Version 2015
Table of Contents
"Test chart" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

View with Absolute Values and Marked Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
View with Differential Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
"xy diagram" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
"ab diagram" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
"La/Lb diagram" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
"3D color space" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Examples: 3D displays of the layers ("Stacks" diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Examples: 2D sections throughout the color space ("Sections" diagram) . . . . . . . . . . 183
Examples: "Show wire model" view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
"3D display of the color space" Window (with central projection and/or animation) . . . 185
Examples: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
"Statistics" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Display of the Error Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Display of the Error Distribution (Trend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Display of the error distribution (trend with mean) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
"CIE report" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Total results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Dot gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Density values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CIELab Color Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Proof report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
"Proof statistics" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Display of the Error Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Display of the error distribution (trend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
"ΔLab report" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
"ΔLCH report" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
"Tonal values" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Display of the dot gain curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Display of the printing characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Display of the density curves (density profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
"Data table" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
"Save table as CSV file" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
"Analysis" Main Function

Working with "Analysis" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Table of Contents
Information about Long-term Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Hotfolder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
"Change entry" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
"Mean calculation of test chart data" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Display of the result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Notes on the Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Zoom Functions ................................................... 234
Data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
"CIE report" View .................................................. 238
View "Dot gain report" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
View "Density report" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Production check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
"PV Overview" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
"PV CIE report" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
"PV dot gain report" View ............................................ 249
Quality Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
"Create" Main Function
Working with "Create" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Creating an ICC output profile based on the data of a test chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Profile Parameter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Process parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Profile Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
"Profile Generation Setup" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
"Profile parameters" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
"GCR setting/Black generation" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
"Gamut mapping" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
"Correction of color data" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
"Smoothing of color data" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
8 Version 2015
Table of Contents
"Process parameters" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

"Profile calculation" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Views and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
"Test chart" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Right-click Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Viewing Locked Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
"xy diagram" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
"ab diagram" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
"La/Lb diagram" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
"Dot gain" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Dot gain curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
"Gray balance/Density curves" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Display of the gray balance curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Display of the density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
"Edit" Main Function
Working with "Edit" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Profile Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
"Profile info." View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Display Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Text boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Visual Correction of Proof Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
View Profile Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
"Profile parameters" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Profile Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Process Color Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
"Dot gain" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Dot gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Editing the Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
"Gray balance" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Gray balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Table of Contents
Editing the Curves ................................................ 330

"Global gradation" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Gradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Editing the Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
"Lightness" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Lightness gradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Editing the Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
"Proof correction" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Principle of Proof Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Controls and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
"Process param." Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
"Process standard" Main Function
Working with "Process standard" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
"Overview" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
View mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Edit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
"Administration" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Import a standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Export a standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Calculate wet process standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Procedure for the Wet-Dry Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
"Use tonal values from Calibration Manager" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Migrate local process standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
"Tools" Menu
Functions of the "Tools" Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Color calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Device link profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Profile smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
"Correct profile by smoothing" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Gray Balance Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
10 Version 2015
Table of Contents
General Information about Gray Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Gray Balance in Real Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Gray Balance Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Calculate Correction Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Gray Balance Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Gray balance optimization in the Prinect workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Multicolor
What is Multicolor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Definition of the Process Colors for Multicolor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Multicolor Features in Color Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Process standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Creating Multicolor Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Multicolor test charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Procedure for Measuring Data in Color Toolbox: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Importing the Measured Data from Prinect Image Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Smoothing of the Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setup and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Match a Multicolor Profile to Other Print Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Preferences and Print
General Information about Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
"Preferences" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
"General" tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
"Measurement" tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
"Compare" tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
"Hotfolder" tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
"MDS" tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
"License Server" tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
"CIE Report" Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
"Tol [%]" (tolerance) tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
"Individual Quality Index (IQI)" tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
General Information about Printing Your Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
"Print" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Change Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
File Selection

Table of Contents
General Information about File Selection ................................... 65
Explorer panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
"Open" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ImageControl File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Save quality data in Prinect Image Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Automatic naming in Prinect Image Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Profile Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
"Profile Browser Configuration" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
"Save file" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Test Charts and Control Strips

Test Charts and Control Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
How to Record a Printing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

What are Test Charts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Overview of the Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Overview of the Control Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Overview of the Linearization Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
CMYK Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
"ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" Test Chart with 928 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Test chart structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
"ISO 12642 (ANSI IT8.7/3) Random" Test Chart
(Rearranged IT8.7/3) with 928 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
"ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual" Test Chart with 1617 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
"ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Random" Test Chart with 1617 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
"ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual" Test Chart with 1485 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
"ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random" Test Chart with 1485 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
12 Version 2015
Table of Contents
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Test chart structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
"PrintOpen Standard 210" Test Chart with 210 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
"PrintOpen Extended 840" Test Chart with 840 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
"PrintOpen Basic 210" Test Chart with 210 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
"PrintOpen Basic 135" Test Chart with 135 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
CMY Test Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
"PrintOpen Standard" Test Chart with 135 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
RGB test charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
"PrintOpen RGB Standard" Test Chart with 135 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
"PrintOpen RGB Extended" Test Chart with 840 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
General Information about Special Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Special Test Chart for Strip Readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Control Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
"Ugra/FOGRA media strip" Version 1.2 with 52 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
"Ugra/FOGRA media strip V2-agx" Version 2.0 with 46 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
"PCS control strip 40AB/40A" with 40 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
"PCS control strip 60AB/60A" with 60 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
"MB_100_70_40_CMYK" and "MB_100_80_40_CMYK" Color Control Blocks with 13 Patches
and "MB_100_75_50_25_CMYK" with 17 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Table of Contents
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

DIPCO "Prinect 4GS strip" with 28+1 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
"Prinect/Fogra 4 strip" with 40+1 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
"HD Proof Color Bar" with 32 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
"PCS 19_100_80_40_Gray" with 19 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
"ECI_GrayConL", "ECI_GrayConM" and ECI_GrayConS" with 52, 32 or 6 Patches . . . . . 126
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
CMY-K Linearization Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
"PCM 13 CMYK" and "PCM 25 CMYK" Four-color Linearization Strips each with 13 or 25 Steps
127
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
"MB_Process_13" and "MB_Process_25" single-color linearization strips with 13 and 25 steps
respectively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Linearization Strips for Color Proof Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Colorimeters
Colorimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Densitometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Spectrophotometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Dotmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Color measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Overview of Legacy Colorimeters (Online Measuring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Automatic Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Manual Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Measuring a test chart or a control element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Notes on the Colorimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Techkon Colorimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Manual Measurement of the Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
GretagMacbeth SpectroScan Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Automatic Measurement of the Test Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
GretagMacbeth SpectroScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO (spot)/(strip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
14 Version 2015
Table of Contents
Techkon TCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Strip readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
GretagMacbeth iCColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
X-Rite Eye-One iSis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
X-Rite PULSE (strip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
X-Rite DTP70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Notes on Measuring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
New Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Modification of the ISO Measurement Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Konica-Minolta FD-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
X-Rite i1Pro 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Measure with tray and scan ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Data Formats of Measured Data
Data Formats of Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Color Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Settings for the Colorimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Measurement sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Saving of the measured color data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Saving Color Data in the ICC Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Importing the Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Format of File with Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
General Information about Color Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Format definition of the color data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Optional details about the printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Theory and Practice
Definitions and Fundamental of Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Primary Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Mixed Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Secondary Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tertiary Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Complementary Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Dominant Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Table of Contents
Complementary Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Color Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Color Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Color Gamut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Rules of Color Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Additive Color Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Subtractive Color Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Halftone color mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Inks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chromatic/Achromatic Reproduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Total Dot Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
UCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
GCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Printing Characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Dot Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Gray Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Gradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Notes on the CIE XYZ System and xy Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Notes on the CIELAB Color Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Hue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Hue Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Chroma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Relative Chroma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Lightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Relative Lightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Color Distance ΔE (Delta E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Process Standards, Reference Files and Profiles in Color Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Overview of the Process Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Overview of the Reference Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Overview of the Reference Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Index
16 Version 2015
About This Documentation

This documentation applies to "Color Toolbox" version 15.0. This manual contains all the information
you need for using Color Toolbox.
i
i
Note: Remember that the printed documentation may differ in its contents from the online
documentation (PDF, Online Help) as it is not always possible for technical reasons to incor-
porate the latest modifications into the printed manuals. You can always find the latest
information in the online documentation.
Structure of this Documentation

This description refers to the fully licensed Color Toolbox 15.0 with its programs/options:
• Quality Monitor 15.0: Program for the analysis and quality control of color standards for printing
and proofing based on color measurements
• Profile Tool 15.0: Program for creating ICC press and proof profiles
Some functions of Color Toolbox 15.0 are not available or they have constraints if all the components
are not enabled by the relevant license keys.
What you should already know

We assume that you are familiar with the Windows® operating systems that are supported.
Other documentation
You can find more information in the following documentation:
• in the enclosed "How to get started" leaflet
• in Heidelberg Prinect Licensing – Operation manual
• in the description of the "Prinect Color Toolbox 2015" installation
• in the "Calibration Manager / Calibration Tool" Reference and User's Guide
• in the "Prinect Image Control" User's Guide
• in the Prinect 2015 documentation

Symbols and Styles

The following typographical conventions are used in this manual:
• References to other chapters and sections are blue (on the screen) and underlined.
Example: See Abschnitt "Symbols and Styles", Seite 18.
• Quotes are used to indicate menus, folders, functions, hardware conditions, switch settings, sys-
tem messages, etc.
Example: Set the switch to "off".
• Menus, functions and sub-functions are separated by ">".
Example: Select "File > Open...".
• A plus sign is used to indicate that several keys have to be pressed at the same time.
Example: Press Alt+A.
Important Information
Important information in the text is marked by symbols that are used as follows:
Warning: Contains information that must be taken into consideration to protect the user
from injury.
Caution: Contains information that must be taken into consideration to prevent damage to
hardware or software.
i
i
Note: Contains important general or supplementary information about a specific topic.
Prerequisite: Lists requirements which must be fulfilled before the steps which follow can
be performed.
18 Version 2015
What's New?
What's New?
General
In this chapter, we would like to highlight to you briefly the main enhancements and changes in the
current Color Toolbox. The blue links will take you directly to more details on the topics.
What's New and Enhanced in Version 2015?

• Drag & Drop
Now, you can drag files and ICC profiles from the desktop and from Windows Explorer and drop
them directly onto the Color Toolbox status bar to open them there.
• Display of the "five recently used folders"
At the top, the Explorer of Color Toolbox now shows the "five recently used folders". To distin-
guish them from the other folders, they have a slightly darker background. Clicking the arrow
opens these folders and shows the files used recently.
• New Process Standards
New process standards were implemented, and all checks are in a single dialog now. This
increases the user friendliness because only a few clicks are necessary now.
· Proof Check (ISO 12647-7)
· Digital Print Check (ISO 15311)
· G7® CheckISO 15339)
· ΔE00=ΔE2000 PSO
• New devices
New devices have been released.
· X-Rite eXtract
· TECHKON SpectroDens
• Improved color scale with "Clipping-Rendering Intent"

What is Color Toolbox?

Color Toolbox 15.0 consists of two components:
• Profile Tool
• Quality Monitor
Profile Tool 15.0 lets you create ICC-based profiles of calibrated and controlled prints and proofs. The
profiles contain information about the devices and processes plus their parameters that can be used
for accessing the correct profiles during production. The software helps you generate the profiles in
an easy way.
Details about all the relevant process parameters (plates, substrates, inks, color order) are saved in
the profiles. This includes the relevant process standard in the form of dot gain curves and solid den-
sities or the color data of the process colors. You can also use these details for quality control and
setup of the press. Different procedures make a quality check systematic and simple and allow you
to record the devices and applications involved in the color workflow.
Quality Monitor 15.0 lets you check and evaluate device and process calibrations, ICC profiles and
proof corrections and lets you document the results. The focal point of this software is to check the
process parameters of the imagesetters and platesetters, printing processes and proofers you use.
The measured data required for this are recorded using defined test equipment.
The software helps you record and evaluate the measured data in an easy way and gives you tips
about possible problems and their elimination.
Different procedures make a quality check systematic and simple and allow you to record the devices
and applications involved in the color workflow.
The quality assessments are based on a comparison of the color data sets of defined test charts and
test strips (e.g. ECI 2002, ISO 12642-2/ANSI IT8.7/4, ISO 12642/ANSI IT8.7/3, HDM, Ugra/FOGRA).
Color Toolbox 15.0 lets you measure test charts or test strips directly, either manually or automatically
with online spectrophotometers, densitometers or dotmeters. Densities or screen percentages can
also be measured in addition to the spectral values of the control element. The measured color data
are saved in the "ISO 12642" data format. This data format lets you use color data from external
sources (e.g. from measuring devices that are not supported). The color data can be interchanged by
means of an export function.
Color Toolbox (Quality Monitor) calculates quality characteristic values, e.g. statistical parameters
from Delta E (ΔE) evaluations, based on a comparison of color data sets. The results are shown in
different lists and diagrams in an easy-to-understand way and can also be printed as a record. This
lets you create quality reports, for example, as are required for certified businesses.
Test strips on the calibrated devices and/or processes are output and measured (spectral values, den-
sity values, screen percentages) to check device and process calibrations. The measured data are
then compared with the rated values.
A quick-to-measure test chart or a test strip is output and then measured to check proofer calibration.
Its spectral values are then compared with the color data saved in the proofer profile at the time the
profile was created.

The color data of a print test chart and a proof simulation are compared to check the accuracy of the
proof.
In addition to the comparison of two color data sets, a large number of color data sets created during
a certain period can also be evaluated. The results of this time series analysis are displayed in dia-
grams and tables and can also be printed as a record.
22 Version 2015
User Interface
User Interface
User Interface
We will give you an overview of the elements in the Heidelberg user interface and explain their func-
tions so that you can become familiar with this UI. We assume that you are familiar with the normal
operation of Windows.
Help
You can also display the Online Help with the F1 key, the "?" button or the "? > Help..." menu. You
will then find more details about the application function you selected (see Online Help).
Structure of the User Interface

The user interface of the Color Toolbox consists of "static" and "dynamic" elements. The static ele-
ments are always visible while the dynamic elements can change their appearance and contents
depending on the main application function that is currently in progress (see Main Function Bar (2)).

User Interface
Static operating elements:

• 1: Caption bar
• 2: Main function bar
Dynamic operating elements:

• 3: Menu bar
• 4: Tabs
• 5 and 6: Central workspace
• 7: Button bar
• 8: Status bar
• 9: Explorer panel
Operating Elements
The program opens in an application window that contains the following elements:
Caption Bar (1)
The caption bar runs across the top of the application window and contains
• the program icon with the system menu
• the program name with the version number and
• three icons on the right for minimizing, maximizing or restoring and exiting the program.
Moving Windows
You can move a window to any position by clicking the title bar and dragging the window while hold-
ing down the mouse button.
Window Size
You can make the window bigger by dragging at the sides or corners of the window with the mouse.
The minimum size is 1024 x 740 pixels (the task bar is not covered).
24 Version 2015
User Interface
Buttons
Minimize: Shrinks the window to icon size in the task bar.
Maximize: Maximizes the window to fit the screen.
Restore: Restores the last window size.
Close: Closes a window or dialog. You also exit the program when you close the
application window.
Application Control Menu
The Windows application Control menu displays when you click the program icon.
The "Restore", "Minimize", "Maximize" and "Close" menu items have the same function as the three
boxes at the right of the caption bar.

User Interface
Main Function Bar (2)
The main function bar is always at the top of the central workspace and contains buttons for switch-
ing between the main functions of the application:
• "Measure"
• "Compare"
• "Analysis"
• "Create"
• "Edit"
• "Process standard"
"Measure" main function

When you click this button, you start operation for measuring colors in test charts or control ele-
ments. Measuring is manual or automatic with spectrophotometers, densitometers and dotmeters.
In this section, you can also import and export color data in an ASCII text format in compliance with
the "ISO 12642:1996" standard on the import/export of color data. You can import the color data of
Prinect Image Control directly.
The color data and process parameters can be shown in diagrams and tables and also printed as
records.

Click the "Compare" button to start operation for comparing two color data sets or ICC profiles to
check the quality. Two and three-dimensional diagrams allow you to assess the data in the color
space.
The quality assessment results are shown in diagrams and tables and can also be printed as quality
reports.
In this main function, the data about the current patch and the reference values are shown in a sep-
arate window.

Click the "Analysis" button to start operation for comparing several color data sets for long-term anal-
yses (time series) and for a production run check.
The quality assessment results are shown in diagrams and tables and can also be printed as quality
reports.
26 Version 2015
User Interface

When you click this button, you start operation for generating profiles.
The color data and process parameters can be shown in diagrams and tables and also printed as
records.

Click the "Edit" button to start operation for editing profiles ( view and change profile entries).

When you click this button, you start operation for selecting and editing a process standard. You can
create custom process standards for CMYK, multicolor and spot colors.
The nominal values and tolerances can be shown in diagrams and data tables and also printed as
records.
You can also import and export existing or new process standards with this main function.
Header/Menu Bar (3)
The menu bar is below the caption bar (1) and contains various menu items for operation. These vary
depending on the main function selected. Click on a menu to display a submenu with other items that
are also selected by clicking them.
In the predecessor versions of Color Toolbox, you were able to invoke almost all of the functions using
the menus. Most of the redundant menu commands were removed in the current version (for
example, the entire "View" menu). With a few exceptions (like "Open File or "Save File"), you invoke
functions either with menu commands or tabs (4) or buttons in the button bar (7). You can invoke the
"Tools" menu in all of the main functions.

User Interface
Tabs (4)
Measure Compare Analysis Create Edit Process stan-

dard
The tabs are located on the left beside the central workspace (5). These tabs allow you to switch
between different view modes for the current color data files or the profile documents. The number,
appearance and functions of the tabs depend on what main function is selected.
The test charts or control elements, color space diagrams, quality assessment diagrams and tables
are shown in the central workspace.
These functions can also be called up from the menu bar (3).
Central Workspace (5 and 6)

The central workspace displays test charts or test strips during color measurement, your data files or
profile documents, and color space and characteristic diagrams. The content depends on what main
function is selected. In most cases, the central workspace has an area that displays diagrams and
tables (5) and to the right an area for other operation and view options (6).
Parts of the area can be covered by dialogs that you can move. These GUI dialogs are called up via
buttons or menu commands.
Probes function: When test charts or test strips are being viewed and measured, dynamic color data
(CMYK, RGB, XYZ, LAB) appear when the color patches are selected with the mouse pointer.
28 Version 2015
User Interface
Button Bar (7)
The button bar is located below the central workspace. It contains buttons for frequently used options
that depend on the main function selected. These functions can also be called up from the menu bar
(3).
The order of operation is normally from left to right (as in the "Wizard" for user-assisted workflow).
Status Bar (8)
The status bar is always positioned along the lower edge. The maximum four lines display information
about the current document, such as the names of the current test charts, test strips, data files, pro-
files, the filters set during measurement or the current setting for calculation.
Drag & Drop

You can drag files and ICC profiles and drop them directly onto the Color Toolbox status bar to auto-
matically open them there. You can do this from the Windows Explorer without having to use the
"Open" function of Color Toolbox.
i
i
Note: This function only works if you drag and drop a file onto the status bar. It will not open
if you drop it on any other UI element of the Color Toolbox.
Depending on the module you are currently using, you can open the following files or ICC profiles with
Drag & Drop:
• Measure: Test chart files, ICC profiles
• Compare: Test chart files as reference files
• Analysis: several test chart files with multiple selection (like the "Add" function)
• Create: Test chart files, ICC profiles
• Edit: ICC profiles
• Process standard PSO ini data (saved process standards) as new process standard

User Interface
"Analysis" example
With the "Analysis" option, you can use the drag & drop function very efficiently in combination with
multiple selection.
1. Open an Explorer window showing the files to analyze
2. Use multiple selection to select all files to analyze
3. Use drag & drop to place these files onto the Color Toolbox status bar
Color Toolbox will open and analyze the files automatically.
30 Version 2015
User Interface
Explorer Panel (9)

The central workspace (red area) of the user interface was enhanced by an Explorer panel that is nor-
mally hidden. This allows you to select your data faster. Drag the vertical bar to the left with the
mouse. You then see the Explorer panel (yellow area) where you can look for and open the folders
and files you want with a double click.
After you selected your file, you can push the Explorer panel back again to the right until you can only
see the vertical bar. The view you selected in the panel remains unchanged even if you open other
files or folders with menus or buttons in the meantime. We recommend that you select files/folders
in the Explorer panel especially if they are located in different sources to the default folders, e.g.
through your network or on other data media.
Files are sorted by their creation/modification date (most recent file first) and not by alphanumeric
order when you check the "Sorting by date" box.
Recently Used Folders

The Explorer bar also displays the five recently used folders.
You find them in "Recent Folders".

User Interface
Dialogs
In the Color Toolbox user interface, a dialog is a modal window that is opened by means of a button
or a menu command. It has various elements that you use to define your settings for operation of the
current main function of the program.
Modal means that the dialog lies on top of the application window and must be dealt with first.
Lists
A list has several lines with different items that you select by clicking the one you want, for example,
a file in a file structure.
You can use the scroll bar to view other items if the list is long.
32 Version 2015
User Interface
List Box
This is a single-line list box that displays when you click the item or the arrow. You can select only
one item at a time from this list. This item then appears in the list box.
You can use the scroll bar to view other items if the list is long.
Check Box
Check box
Multiple selection is possible with check boxes. You can select any number of check boxes if there is
a group of them. Text beside the box describes the function of the check box.
Radio Button
You can select one item from a selection of items with a radio button. In other words, only one option
at a time can be selected. Text beside the box describes the function of the radio button.
Text Box
You can type data or text into a text box. You can also enter an item from a list into such a box with
a double click or by copying and pasting it.

User Interface
Text boxes are frequently formatted to accept only certain inputs and automatically reject others.
Displays
Information is shown in a display. The central workspace displaying diagrams and tables is the largest
one. You can use check boxes, radio buttons, buttons or menu commands to set view options.
Folder/Directory
A folder or directory is an element in the file system. You can find other folders or files in it. Their
names must differ by at least one character, for example, to keep different profile descriptions sepa-
rate.
Click a folder in a popup menu once to open and display all other subfolders in it. You can also click
the arrow on the right.
You can open a folder in a list box with a double click.
34 Version 2015
User Interface
Folder Structure
You can select the view mode for folders and files in this list:
• 1: Details
• 2: List
• 3: Profiles
Click on...
to go up one level.
to go to the home directory of the current user.
to create a new folder in the current folder which you can name as desired.
Online Help
You can call up the Online Help with the F1 key or with the "? > Help..." menu.
Dialogs have a button with a "?" that you can also use to call up the Online Help.
The Online Help appears in its own window that has two parts. The Help texts are shown on the right.

User Interface
Column Width
You can change the column width by clicking the arrows between the two columns, for example, if
you wish to spread the contents briefly. The left part (contents and search area) becomes wider if you
click the the right arrow, correspondingly the Online Help part becomes wider if you click the left
arrow.
You can also change the column width by dragging at the edges.
36 Version 2015
User Interface
Forwards/Backwards
Using the arrows in the header and footer of every page, you can move from one page to the next. In
this way, you can browse through the Online Help from start to finish just like a book.
The up arrow returns you to the page you started on in Online Help.
Contents
The contents are shown on the left. When you click a subject, you go to that page in the Online Help.
Full Text Search
Click this tab to display a text box where you can type the term you are looking for and then hit the
Enter key. All occurrences of the term are displayed. When you click a a selected page, you go to that
point in the Online Help. The term you are looking for is highlighted in gray.
Hyperlinks
Hyperlinks are underlined, blue text that you can use to jump to somewhere else in the documenta-
tion (example: Online Help).

User Interface
Print/Page Setup
To print one or more pages from the Online Help, you can set up a page with the right icon. Use the
left icon to call up the Windows print dialog where you can set other options.
38 Version 2015
Working with "Measure"
i
i
Note: Some functions are not available or they have constraints if you have not licensed all
the integrated programs (Profile Tool 15.0 and Quality Monitor 15.0) of Color Toolbox 15.0.
The properties of a printing process must be known in order to create an ICC output profile. You get
this information by printing a test chart and then measuring it with a colorimeter.
The quality assessments made with Color Toolbox are based on a comparison of the measured data
of defined test charts and control elements.
"Measure" contains all the steps you need for measuring a test chart or a control element with online
spectrophotometers, densitometers and dotmeters. The values measured are saved to a test chart file
in a format that complies with the ISO 28178 specification.
You can use the buttons in the button bar and tabs or menu commands to call up dialogs or diagrams
where you can select data, define settings or perform measurements.
You can create a new data file by measuring a test chart or test strip or by importing existing data if,
for example, you wish to extract the color data from a large test chart, convert color data for a mod-
ified process or find the mean of several measurements. In this way, you can create a new test strip
that you then can use as a reference for a comparison with another test strip or for a long-term anal-
ysis.
To calculate an ICC output profile, you need a test chart with at least 100 color patches.
The user interface has the following functions:
• "New" (File): You can select a test chart, test strip or a linearization strip. Your choice must
match the element that you wish to measure. See "Color Toolbox - New measurement file"
Dialog.
• "Open" (File): You can import measured color data and profiles with measured data if they are
available in an ISO 28178 text file. See "General Information about File Selection", Seite 65.
• "Measure" (Test chart): You can measure the patches of the printed test chart, control element
or linearization strip online (optionally with density and spectral values). See "Color
measurement of test chart" Dialog.
• "Process parameters": You can define the printing process parameters (data about output
device, paper grade, process color, screening and plate). See "Process parameters" Dialog.
• "Save" (File): You can save the data to an ASCII text file in the "ISO 28178" format. See ""Save
file" Dialog", Seite 75.
• "Test chart": You can display the currently loaded test chart, control elements or linearization
strips with color patches and view information about the current patch. See ""Test chart" View",
Seite 100.
• "Process standard": You can display an overview of CIELAB color values (color bars and ab dia-
gram), dot gain curves and gray balance for the currently loaded test chart or test strip with tol-

erances for a printing standard that you selected. See ""Process Standards"", Seite 103 (single
views with details in the "Substrate", "Color values", "Dot gain" and "Gray values" tabs).
• "Substrate": You can display the substrate CIELAB color values (paper). See ""Substrate" View",
Seite 135.
• "Color values": You can display the CIELAB color values, especially for primaries (CMYK) and
secondaries (RGB). See ""Color values" View", Seite 136.
• "Dot gain": You can view the dot gain or printing characteristic. See ""Dot gain" View", Seite 138.
• "Gray values": You can display the gray values (gray balance). See ""Gray values" View", Seite
143.
• "Ink zones": You can view the ink stability in all ink zones as ΔE values or density values. The
process standard is also shown. See ""Ink zones" View", Seite 146.
• "Gradual fading": You can view the gradual fading of ink on the entire sheet as ΔE values or den-
sity values. The process standard is also shown. See ""Gradual fading" View", Seite 152.
• "File > Export Lab measurement data": You can save the measured Lab data to a "CSV file". See
""Save table as CSV file" Dialog", Seite 218.
• "File > Print": You can print tables and diagrams as quality reports. See "General Information
about Printing Your Data", Seite 57.
• "File > Preferences": General preferences for the main functions. See "General Information
about Preferences", Seite 43.
• "Test chart > Calculate mean data": You can import and average color data from various test
charts or control elements. See "Mean calculation of test chart data" Dialog.
• "Test chart > Edit color patch": You can enter XYZ and Lab values for manual correction of a
selected color patch. See "Color patch editor" Dialog.
• "Test chart > Calculate from profile": You can calculate color data for a test chart or control ele-
ment from a profile if no measurement data are available. See Calculate from profile.
• "Test chart > Extract measurement data": You can create a new test chart or a control element
using the color data of the currently loaded test chart. See "Extracting test chart data" Dialog.
• "Test chart > Correct - Smoothing": You can correct and smooth deviating values or correct the
data taking into account the fluorescent whitening agents. See "Smoothing of color data" Dialog.
• "Test chart > Correct - Fluorescent whitening": You can correct and smooth deviating values or
correct the data taking into account the fluorescent whitening agents. See "Correction of color
data" Dialog.
• "Test chart > Convert - ...": You can convert color data for a changed print process (color values,
paper white, test chart data or calibration data, see "Conversion of color data" Dialog).
40 Version 2015
• "Tools > Color calculator": You can view source and target color values for the output profile. See
"Color calculator", Seite 2.
• "Tools > Device link profile": You can calculate a device link profile from two ICC profiles, see
"Device link profile", Seite 7.
• "Tools > Profile smoothing": You can convert an ICC profile using a low-pass filter to enhance
profile quality by smoothing the color space even further. See "Profile smoothing", Seite 13.
• "Tools > Gray balance calibration": You can calculate gray correction data to optimize gray bal-
ance for process calibration or edit reference data for gray correction of a process calibration.
See "Gray Balance Calibration", Seite 15.
• "Tools > Gray balance optimization": You can calculate gray balance optimization data for pro-
cess calibration. See "Gray Balance Optimization", Seite 21.
You can find more details in:

• Creating a File with Measured Data
• Dialogs
• "Views and Diagrams", Seite 99
You can interrupt your work at any time, save the settings you have made to your measured data file
and resume your work later on. You can repeat individual steps (for example, measure the data with
a different device) or change certain settings. However, you cannot change the profile and test chart
type during your work. If you want to do this, you must create a new color data file or open an existing
one.

Creating a File with Measured Data

Color Toolbox lets you measure test charts or control elements directly, either manually or automat-
ically with online spectrophotometers, densitometers or dotmeters.
Densities or screen percentages can also be measured in addition to the spectral values of the control
element. The measured color data are saved in the "ISO 28178" data format. This data format lets
you use color data from external sources (e.g. from measuring devices that are not supported). The
color data can be interchanged by means of an export function.
Selecting and Printing a Test Chart

Test charts or test strips are not output directly from Color Toolbox but through an image editing pro-
gram. The software shipment includes different test charts and test strips as data sets in TIFF format
and many as well as a PDF file. Select one of these TIFF or PDF files. Use a layout or image editing
program when you are ready to output the test chart. You must make a proof print or proof of sepa-
ration films or plates you created.
You need special test charts for some colorimeters such as strip readers (GretagMacbeth iCColor,
GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip), GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO (spot and strip), X-Rite DTP41, X-Rite
DTP45, X-Rite DTP70 and X-Rite iSis). These are also located as data sets in "Testcharts".
You need a printout of the test chart to be able to measure the color patches in the test chart.
1. Select a test chart or control element that matches the quality check you want and/or the profile
you wish to create. Take into account the colorimeter you are using when you select the test
chart (for more details, see "Test Charts and Control Strips", Seite 79).
2. Print your test chart or control element (print, proof).
Measuring the Test Chart, Test Strip or Linearization Strip

You can measure the values either online or offline. Normally, the instrument is connected to your
PC, allowing the measured data to be transferred directly to Color Toolbox (online measurement). The
data can also be measured with another program (e.g. supplied by the manufacturer of the instru-
ment) and saved in the "ISO 28178" format (offline measurement).
3. If not already done, connect the instrument to the serial or USB port of your PC (if necessary,
use an adapter).
4. When you have a print of the test chart, test strip or linearization strip, start Color Toolbox.
(5). Normally, the application launches showing the "Measure" main function. If not, click the "Mea-
sure" tab.
The "Measure" user interface displays.
42 Version 2015
i
i
Note: Color measurement conditions are set and checked in the "Preferences" dialog (in the
"Measure" tab). New settings, however, do not apply to the document presently open but
only to new documents.
6. Open the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog by clicking "New".

7. Select a test chart, control element (test strip) or linearization strip from the list boxes and
enable the type you want. Confirm your selection with "OK".
A measurement data file appears, matching your selection. All further program settings will be
applied to this file.
The patches in this test chart file are gray. The first color patch to be measured is selected.
44 Version 2015
8. Open the "Color measurement of test chart" dialog by clicking "Measure" or with the "Test chart
> Measure" menu.

9. Select the connected device from the list.

10. Click "Connect" to establish the connection between the device and the application.
11. Check "Start automatically" in "Save and Repeat chart measurement" (see "Color measurement
of test chart" Dialog) if you wish to measure a number of test charts or control elements with
the same measuring device.
The procedure for measuring the data is similar for all devices except for the instruments for auto-
matic measurement.
More information about the different colorimeters can be found in the respective user documentation
and in "Colorimeters", Seite 131.
i
i
Note: If you use a device for automatic measurement, the test chart will appear as a dia-
gram. As many as three patches are marked (depending on the device). You must set refe-
rence positions at these points on the printout used for measuring the data. Use the arrow
keys to go to these positions. The "question marks" are replaced by "OK" in the diagram.
In the case of X-Rite DTP41, the special test chart with its stripes is shown. Here you must specify
whether a strip will have 15, 30 or 45 color patches.
46 Version 2015
You also measure strips with the GretagMacbeth iCColor. Pay attention to the instructions in the dis-
play. You will be asked to have the test chart at hand and to follow the instructions.
You must perform white calibration every time before you start measuring. Details can be found in
the documentation of the respective manufacturer.
12. Click "Calibrate".
Notes on white calibration appear. These vary according to the device connected (for example,
"Place SPM on the base plate").
13. Follow the instructions and confirm with "OK".
White calibration is performed.
14. For manual measurement, position the aperture of the device over the first patch in the test
chart or control element.
15. Click "Start" to measure the various color patches of the test chart or control element.
The patches are measured as follows, varying according to the device you use:
• With handheld devices, measurement is triggered by pressing down the measuring head or by
pressing the button on the device.
• With strip readers (e.g. X-Rite DTP41), a strip of the special test chart is scanned and automati-
cally measured.
• The entire test chart is measured automatically if you use GretagMacbeth iCColor, X-Rite Eye-
One iSis or X-Rite DTP70.
• With GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip), press down the measure button and slowly move along the
scanning ruler over the patches of the special test chart.
• With X-Rite PULSE (strip), a target ID must first be scanned. Press the Operation button and
slowly move the device along the Pathfinder guide over the patches of the special test chart.

• With GretagMacbeth SpectroScan and GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO, all the color patches are
automatically selected and measured in succession once the reference positions have been set.
i
i
Note: If necessary, you can interrupt the measuring process by clicking "Stop", for example,
if you chose the wrong position.
Double-click the correct patch and continue measuring by clicking "Start".
Color patches measured after the "bad patch" are measured again.
16. After the patches are measured, click "Check" to start an analysis of the measured values.
17. If necessary, you can measure implausible values again by placing the aperture over the patch
in question, enabling the "Single step measurement" box and clicking "Start".
18. If all your data are correct, finish color measurement and save the data to a file in "ISO 28178"
format by clicking "Save".
You can now continue work as follows:
• View three different CIE color spaces in "Compare":
· ""xy diagram" View", Seite 174
· ""ab diagram" View", Seite 176
· ""La/Lb diagram" View", Seite 178
• Check the data for compliance with the process standard (see ""Process Standards"", Seite 103)
and/or create a user-defined printing standard (see "Working with "Process standard"", Seite
345) if you also measured density values.
• Set process parameters (see "Process parameters" Dialog)
• Correct the measured data
· by smoothing (see "Smoothing of color data" Dialog)
· by correcting the fluorescent whitening effect (see "Correction of color data" Dialog)
48 Version 2015
• Convert the measured data in three different ways
· see "Conversion of color data - color values" Dialog
· see "Conversion of color data - paper white" dialog
· see "Conversion of color data - Calibration data" Dialog
• View the dot gain or printing characteristics (see ""Dot gain" View", Seite 138)
• Check ink stability (ink zones) and gradual fading (see ""Ink zones" View", Seite 146 and
""Gradual fading" View", Seite 152)
• Run quality checks (see "Working with "Compare"", Seite 159 and "Working with "Analysis"",
Seite 219).
• Find the mean of data if you measured several test charts of the same type (see "Mean
calculation of test chart data" Dialog).
Measuring and Evaluating Spot Colors

There is a new test chart file (User_Spot_PW.ref) for measuring and evaluating spot colors.
The procedure comprises two steps.
• In step 1, you measure the spot color and assign a name.
• In step 2, you measure the paper white (PW) of the printing material.
i
i
Note: Step two (measuring the paper white) is mandatory because color values are mean-
ingless if the material on which to print them is unknown.
Measuring a Spot Color

1. Open the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog by clicking "New" (1).
2. Choose the option "Control strip" and "User-defined" (2) in the list box
3. In the dialog that opens, select the test chart file "User_Spot_PW.ref" (3)
4. Click "Open" (4).

The "New measurement file" dialog window opens.

5. Click "OK".
The test chart file for spot color measurement is now represented by color patches with a gray back-
ground in the dialog. The first color patch to be measured is selected.
50 Version 2015
6. Connect the spectrophotometer to the USB port of your PC (e.g. a Techkon-SpectroDens-Pre-

mium).
7. Click "Measure".
As we are going to measure single patches, we select the "TECHKON SpectroDens (spot)" for the dot
mode in our example.
9. Click "Connect".

After successful connection, a calibration is required before measuring can start.

10. Place the device on the "white reference tile" and click "Calibrate".
"Ready" is displayed after successful calibration.
11. Click "Start".
12. Place the device on the spot color patch to measure, and press the green key on the device.
The color appears in the first color patch of the test chart file after successful measurement.
13. Place the device on the "white reference tile" and measure the "paper white" again.
Measuring is complete now, and the result appears in the dialog.
14. Click the "Save" button to save the result.
15. Click the "Close" button to finish the measurement.
Evaluating a Spot Color

As the spot color is usually printed on a printing material (paper value) differing from that in the list
and the measured value can greatly deviate form the value in the list due to a different area coverage,
the evaluation considers the following:
• Is the measured spot color inside the color space? If not, how well can it be matched?
• What is the "actual value", and how greatly does it differ from the value in the spot color table?
52 Version 2015
Evaluation With the Color Calculator

The color calculator is used to display source and target color values for output profiles.
You can check if the measured spot color is within the color space, and how well it can be replaced
by the standard CMYK process or an appropriate multi color process. This is vital for packaging or dig-
ital printing.
1. Click the "Measure" button in the main function bar.
2. Click "Open" and select the saved measurement file you want in the "Open" dialog.
3. In the menu bar, choose "Tools" > "Color Calculator".
The "Color Calculator" dialog window opens.
You need an ICC profile to calibrate your print process.

For CMYK, you can in most cases take the standard profile "ISOcoated_v2_eci.icc".
4. Click "Open" in the "Color Calculator" dialog window and select the profile measurement file you
want in the "Open file" dialog.
The profile is now transferred to the "Color Calculator" dialog window.
5. To evaluate a spot color, you must choose "Absolute colorimetric" for "Rendering Intent".

To view the measured LAB values, place the mouse pointer on the color patch of the test chart file.
6. Now enter the measured Lab values in the color calculator (1).
7. Click "Lab > CMYK" (2).

The color calculator will now calculate the values and display them in "ΔEab" and "ΔE00" (3).
You can see now if the measured color is within the color space and if it can reproduced with the
standard CMYK process.
If the calculation results in "ΔEab" and "ΔE00" < 1, the spot color is within the color scale of the spot
color table, or very close to it.
54 Version 2015
Values > 1 indicate that the spot color is outside the spot color table.
In our example, the "ΔEab" value is 2.3.
In other words, the spot color 4c - PANTONE 355 C is outside the 4c - CMYK spot color table.
With the "ΔE00" value, you can evaluate how well the measured spot colors can be replaced with the
standard CMYK process. This value offers a much better description of the color distance of saturated
colors.
In our example, the "ΔE00" value is 0.7 and therefore < 1. You can see that this spot color can be easily
replaced with CMYK process colors.

Menus, Buttons and Tabs

All relevant menu commands of the "Measure" main function are listed in the table below. Some of
the commands can also be triggered by buttons in the button bar or by tabs.
Menu/Button/Tab Function
File > New Opens the "Color Toolbox > - New measurement file"
dialog where you can select a test chart. Your settings
must match the test chart that you wish to measure.
The test chart displays in the central view area.
File > Open Opens a dialog where you can load a measurement data
file or an ICC profile with measured data that complies
with the ICC profile specification.
File > Close document Closes the open document, any data not saved will be
lost.
File > Save measurement data Opens a dialog where you can save your current data to
a file in a format that complies with the ISO 28178 spec-
ification.
File > Export Lab measurement data Opens a dialog where you can save your current data to
a file in a format that complies with the ISO 28178 spec-
ification.
File > Print Opens a dialog where you can select the diagrams and
tables to be printed.
File > Preferences Opens a dialog where you can enter general preferences
(set file locations, select the language of the GUI, switch
to the easy mode, enable the option for saving process
parameters), define settings for color measurement,
select a reference file for comparisons, define hot fold-
ers and master data (MDS), define settings for the proof
and CIE report, set tolerances and a custom quality
index (iQi).
File > Exit Closes the open documents in all the main functions
and exits Color Toolbox.
Any data not saved will be lost.
Test chart > Measure Opens the "Color measurement of test chart" dialog
where you can set up the colorimeter, measure the color
patches and check the values measured.
Test chart > Calculate mean data Opens the "Merging of test chart data" dialog, where
you can average color data from various measurements.
When you save your data, you create a new test chart
file that contains the mean measured values.
56 Version 2015
Test chart > Edit color patch Opens the "Edit color patch" dialog where you can man-
ually correct a patch by overwriting the XYZ and Lab val-
ues.
Test chart > Calculate from profile Opens the profile browser where you can select an ICC
profile from which the color data will then be calculated
automatically.
Test chart > Extract measurement data Opens the "Extracting of test chart data" dialog, where
you can copy color data from the currently open test
chart to a new test chart file of a different type.
You can only extract the data if all the patches of the
new test chart are contained in the source test chart.
Test chart > Correct - Smoothing Open the "Smoothing of color data" dialog where you
can trigger an automatic correction of the measured
data (plausibility check) or an intelligent smoothing of
the color data.
This function is relevant only for test chart data for cal-
culation of a profile. It is not relevant for control ele-
ments (test strips) or linearization strips.
Test chart > Correct - Fluorescent whiten- Opens the "Correction of color data" dialog where you
ing can correct the effect of fluorescent whitening agents
either by automatic paper white correction or by a spec-
tral conversion of the color data.
Test chart > Convert - Color data Opens the "Conversion of color data - color values" dia-
log where you can convert color data for a changed
printing process by entering new Lab values.
Test chart > Convert - Paper white Opens the "Conversion of color data - paper white" dia-
log where you can convert the current paper white for a
changed printing process by entering new Lab values.
Test chart > Convert - Test chart data Opens the "Conversion of color data - Test chart values"
dialog where you can convert color data for a changed
printing process by using the color data of a small test
chart or test strip.
Test chart > Convert - Calibration data Opens the "Conversion of color data - Calibration data"
dialog where you can convert color data for a changed
printing process using the calibration data (of lineariza-
tion strips) for an imagesetter.

Tools > Color calculator Opens the "Color calculator" dialog where you can view
source and target color values for the output profiles
(calculation uses profile conversion tables and the inte-
grated CMM).
? > Help... Starts the Online Help.
? > About Color Toolbox 15.0 Displays information about copyright, program version
and registration of Color Toolbox.
58 Version 2015
Dialogs
"Color Toolbox - New measurement file" Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "New" in the button bar or with the "File > New" menu.
"Measurement of new test chart"

In this dialog, you can select a test chart, control element or linearization strip to create a file where
the measured color data and any other settings (e.g. process parameters) will be saved.
Confirm your selection by clicking "OK". The dialog closes.
A new (empty) document with gray patches now appears in the application window.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog.
For example, you can then open an existing color data file or select a different main function in the
program ("Compare", "Analysis", "Create", "Edit" or "Process standard").
Use the appropriate menu commands or buttons to call up the other dialogs, for example:
• to open an existing file with measured data

• for colorimetric measurement of the test chart or control element (see "Color measurement of
test chart" Dialog)
• to extract data from test charts (see "Extracting test chart data" Dialog)
• to set process parameters (see "Process parameters" Dialog)
• to set the profile parameters (see ""Profile Generation Setup" Dialog", Seite 263)
• to calculate the profile (see ""Profile calculation" Dialog", Seite 289)
Create a new data file by selecting either a test chart, test strip or linearization strip from the appro-
priate list boxes. A miniature of the test chart or control element appears below the list boxes.
"Test chart"
Select a test chart from this list.

The "ISO 12642..." test charts are listed as "Visual" and "Random" versions. They only differ in the
arrangement of the color patches. In the "Random" version of the test chart, the patches are arranged
in such a way that the ink is always applied evenly in the ink zones when the test chart is proof-
printed to a press. You select the test chart type by clicking the relevant radio button below the list.
• "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" (standardized general test chart) with a total of 928 color patches.
This test chart contains just as many systematic CMY color graduations as the "PrintOpen Stan-
dard" test chart, but has much more combinations with black.
For that reason, measuring takes considerably longer. However, calculation of color composi-
tion/black generation is more accurate.
"ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual/Random" or "PrintOpen Extended 840" are better suited if you
want more accurate proofs.
• "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4" (standardized general test chart) with a total of 1617 color patches.
This test chart contains all the patches of the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart and the "ISO
12642-2 / ECI 2002" test chart. This test chart can be used generally for profiling prints and
60 Version 2015
proofs but is only suitable for automatic measurements because measuring 1617 patches takes
a long time.
• "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002": extended test chart with 1485 patches
This test chart is widespread and is used as a process standard. It contains all the patches of
the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart and a large number of patches of the "PrintOpen Stan-
dard 210" test chart. It also has much more CMY combinations with black for special black cal-
culations and very finely graduated CMY patches. This test chart can be used generally for pro-
filing prints and proofs but is only suitable for automatic measurements because measuring
1485 patches takes a long time.
• "HD Packaging 4Color": test chart with 1485 patches.
This test chart has all the patches of the "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002" test chart and can be used
especially in packaging printing for profile calculation, profile conversion and quality assess-
ments. The test chart is only suitable for automatic measurements because measuring 1485
patches takes a long time.
• "PrintOpen Basic 135": test chart with 135 color patches that can also be used as a test strip.
This test chart has patches of the "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002" test chart and can be used for profile
calculation, profile conversion and quality assessments.
Advantages: very suitable for manual measurements because measuring is fast and simple,
doesn't take up much space on a signature.
Disadvantage: not suitable for proof profiles.
• "PrintOpen Basic 210": test chart with 210 color patches that can also be used as a test strip.
This test chart has patches of the "ISO12642-2 / ECI 2002" and "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test
charts. It can be used for profiling printing processes, giving an average of the color data.
Benefits: very suitable for manual measurements because measuring is fast and simple, doesn't
take up much space on a signature.
Disadvantage: not suitable for "high-end" proof profiles.
• "PrintOpen Standard 210": test chart with 210 patches (CMYK).
This test chart is well suited for normal printing processes (offset, newspaper) and for desktop
color printers (laser, ink jet).
Advantage: faster measurement (manual measurement of colors) while still producing top-qual-
ity ICC output profiles
• "PrintOpen Extended 840": test chart with a total of 840 color patches on four pages. The first
single test chart is identical to "PrintOpen Standard 210".
This test chart should be chosen for more accurate proofs (e.g. Iris).
Good results are also produced by the "PrintOpen Standard 210" test chart for normal proof
applications (ink jet, thermosublimation).
• "PrintOpen Multicolor 5-C Version 3": test chart with 1229 color patches on each of the two
pages.

You need this test chart if you wish to create a press profile for five colors (CMYK and a spot
color red/orange, green or blue/purple) with the Multicolor option.
pages.
You need this test chart if you wish to create a press profile for six colors (CMYK and the two
spot colors red/orange and green) with the Multicolor option.
pages.
You need this test chart if you wish to create a press profile for seven colors (CMYK and the three
spot colors red/orange, green and blue/purple) with the Multicolor option.
• "PrintOpen CMY Standard": test chart with 135 patches (only CMY).
This test chart is well suited for normal printing processes (offset, newspaper) and for desktop
color printers (laser, ink jet).
Advantage: faster measurement (manual measurement of colors) while still producing top-qual-
ity ICC output profiles
• "PrintOpen RGB": test chart with 135 or 840 patches. The test charts only have graduations of
the three primary colors cyan, magenta and yellow but no black.
These test charts are used for output devices that only print cyan, magenta and yellow, achiev-
ing enough saturation with them to give satisfactory results (e.g. sublimation printers).
· "Standard": test chart with 135 patches (RGB).

It can be used for profiling printing processes, giving an average of the color data.
Benefits: very suitable for manual measurements because measuring is fast and simple,
doesn't take up much space on a signature.
Disadvantage: not suitable for "high-end" proof profiles.
· "Extended": test chart with a total of 840 color patches on four pages. The first single
test chart is identical to the "PrintOpen RGB Standard" test chart.
This test chart is suited for more accurate proofing for profiling transparency imageset-
ters and desktop printers.
62 Version 2015
"Control strip"
Select a test strip from this list.

Some of the strips are available in different versions. You can select the "Type" you want by clicking
the appropriate radio button below the list.
• "ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip": test strip as a supplement to the print control strip for a uniform
gray balance check. It is a standardized test strip based on the color characterization data of
FOGRA ("Ugra/FOGRA media strip").
This test strip doesn't take up much space on a signature and manual measurement of the 51
(32 or 6) patches is fast and simple.
· "L": This refers to the long version of the test strip with 51 patches.
It is to be placed vertically, parallel to printing direction, and is especially suited for
checking ink balance and any faults in gray balance.
· "M": This refers to the medium version of the test strip with 32 patches (there are less
graduations in the primary colors). This strip should only be used if there is not enough
room for the "L" version.
· "M i1": This refers to the medium version of the test strip with 32 patches (there are less
graduations in the primary colors). This strip should only be used if there is not enough
room for the "L" version.

· "S": This refers to the small version of the test strip with only six patches (three gray bal-
ance pairs). This test strip is designed only for a visual check.
• "HD Proof Color Bar": test strip with 32 patches for checking the quality of proofer calibration.
This test strip doesn't take up much space on a signature and manual measurement of the 32
patches is fast and simple. It is not a standardized test strip but is similar to the "Ugra/FOGRA
media strip". Only a few patches are found in the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart.
• "MB_100_80_40", "MB_100_70_40" and "MB_100_75_50_25" (CMYK): Single-line CMYK test

strips with 13 or 17 patches (pooling of DIPCO color control blocks) for print quality assessments
(solids and dot gain) and for customizing process calibrations to new conditions.
These test strips do not take up much space on a signature and manual measurement of the 13
or 17 patches is fast and simple.
• "PCS control strip": test strip developed by Heidelberg with 40 or 60 patches for proof and print
quality assessments (solids, dot gain, color gamut). It doesn't take up much space on a signa-
ture and manual measurement of the 40 or 60 patches is fast and simple. It is not a standard-
ized test strip but is similar to the "Ugra/FOGRA media strip".
· "40AB": This refers to the double-line version of the test strip with 40 patches.
· "40A": This refers to the single-line version of the test strip with 40 patches.
· "60AB": This refers to the double-line version of the test strip with 60 patches.
· "60A": This refers to the single-line version of the test strip with 60 patches.
• "Prinect 4GS strip": test strip with 28+1 patches for quality assessments (solid tints, dot gain,
color gamut).
This test strip is mainly found when printing with a Speedmaster. It doesn't take up much space
on a signature and manual measurement of the 28+1 patches is fast and simple. Automatic
measurement with Prinect Image Control is possible.
The test strips are designed for machine-specific, maximum press widths so that they can
always be printed without affecting any important graphic parts. The GS strip also have half-
tones (70%) in addition to solid tints.
64 Version 2015
• "Prinect/FOGRA 4": test strip with 40+1 patches for quality assessments (solid tints, dot gain,
color gamut).
This test strip is widespread and is used as a process standard. It is mainly found when printing
with a Speedmaster. It doesn't take up much space on a signature and manual measurement of
the 40+1 patches is fast and simple. Automatic measurement with Prinect Image Control is pos-
sible.
• "Ugra/FOGRA media strip": test strip with 52 or 46 patches for use in digital proofing, the PDF
workflow, and as a quality check for other four-color output systems or effects of image editing
in the CMYK mode or other prepress work.
The test strip doesn't take up much space on a signature and manual measurement of the 52 or
46 patches is fast and simple.
· "V1": This test strip contains 52 6 x 6 mm patches arranged in two rows, with CMYK tonal
values that are mainly taken from the ISO 12642 / IT8.7/3 standard.
· "V2-agx": This test strip contains 46 6 x 6 mm patches arranged in two rows, with CMYK
tonal values that are all taken from the ISO 12642 / IT8.7/3 standard.
· "V2-bcde": The same test strip as "V2-agx", but single-row.
• "User defined": You can also define any number of your own minispots (test strips). First, you
must open a reference file (e.g. "User_Defined.ref"). Then you can click "Edit" and modify the
test strip (for a description, see "Edit control strip" Dialog).
· "User_Defined.ref": A minispot with 19 patches (1 row and 19 columns) is defined that you
can modify as needed.
· "User5C_MB_100_80_40BCMYX.ref": A minispot with 16 patches (1 row and 16 columns)

is defined for multicolor applications with five colors (CMYK+R, CMYK+G or CMYK+B).
You can modify this minispot as needed.
· "User6C_MB_100_80_40BCMYXZ.ref": A minispot with 19 patches (1 row and 19 col-

umns) is defined for multicolor applications with six colors (CMYK+R+G, CMYK+R+B or
CMYK+G+B). You can modify this minispot as needed.
· "User7C_MB_100_80_40BCMYXZ.ref": A minispot with 22 patches (2 row and 11 col-

umns) is defined for multicolor applications with seven colors (CMYK+R+G+B). You can
modify this minispot as needed.

"Linearization strip"
Select a linearization strip from this list.

Some of the strips are available in different versions. You can select the "Type" you want by clicking
the appropriate radio button below the list.
• "PCM": Four-color linearization strips each with 13 or 25 tonal graduations for creating and
checking calibrations for prints and proofs.
• "MB_Process": Single-color linearization strips with 7, 13 or 25 tonal graduations for creating and
checking calibrations for film and plate.
· "Standard": Linearization strip with 7 tonal graduations.
· "13": Linearization strip with 13 tonal graduations.
· "25": Linearization strip with 25 tonal graduations.
• "MD_C...": Linearization strips for creating and checking base linearizations for proofing devices
with Color Proof Pro.
· "MD_C2_TotalInkLimit V1/V2": Linearization strips for determining the total ink limit.
· "MD_C3_InkLimitChannel": Linearization strip for determining the optimal ink limit for
each primary color.
· "MD_C4_Lin4c/Lin6c/Lin7c": Linearization strips for linearization (4, 6 or 7 colors).
· "MD_C5_QualityControl": Linearization strip for checking the quality of linearization.
i
i
Note: You can open an existing color data file or an ICC output profile (with measured data)
created with Color Toolbox with the "File > Open" menu.
When you have printed the test chart or test strip, the next step is to measure the color patches with
a measuring device in the "Color measurement of test chart" Dialog.
66 Version 2015
"Edit control strip" Dialog

You can call up this dialog in the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog by selecting the
"User defined" test strip, loading a reference file and then clicking "Edit".
You can define your own control element in this dialog.

All the boxes are set with default values that vary according to the reference data:
You can create your own test strip on the basis of these values or import other measured data with
"Import reference data".
"Name of the control strip"
You cannot change the file name afterwards ("User defined"). However, you can give the reference
data any name ("Save" in "Color Toolbox - New measurement file").
"Geometry"
You will find the "Number of patches", "Number of rows" and "Number of columns" of your test strip
in this section.
After checking the "Change geometry" box, you can change the "Number of rows" and "Number of
columns". The system automatically calculates the "Number of patches". Rows are marked by letters
and columns by numbers.

The "ID" in the data table is computed from this information, e.g. if you have 2 rows and 10 columns,
the table automatically displays IDs "A1" thru "A10" and "B1" thru "B10" (a total of 20 rows).
Each row in the data table corresponds to one patch, displaying the CMYK values and the color. New
patches are first created as white boxes (0% CMYK).
All patches can be edited as desired. The color in the box is matched automatically.
i
i
Note: Any defined patches are deleted or moved to a different position if you change the
geometry later.
The dialog then closes when you click "OK".

A miniature of the new element displays (if possible) in the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file"
dialog.
A new (empty) document with gray patches appears in the application window when you click "OK".
If you made changes, you can first save the modified file under a new name.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without changing the user-defined control element.
68 Version 2015
Loading a Combined Test Chart

When you open a combined test chart, you must select which element you wish to use. An overview
displays, allowing you to select the test element you want with a click. The test element (for example,
for checking the zonal ink stability) is marked red and you can load or extract it by clicking the appro-
priate button. Alternatively, you can load the test element by double-clicking it.
After the element is opened, a small overview lets you view the position of the test element in the
combined test chart when you right-click the file name in the status bar.

70 Version 2015
"Color measurement of test chart" Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Measure" in the button bar or with the "Test chart > Measure"
menu.
In this dialog, you first configure a colorimeter for measurement of the color patches, then you can
measure the data and finally check the values measured. The measured data are saved to the data
file and displayed in the current view.
"Measurement device setup"
The popup menu lists all devices that can be used for online measurement of the patches in a printed
test chart or test strip.
The device must be connected to your PC (details can be found in the respective manual of your
device and/or in "Colorimeters", Seite 131).
When you select your device, the program and the device are connected by clicking "Connect".
The device is automatically initialized. During this process, the following parameters are set:

• Measurement of spectral or XYZ values (if the device cannot measure spectral values)
• Illuminant D50
• Observer angle 2
Those colorimeters where measurement is automatic also show a graphic display of the test chart
(for example, GretagMacbeth SpectroScan).
For automatic measurement, for example, using the GretagMacbeth SpectroScan table, you must set
reference positions. These can be seen in the diagram below.
If you use strip readers (e.g. GretagMacbeth iCColor, X-Rite DTP41) for automatic measurement, you
must specify the type of strip (15, 30 or 45).
72 Version 2015
The colorimeter must be calibrated every time before you start measuring. Follow the instructions
that appear after you click "Calibrate". These can vary from device to device.
White calibration is usually performed on a white tile of a calibration target or base plate included in
the shipment of the colorimeter.
You can check "Start automatically" in "Save and Repeat chart measurement" if you wish to run a
series of measurements with the same measuring device. This means that you do not have to recali-
brate your device before you measure the next element. You save your color data after measurement
by clicking "Save". You can then start to measure the next element immediately.
"Color measurement"
"Measurement conditions"
This box shows the instrument settings and which values will be saved in the measurement data file.
If possible, all the values (density and/or spectral values if supported by the device) should be mea-
sured.
i
i
Note: You can define your settings for measurement and the instrument in the "Preferences
> Measure" dialog. However, these changes will only apply to the next document created.

"Filter"
You can change the ISO measurement condition not only in the Preferences but also in the "Color
measurement" dialog. This lets you measure paper white directly in the test chart under different
conditions, for example, to determine the degree of fluorescent whitening in the paper. The change is
then applied as a new setting in the Preferences.
You can select only measurement conditions that are supported by the currently setup measuring
device. This means: For older measuring devices, only M0 (= non-specified illumination) is available.
Only Konica-Minolta FD-7 and X-Rite Eye-One (except for the "IO (strip)" variant) offer a selection of
all four filter conditions (see "New Devices", Seite 160 for details about these devices).
"Color patch measurement"
Measurement depends on the device you selected. Position the device over the patch you wish to
measure, insert the strip or set the reference positions for test chart readers and then click "Start".
The next patch in the sequence is then automatically activated after each measurement. If you
enabled "Single step measurement", only the selected patch is measured and remains selected after
measurement.
You can cancel measurement at any time by clicking "Stop", for example, if the position you chose
was wrong.
i
i
Note: If you cancel measurement with "Stop", you can save the color data you have mea-
sured so far with the "Save As" dialog. Later you can open this color data file again and con-
tinue measuring the color patches.
Procedure: Select your colorimeter, connect and calibrate it, activate the next patch you
wish to measure and start measurement.
The patches are measured as follows, varying according to the device you use:
• With handheld devices, measurement is triggered by pressing down the measuring head or by
pressing the button on the device.
• With strip readers (e.g. X-Rite DTP41), a strip of the special test chart is scanned and automati-
cally measured.
• The entire test chart is measured automatically if you use GretagMacbeth iCColor, X-Rite Eye-
One iSis or X-Rite DTP70.
74 Version 2015
• With GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip), press down the measure button and slowly move along the
scanning ruler over the patches of the special test chart.
• With X-Rite PULSE (strip), a target ID must first be scanned. Press the Operation button and
slowly move the device along the Pathfinder guide over the patches of the special test chart.
• With GretagMacbeth SpectroScan and GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO, all the color patches are
automatically selected and measured in succession once the reference positions have been set.
Further details about the devices can be found in the manuals of the respective manufacturers and
in "Colorimeters", Seite 131.
"Check measured test chart values"
Click "Check" to start an analysis of the values measured. During the analysis, the program examines
all the results in their context. Implausible values are marked by a question mark. Such values may
either have been provoked by the specific properties of your printing process or are simply measuring
errors (see also "Notes on Measuring Data", Seite 159).
If one or the other question mark appears, measuring errors may have occurred. If there are many
question marks, it is more likely that the values measured were provoked by certain properties in your
printing process.
Measure all patches with a question mark again. However, if question marks recur in the relevant
patches after the analysis has been concluded, but you are sure that the proof of the test chart has
no serious errors (e.g. test chart dirty or wrong-reading), you can accept the measured data by click-
ing "OK". The dialog closes.
i
i
Note: This analysis is performed automatically before every calculation of an ICC output
profile.
Open the """Save file" Dialog", Seite 75" by clicking "Save". You can save your measured data to a file
you name in ISO 12642 (IT8.7) format in this dialog.
Use the ""Open" Dialog", Seite 66 to open this file again.
Click "Close" to end color measurement without saving the measured data. The dialog closes.
You can also save your measured data to an ISO 12642 (IT8.7) file you name by clicking "Save mea-
surement data" in the button bar.

"Mean calculation of test chart data" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Calculate mean data" menu.
With this dialog, you can import data from the same type of test charts to Color Toolbox so that you
can average measured values. A document must be loaded in order to open this dialog. You must
have added at least one other test chart file in order to average the data.
i
i
Note: When you go to the "Analysis" main function, all the test chart files in the loaded
series are shown in the "List of test chart files to merge". For that reason, you should
remove any test chart files that are not to be averaged from the list.
This function is useful, for example, if the printing process is not stable, in other words, if there are
noticeable fluctuations in the (proof) print of the test chart. You can then measure the various signa-
tures with the printed test chart. In this way, you obtain mean values for your printing process.
If you have a "good" signature and would like it to feature more during your averaging process, you
can also use the same color data several times when determining the mean.
"Process colors"
"Test chart type"
The number of process colors and the test chart type of the open or empty (new) test chart file are
displayed here (for example, "4-color CMYK" and "ISO 28178").
Click "Add..." to open the "Open" dialog where you can search for and select the files you want.
"Measured data (.txt, .it8)" must be set for "Files of type".
When you double-click the file name or select the file and click "Open", the selected file is copied to
the "List of test chart files to merge" in the "Merging of test chart data" dialog. Select all files whose
color data are to be averaged. Multiple selection is possible.
i
i
Note: The number of process colors and test chart type must always match the open test
chart file.
76 Version 2015
You delete a selected file from the list by clicking "Remove".

When you click "Merge files...", the mean value is calculated for every measured value from all the
test chart files in the list.
The mean values replace the corresponding values in the open (first) test chart file.
The mean values are displayed as color patches.
Click "OK" to apply the mean data to the test chart file. The dialog closes. The measured data are dis-
played as color patches.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard the mean data.

"Color patch editor" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Edit color patch" menu.
This dialog lets you manually correct a patch by overwriting the XYZ and Lab values.
You can correct single patches in this way, for example, if there were errors in the measurement that
could not be corrected by a repeat measurement or if a patch is to have certain values.
The text boxes show defaults for the color patch that is selected when the dialog displays. You can
modify these values by overwriting them or by moving the marked area in the color circle or on the
color bar.
The values shown in the boxes are updated continuously. The original values (gray and in parenthe-
ses) are shown to the right of the text boxes so that you can compare them.
The color of the original values is shown below the color circle in "Original" and a "Preview" of the
new color shown to the right of it.
Click "OK" to apply the modified XYZ and Lab values to the test chart file. The dialog closes.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without changing the values.
78 Version 2015
Easy Way to Modify Several Patches

Normally, you must edit each patch separately if you wish to modify several patches in a test chart or
control element. This means that you have to re-display the dialog each time. You can, however, sim-
plify your work as follows:
1. In the test chart or test strip, enable the first patch you wish to change.
2. Open the dialog with the "Test chart > Edit color patch" menu.
3. Modify the XYZ and/or Lab values for this patch.
Do not click "OK" so that the dialog remains open.
i
i
Note: Any changes you make do not appear in the test chart or test strip until you confirm
them with "OK".
4. Double-click the next patch to be edited. The values and the color of this patch now display.
5. Modify the XYZ and/or Lab values for this patch.
6. Modify all the patches you want in this way.
7. Confirm all your changes with "OK".
The dialog closes, and the changes now appear in the test chart or control element.
You can now check your changes visually by moving the mouse pointer to the appropriate patches.
The current values display to the right of the graphic. You can repeat this process as often as you want
if you wish to modify other patches or if you made a mistake.

Calculate from profile
i
i
Note: This function applies only to ICC profiles.
The data for a test chart can be calculated from the ICC press profile of a printing process (with cer-
tain restrictions in accuracy) if the process has no measurement data but needs them, for example,
to calculate an ICC profile with a different profile setting or for quality assessments. In this case, the
quality of the data depends on the accuracy of the profile calculation.
Procedure:
1. Create a new (empty) color data file. Click "New", select the test chart type you want in the
"Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog and confirm with "OK".
2. Call up the "Open" dialog with the "Test chart > Calculate from profile" menu.
3. In this dialog, select the ICC profile that you will use to calculate the measurement data.
4. Double-click the file name or select the file and click "Open" to start calculation.
5. Confirm the message about successful calculation from the profile with "OK".
The calculated data are displayed as color patches in the color data file.
6. Click "Save measurement data" in the button bar to call up the ""Save file" Dialog", Seite 75.
You can save your calculated data to a file you name in "ISO 28178" format in this dialog.
80 Version 2015
"Extracting test chart data" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Extract measurement data" menu.
This dialog lets you extract measurement data from your current test chart to another one or a control
element, for example, from a large "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual/Random" or "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT
8.7/3 Visual/Random" test chart to a smaller "PrintOpen Basic 135" or to a "PCS 60AB control strip".
You can use this function, for example, if you measured a proof print with a large test chart and now
simply just want to check a few particular patches for the remaining process. You then use the
extracted data as the reference data and, for example, a "PCS 60AB control strip" as the comparison
data for a quality check or long-term analysis.
This function is also suited to rearranging test charts:
• ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual <-> ... Random
• ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual <-> ... Random
• ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual <-> ... Random
"Extract the following chart"

This is where you can select the test chart that will be extracted. The target test chart must contain
all the color data found in the source test chart. The test chart/test strip appears in miniature form
in the display.
The attempt to extract a test chart/test strip is rejected along with an error message if you select a
target test chart/test strip that has color patches that are not found in the source test chart (example:
from "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual" to "PrintOpen Standard", 51 patches are missing in this case).

"Method with multiple patches"

If a patch is found several times in the source test chart, you can decide whether the mean of all the
same patches will be used or its first occurrence (click the appropriate radio button).
Confirm your selection by clicking "OK". The dialog closes. The "Save file" dialog appears automati-
cally where you can save the data of the extracted test chart/control element to a file you name in
"ISO 28178" format.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog.
For example, you can then open another file with measured data from which you can extract a test
chart/control element.
Procedure
1. Open the test chart file you wish to extract data from.
2. Call up the "Extracting test chart data" dialog with the "Test chart > Extract measurement data"
menu.
3. Select the test chart/control element that will be extracted.
i
i
Note: Remember that all the color patches must be found in the source test chart.
4. For multiple patches, select whether the mean or the first patch will be used by clicking the
appropriate radio button.
5. Confirm your selection with "OK".
6. Save your settings under a name of your choice.
82 Version 2015
"Smoothing of color data" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Correct - Smoothing" menu.
"Check and smooth color data"

You can enable or disable two subfunctions for smoothing the color data depending on the case at
hand:
• plausibility check of the data and
• intelligent, global smoothing.
These two functions can be used separately or as a combination and be applied to the color data of
both CMYK and RGB printing processes.
You can basically distinguish between two types of distortion of the color data: on the one hand,
those that have a local effect (i.e. at a certain area in the color space) and those whose effect is global
and across the entire color space.
i
i
Note: You can also use these functions in the "Create" main function in "Profile Generation
Setup" (see ""Smoothing of color data" Dialog", Seite 282).
The difference is that, in this case, the color data are changed irrevocably by the correction whereas,
in "Create", the correction is only applied to profile calculation and the original color data are
retained.
When calculating profiles from smoothened color data, remember that an appropriate setting for the
profile causes the smoothened data to be smoothened once again.
You can find more details about this subject in the "Example of correction or smoothing of measured
data", Seite 284 ("Create" main function). An example is used to explain the effect of smoothing on
the data.
Enable the correction/smoothing function you want.
Click "OK" to confirm your changes and close the dialog.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any changes to it.

"Automatic plausibility check of color data"

This function lets you adjust implausible values which were detected during the analysis. Such values
can result from errors during the measuring process but also from dirt or scratches on the test chart.
Such local distortions of the color data are corrected automatically.
"Intelligent smoothing of color data"
You can use this function to eliminate distortions that have a global effect. In this process, empirical
models for typical printing processes are used with all the measuring points to eliminate large-scale
distortions. This result of the calculation is that the current measured data are smoothened without
changing the accuracy greatly.
This method also works with unusual process colors and with printing materials with color cast.
84 Version 2015
"Correction of color data" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Correct - Fluorescent whitening" menu.
"Check and correct color data"

In this dialog, you can correct paper white that is important for certain proofs. You can correct the
effect of fluorescent whitening either by automatic paper white correction or by a spectral conversion
of the color data.
i
i
Note: You can also use these functions in the "Create" main function in "Profile Generation
Setup" (see ""Correction of color data" Dialog", Seite 280). It is also possible to match the
lightness to proofing. Display this dialog by clicking "Modify" at "Paper white correction".
Check the "Correction of fluorescent whitening effect" function and then select the paper white cor-
rection you want.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any changes to it.
"Correction of fluorescent whitening effect"
This function is relevant when papers with fluorescent whitening agents are used (for example, paper
for color copiers and ink jets). It affects the proof part of the profile.
Optical whiteners have a fluorescent effect so that the paper is perceived as particularly white
although technically speaking it has a bluish color cast. If you make a proof based exactly on the val-
ues measured, the result will appear too yellow.
Correction can be in two ways:
• using an automatic paper white correction
• or a spectral conversion of the color data.
"Change paper white automatically"

This function can automatically reduce the effect of fluorescent whitening agents when the proof part
is calculated in the profile.
By default, this function is disabled. When this function is activated, evaluation of the proof with a
measuring device may produce different results.

"Spectral conversion of color data"

Spectral color data must be available for this type of correction. In this procedure, all the measured
values are corrected before profile calculation. As a result, this correction affects the entire ICC pro-
file (all transformation tables).
Fluorescent whitening causes ultraviolet light that cannot be seen by the human eye to be absorbed
and visible blue fluorescent light to be emitted in its place. As a result of this conversion, an observer
considers the paper to be whiter. But this impression of white is subjective: In Europe, for example,
paper is "absolutely white" if the reflected light has somewhat more bluish portions.
You can set the correction intensity (amount of blue) with the slider:
• The default setting (slider position "5") is the equivalent of the spectral effect of a UV filter.
• As you move the slider towards "max" (slider position "10"), the bluish color cast is gradually
removed by the correction so that the result seems to be yellowish.
• As you move the slider towards "none" (slider position "0"), the correction of blue diminishes.
There is no correction of the fluorescent whitening effect when the slider is at "none" ("0").
86 Version 2015
"Conversion of color data" Dialog
Information about the Conversion of Color Data

You can convert available test chart data for a modified or similar printing process based on the color
data in just a small number of color patches.
The data are converted in three different dialogs that are described below.
In this way, you do not have to make a proof print of a large, custom test chart for the new process
and measure it with a spectrophotometer. Or you can simulate a proof to check how the modified
printing process affects your print.
Compared to the previous process, there may be changes in
• the printing material,
• the process colors,
• the order of printing,
• the dot gain or
• the ambient conditions (temperature, humidity, etc.).
The measured data that result from the conversions described here are naturally not quite as accu-
rate as a newly output and measured large test chart for your current process. For that reason, they
are particularly suitable for matching to similar processes. A conversion between very different prin-
ting processes such as flexographic and offset printing can at the most just give you a rough approx-
imation of the real conditions (test with a proof simulation).
You can convert the color data in one of the following ways:
• using the color values (method 1)
• using paper white only (method 2)
• using the test chart data (method 3)
• using the calibration data (method 4)
You can convert Heidelberg's multicolor test charts (5C, 6C and 7C) with "Convert measurement data
- Color values", "Convert measurement data - Paperwhite" and "Convert measurement data - Test
chart values". You can use not only the new multicolor minispots as test chart data but also CMYK
control elements (even if less than four color channels are used) or single-color to three-color control
elements. Only the color channels for which there is new information are converted into measure-
ment data.
Any spectra in the data are lost during conversion. This is an important aspect mainly for the correct
display of dot gain curves because the curves that are then determined from the XYZ values do not
match the accurate values from the spectra particularly well.

"Conversion of color data - color values" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Convert - Color data" menu.
Method 1
This dialog presents the simplest method for converting color data (see Information about the
Conversion of Color Data).
"Convert color data for changed print process"
"Change CIE values of primary colors"
Only the new Lab color values for solid tints are specified in this dialog. You can determine these val-
ues, for example, by measuring the appropriate colors on a proof print. Then enter these values in
"New values" for cyan, magenta, yellow and black.
Please note that changing a printing material usually changes the color values of the solid colors as
well, even if the same inks are used.
You can take into account a changed tonal gradation by entering new values for dot gain (usually at
40% and/or 80%). Then enter these values in "New values" for cyan, magenta, yellow and black.
After you enter your data and click "OK", the program converts all the measured data of your test
chart so that the values for solid tints match the defaults. The shape of the color gamut can change
as a whole as a result of the conversion but the relative progress from paper white to solids and the
color mixing principles are the same as in the old test chart.
You can then save the converted data as a new color data file by clicking "Save measurement data"
and use it to calculate profiles for the modified process.
When you click "Default", the default settings are restored and the dialog closes.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any conversion.
This simple method cannot deal with more complex changes because there are no new values for the
patches.
For that reason, the conversion of test chart data is used for more accurate matching of the data (see
"Conversion of color data - paper white" dialog).
88 Version 2015
"Conversion of color data - paper white" dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Convert - Paper white" menu.
Method 2
Like in method 1, this dialog presents the simplest method for converting color data (see Information
about the Conversion of Color Data).
"Change paper white"
Only the new Lab values for paper white are specified in this dialog. Enter these values in "New value"
for white. This is necessary, for example, if different printing material is used.
After you enter your data and click "OK", the program converts the measured data of your test chart
so that the values for paper white match the defaults. The shape of the color gamut can change as a
whole as a result of the conversion but the relative progress from paper white to solids and the color
mixing principles are the same as in the old test chart.

"Conversion of color data - Test chart values" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Convert - Test chart data" menu.
Method 3
This dialog presents the third method for converting color data (see Information about the Conversion
of Color Data).
With this method, you use the color data, for example, of a test strip (like DIPCO strip) or of a small
test chart (CQM strip or the FOGRA media strip, see "Test Charts and Control Strips", Seite 79) for
the characterization of the changed printing process.
You can print such small test patterns together with customer jobs on an unused part of a signature
without having to use up too much space for it. Jobs mainly have test strips anyway for checking the
ink zone. The test patterns then describe how the printing process reacts presently based on a num-
ber of selected positions in the color space.
During the conversion of the extensive test chart data you already have, all the measuring points in
the Lab color space are changed so that the data match the color patches of the test pattern opti-
mally.
In this way, you can take into account a changed dot gain or printing order (with a specific effect in
secondary and tertiary colors).
Click the "Open" button to read in the color data of a changed printing process.
You can search for and select the data file you want in the list box in the "Open" dialog. "Measured
data (.txt, .it8)" must be set for "Files of type".
90 Version 2015
After the data are imported and you click "OK", the program converts all the measured data of the
present test chart.
"Conversion of color data - Calibration data" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Convert - Calibration data" menu.
Method 4
This dialog presents the fourth method for converting color data (see Information about the
Conversion of Color Data).
The overall workflow starting with digital image data and ending with the printed sheet has two
important components that must be set and checked separately:
• the platesetter (or filmsetter)
• and the press.

Normally, you first create a plate with linearization strips and then make a proof print of it. You mea-
sure the printed linearization strips. Based on the density values measured, Calibration Tool
(included in the Prinect Color Toolbox) calculates the imagesetter curves that give the printing pro-
cess as a whole the desired tonal gradation (process standard). These imagesetter curves then go to
the output system (RIP) and a second plate with a test chart for creating ICC profiles is made and
printed. The ICC profile for the whole printing process is then calculated based on the color data of
this test chart.
The "Convert measurement data - Calibration data" function simplifies this procedure in that only
one plate has to be created. You save time and material as a second proof print is no longer neces-
sary.
Not only are the linearization strips for the imagesetter imaged on this one plate but also at the same
time the test chart for the ICC profile. The imagesetter curves are determined as described above
after a proof print is made of this plate. At the same time, Calibration Tool saves the curves in a Color
Toolbox-specific format (ISO 28178).
The color data of the test chart are measured in the usual way for the ICC profile and are available
in the usual data format. If you were to use these data right away for profile calculation, the image-
setter curves would be missing because they were determined from the same sheet and, as a result,
did not affect the measured data at all.
This is the reason why, in the "Convert measurement data - Calibration data" function, you open the
file saved by Calibration Tool for Color Toolbox in addition to the measured data, enabling the appli-
cation to back-step and correct the CMYK values of the color patches. This means that if the image-
setter curves raise cyan from 35% to 40%, Color Toolbox can then replace a 40% value in the orig-
inal test chart by 35% with the help of the imagesetter curves. Consequently, the effect you expect
from the imagesetter curves when a second plate is printed is already included in the CMYK values
of the test chart. The Lab data do not change in this process and, accordingly, the color data are dis-
played on the monitor in the same way. However, if you move the mouse pointer over the test chart,
you can see from the CMYK values shown at the bottom right in the status bar that the original, reg-
ular CMYK values were matched to the imagesetter curves.
Using the data converted to CMYK, you can then calculate an ICC profile in the usual way for the
entire printing process including the calibrated imagesetter.
We recommend that you only use larger test charts with a suitably fine resolution in the color space
for this type of conversion such as the "ISO 12642-2 / ECI2002", "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" or "ISO
12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4" test chart. The "PrintOpen Standard" test chart with just 210 patches is not
very suitable for this because of the larger gaps between the CMYK defaults.
For this type of converted data, remember that the CMYK values of the color patches normally are no
longer the equivalent of a "standard" (e.g. ISO 28178). In other words, you cannot compare them
directly with the color data of a "standard test chart". Although it is generally possible to correct the
Lab values instead of the CMYK values, this would require additional interpolation and scanning of
the data. The procedure described here was selected to restrict any possible loss of quality to a min-
imum.
Procedure
1. You have at hand the data of a profiling test chart for uncalibrated printing.
92 Version 2015
2. Call up the "Conversion of color data - Calibration data" dialog with the "Tools > Convert mea-
surement data - Calibration data" menu function.
3. Click the "Open" button to read in the calibration data of a changed printing process.
You can search for and select the data file you want (with the calibration data) in the list box in
the "Open" dialog. "Measured data (.txt, .it8)" must be set for "Files of type".
4. After the calibration data are imported and you click "OK", the program converts all the mea-
sured data of the present test chart.
5. You can then save the converted data as a new color data file by clicking "Save measurement
data" and use it to calculate profiles for the modified process.
6. Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any conversion.

"Process parameters" Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Process parameters". The button is only enabled if "Setup of
the process parameters and save in measurement data and ICC profile" is checked (default) in the
""Preferences" Dialog", Seite 44 ("General" tab).
You can define the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade, process
color, screening and plate) in this dialog. The process parameters are saved in the color data file or
the ICC profile.
Click "Store" to display the "Store parameter set" Dialog where you can save your current process
parameters to a parameter file you name. These settings are then available for other color data files/
ICC profiles, making it unnecessary to retype the parameters. You can, of course, make changes to
them at any time.
Click "Load" to display the "Load parameter set" Dialog where you can select and open a parameter
set with saved process parameters.
94 Version 2015
Click "OK" to confirm your process parameter setup and close the dialog. The process parameters are
also saved in the color data file or the ICC profile.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard any changes to it. The last setting is restored.
"Process parameter settings"
You can select the process parameters in list boxes that have defaults based on the current ICC spec-
ification (e.g. output process, paper grade, process standard). Some items are in the process of being
approved for future ICC specifications.
Type more details in the text boxes (e.g. manufacturer).
The process parameters are also saved in the data file or the profile. However, they do not change the
color conversions in the profile or influence processing by certain CMMs.
The items are of a purely informative nature and are only for the record. They are displayed in the
profile browser during profile selection (you can configure the display as required) and help you select
and sort different ICC profiles.
i
i
Note: You can enable/disable how the process parameters will be saved ("Setup of the pro-
cess parameters and save in measurement data and ICC profile") in the "Preferences > Gen-
eral" dialog. This function is enabled by default. You cannot call up the "Process parame-
ters" dialog in the "Measure" and "Create" main functions if the function is disabled. The
button and menu are then disabled (dimmed). It's also not possible to edit the process
parameters in the "Edit" main function.

"Store parameter set" Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Store" if you wish to save a complete set of parameters. The
parameters displayed in this dialog (e.g. "Process parameters") depend on which ones are currently
set. This example displays when you click "Store" in the "Process parameters" dialog.
"Process parameters"
All the saved sets containing process parameters are displayed in the list box.
You can type any name for the new parameter set in the text box.
You can delete a selected set from the list by clicking "Remove".
Click "OK" to save your current settings as the parameter set under the name you defined and close
the dialog.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without saving the parameter set.
96 Version 2015
"Load parameter set" Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Load" if you wish to load a saved parameter set. The param-
eters displayed in this dialog (e.g. "Process parameters") depend on which ones are currently set.
This example displays when you click "Load" in the "Process parameters" dialog.
"Process parameters"
All the saved sets containing process parameters are displayed in the list box. You can select and load
a parameter set from this list.
Double-click the file name or select the file and click "OK" to load the parameter set.
The dialog closes afterwards.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without loading a parameter set.

Main Program Function "Measure / Process Standard / Evaluation"
Views and Diagrams

The diagrams and tables are shown in the central workspace. You can display them by clicking the
appropriate item in the tabs. To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for viewing
the color space.
You can display a context-sensitive Online Help with the "F1" key.
The CIE color space diagrams allow you to evaluate the position of the color data in the color space
and to evaluate the color gamut.
Status Bar
The status bar displays the name of the loaded color data file and of the current process standard (if
any) and a thumbnail of the test chart or control element.
The full path is then shown as a tooltip when you move the mouse pointer to the file name. In the
case of the process standard, not only the name of the standard and printing material display but also
a comment and the set order of printing. Process standards included in the shipment are write-pro-
tected. This is displayed in red letters ("THIS PROCESS-STANDARD IS WRITEPROTECTED").
The icons can have the following colors:
• green: The file is unchanged or changes were saved.
• yellow: The file was changed and not yet saved.
The ISO measurement condition displays after the file name (select in the "Preferences" dialog, "Mea-
surement" tab):
• "M0": No filter (M0:ISO-13655)
• "M1": D50 (M1:ISO-13655)
• "M2": UV (M2:ISO-13655)
• "M3": Pol (M3:ISO-13655)

"Test chart" View

You can open this view by clicking the "Test chart" tab.
"Display of the test chart"

This view mode shows you the currently loaded test chart file and its patches. The number of patches
in the palette depends of the type of test chart/control element.
The color patches are reproduced as precisely as possible on the monitor (depending on the color
depth set for the monitor and the monitor calibration).
100 Version 2015

"Field", "Ref. [%]", "Ref. [Lab]", "Ref. [XYZ]", "Spectrum", "Density"

The following information and reference values display beside the graphic when you move the mouse
pointer to a patch or enable the patch with a click (the patch is highlighted by a red-and-white frame):
• "Field": Displays information about the current patch in the test chart or the control element
· "ID" = patch number, e.g. "N 18"
· "No." = patch number, e.g. "205"
· "x" = column number, e.g. "18"
· "y" = row number, e.g. "14"
• "Ref. [%]": Displays cyan, magenta, yellow, and black screen percents for the current patch.
• "Ref. [Lab]": Displays the Lab values for the current patch.
• "Ref. [XYZ]": Displays the XYZ values for the current patch.
• "Spectrum": Displays the spectral values for the current patch. An appropriate message displays
if there are no spectral values.
• "Density": Displays absolute or relative cyan, magenta, yellow, and black density values for the
current patch.
i
i
Note: You set the density display (absolute or relative) in the "Preferences" dialog ("Mea-
surement" tab).

Right-click Display
The mouse pointer position shows you additional information about the color patch when you right-
click this:
You can view the following information, if it is available:

• "Values measured": Displays the number of patches in the loaded test chart or test strip.
• "Reference values": Displays the CMYK values for the current patch.
• "Density values": Displays the density values for the current patch.
• "XYZ values": Displays the XYZ values for the current patch.
• "Spectral values": Displays the spectrum for the current patch if you have spectral values.
• "delta E", "delta ab": Displays the differential value between another selected patch and the cur-
rent patch. The ΔE value and Δab value is zero if the patches are identical.
You can use this function, for example, to check the gray balance. Click a patch that only has black,
then point to the relevant gray patch and right-click at the mouse pointer position. The ΔE value and
the Δab value between these two patches display.
102 Version 2015

Viewing Locked Zones

You can lock zones in Prinect Image Control. An appropriate message displays above the main func-
tion bar if you open a color data file with locked zones in Color Toolbox. You can view the locked
zones by hitting "Z" on the keyboard. All the patches in the locked zone are covered by a flashing
white bar. You can clear the display by hitting "Z" again.
More information about the different test charts and graphics can be found in "Test Charts and
Control Strips", Seite 79.
"Process Standards"
There are only process standards for printing, especially for offset printing. In this context, we support
the "G7-GRACOL" print standard used in the US to a certain extent.
PSO
Print
CMYK Spot Color Multicolor
Until today, the entire standard check procedure focused on "measuring" while the proof check pro-
cedure comprised the "measure" and "compare" steps. This drew criticism on the proof procedure
used so far, in particular with regard to the following topics:
• The procedure requires too many dialogs to process, resulting in too many steps.
• The procedure used so far only functions correctly for coated FOGRA39, not for uncoated
FOGRA47 printing materials.
• Setting up parameters is difficult, and only one parameter record is supported.
To facilitate operation and to centralize all controls, the new version comes with new process stan-
dard types, and all checks are available in "Measure" now.

Process standards
Print Proof Digital G7

ISO 12647-2 ISO 12647-7 ISO 15311 ISO 15339
Offset printing
The new types are:

• Proof check — has been restructured
• Digital printing check and
• G7 printing check
"Process standard" View

All checks are available in "Measure", parameters are set up in the "Process standard" view.
You can open this view by clicking the "Process standard" tab.
104 Version 2015

The status bar also indicates the type of the selected process standard.
This offers the following advantages:
• All options are centralized in a single dialog -> less clicks and improved operability.
• Proof measurements for coated and uncoated printing materials.
• Parameter set-up centralized in the "Process standard" dialog.
• Any number of parameter sets is supported.
• This is the first application that supports the new digital printing check.
• Full support of the G7 standard check.
Every new PSO type has a tab of its own. Settings for color values and printing materials are identical
for all types.

A digital process standard is selected in the current example. For this reason, only the digital printing
tab is operable while all other types are disabled and closed. The common part in the upper section
matches the selected type. As digital printing has three quality levels, the printing material element
shows three results.
Proof and digital printing process standards require an internal reference file for calibration. For
coated printing materials (paper types 1 and 2 and — with a future process standard — PS1), this inter-
nal reference is usually the FOGRA39L file describing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart.
The internal reference for uncoated printing materials is the FOGRA47L file.
106 Version 2015

"Check measurement data for compliance with process standard"

This diagram lets you check whether the measured data are within the tolerances of a selected pro-
cess standard. The process standard can be a default one (ISO 12647-2 process check) or a user-
defined one.

"Hide/Show process standard overview"

The overview has six views and can be minimized to a caption bar. You can show or hide the overview
by clicking this line.
The result of the check is indicated by the following symbols on the right of the caption bar:
No values available
All the values are in the tolerance range.
Several values are not in the tolerance range.
The appraisal refers to all defined process colors (CMYK, multicolor or spot colors) and is shown in
the relevant color with color name (if there is one) and curves or bar graphs.
The following views display in the overview:
108 Version 2015

• CIELab color values: ΔE bars and table for the primary and secondary colors and for three-color
gray (Overprint)
• ab diagram: View of the CIELAB color values on the ab plane
• Substrate (paper white): View of the Lab values and their differential value "Δ" for paper white
• Dot gain curves: View showing values in steps of 10% and for 25% and 75%, if present
· CMYK: separately for CMY and K
· Multicolor: all defined process colors (CMYK and red (orange), green and/or blue/purple)
· Spot Colors: all defined process colors
i
i
Note: The dot gain curves only display if spectral values and/or density values were mea-
sured in addition to the color data (see "Preferences > Measurement").
• Gray balance (table): View of the chroma differential values "ΔCh" and the lightness differential
values "ΔL" for three gray values "K30", "K50" and "K70" (quarter tone, midtone and three-
quarter tone) or for "K25", "K50" and "K75"
• Gray balance (diagram): View of the gray balance in the ab diagram for the three gray values
(quarter tone, midtone and three-quarter tone)
You can also print the views as logs ("Diagrams to be printed > Process standard").
Setting the Process Standard

The diagrams and tables are shown using the standard set in the "Process standard" main function.
The latest process standard is used if no other specifications come from the customer. When setting
the display, remember that the printing material and the backing must match the measured data.
Normally, white backing (WB) is used for measurement. You must select a black backing (BB) for
measured data from Prinect Image Control. You can select another process standard or change the
settings of a process standard or create a new custom standard in the "Process standard" main func-
tion. To do this, click "Process standard" in the horizontal function bar at the top of the window (see
"Working with "Process standard"", Seite 345).
Individual Quality Index (IQI)

The valuation system is applicable for all the available process standards, "CMYK", "Multicolor" and
"Spot colors". The IQI system (scoring model) provides a systematic method for the comparison and
valuation of the quality level of your print production. All decision-related criteria are listed and
weighted in this process; each property of the features is assessed using points. Scoring models try
to quantify quality and subjective expectations and make them comparable.
The sum of all single values (Scoring) produces the index (Maximum Value). This includes color val-
ues, dot gains, paper white and gray balance.
You set the parameters for the individual quality index in the Preferences (see ""Individual Quality
Index (IQI)" tab", Seite 55).

CIELab color values
This is where you compare the measured solid tint CIELab values for the primary and secondary col-
ors (black, cyan, magenta, yellow, red, green and blue) and also for CMY gray (Overprint) with the
standard CIELb color values of the selected process standard. The deviation between the current
measured data (actual values) and the respective process standard data (nominal values) is color dis-
tance ΔE and is shown by a bar graph.
The deviation for the secondary colors and overprint (CMY Gray) only displays if these colors are
enabled in the process standard. The standard values for them are difficult to comply with technically
and they are enabled only in more recent, improved process standards (see "Working with "Process
standard"", Seite 345).
Paper white is shown separately because the tolerances for the L, a and b values can differ (see
""Substrate" View", Seite 135).
A colored area indicates the tolerance that is typical for the process.
The current ΔE value for a color in the bar graph displays when you point the mouse to this bar.
The color distance calculated using the currently valid "ΔEab" definition (1976) displays for each color
below the bar graph. The value is:
• green if it is within the tolerance range
• red if it is outside it.
110 Version 2015

The following values appear when you point the mouse to a ΔE value:
• measured Lab value (actual value)
• Lab value of the process standard
• color distance calculated using the currently valid "ΔEab" definition (1976) (see bar graph)
• color distance calculated using the more recent "ΔE00" definition (2000) This ΔE value is much
more accurate.
• tolerance "ΔETol" defined in the process standard
ab diagram
On the ab plane, the print process in the L*a*b* color space is viewed from above, i.e. from the direc-
tion of white, and the lightness axis L* is perpendicular to the red-green a* axis and the yellow-blue
b* axis. The closer a color is to the edge of the diagram, the greater its chroma. The angle indicates
the hue. Every color mixture can be defined uniquely and displayed in the L*a*b* color space.

The color circle and the colored corners of the diagram help you in your orientation on the ab plane.
The green circles mark the tolerance range in the process standard for each process color. This graph
shows the size of the color space and the position of the process colors in relation to the tolerance
range on the ab plane.
The values must be within this green area to meet the process standard.
Substrate (paper white)
This displays the Lab color values for paper white (substrate) and the differential values "Δ" to the
process standard:
• green if they are within the tolerance range
• red if they are outside it.
The differential values can differ. For that reason, paper white is not shown together with the CIEBLab
color values for the primary and secondary colors.
You can find more details in the "Substrate" View.
Gray balance
The gray balance displays in a table and three diagrams on the ab plane.
112 Version 2015

i
i
Note: This check shows values only if you use a minispot to check the gray balance (see
also ""ECI_GrayConL", "ECI_GrayConM" and ECI_GrayConS" with 52, 32 or 6 Patches",
Seite 126).
The additional grays of the control strip (K30, K50, K70 and their corresponding chromatic grays in
CMY) are evaluated for gray balance. The results display in a table and a graph.
In this case, the L*, a* and b* values for three real grays (black only) are compared at 30%, 50%
and 70% with those of the identical chromatic grays (cyan, magenta and yellow) and shown as a
table and a diagram with the calculated differential values for lightness distance (ΔL*) and chroma
difference (ΔCh* (Ch* = chroma)):
• green if the deviations are within the tolerance range
i
i
Note: In the USA, control strips that evaluate grays "K25" and "K75" instead of "K30" and
"K70" are also used. The system detects these grays automatically and switches to the
appropriate values.
The ISO 12647-2 process standard specifies that a gray composed of the three chromatic process col-
ors has the same L*, a* and b* values (CIELab) as an identical gray that is printed only with black.
You can find more details in the "Gray values" View.
Dot gain curves

Based on the measured data, the dot gain is determined in steps of 10% and at 25% and 75% for
the defined process colors, and curves display the result.
• CMYK process: The dot gain curves are shown separately for the three chromatic colors cyan,
magenta and yellow and for black as their tolerances are different.
• Multicolor process and spot color process: As of version 11.0. a third diagram displays, showing
only spot colors or the multicolor process colors. You can select a multicolor, spot color or PSO
standard (for the CMYK colors of your color data) as your process standard for the check.
You can find more details in the "Dot gain" View.
Process Standards: Proof Check

Until now, the "proof check" function comprised the "Measure" and "Compare" sections. To measure,
the user had to go to the "Measure" view and then switch to the "Compare" view to run a proof check.
The disadvantage of this method is that too many dialogs and consequently too many steps are
needed.
Parameter set-up also required several dialogs. In the "Presettings > Compare" dialog, you had to
specify the reference file, and in the "Presettings > Proof Report" dialogs, you had to specify the tol-
erances for the proof check. Disadvantages: again, too many dialogs and too many steps are
required. Result: less intuitive and transparent.
Saving of tolerance data sets was not possible either. Managing several different proof checks (e.g.
for coated and uncoated paper) in this way is complex.
The new version combines all checks in the "Measure" view and the parameter set-up in "Process
standard".
114 Version 2015

Process standards

ISO 12647-2 ISO 12647-7 ISO 15311 ISO 15339
Offset printing
Proof printing process standards require an internal reference file for calibration. For coated printing
materials (paper types 1 and 2 and — with a future process standard — PS1), this internal reference is
usually the FOGRA39L file describing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart.
The following check dialogs are feasible for proof process standards:
• Process standard
• Color values
• Printing Materials
A proof check comprises two steps:

• Standard check for mini spot test strips
Until now, a proof check ran as follows:
· You measure or open a mini spot test strip suitable for proof check and determine the
quality of your proof
· You evaluate paper white, primary and secondary colors
· You evaluate the mean deviation of your mini spot test strip in relation to the internal
reference file, the patch with the maximum deviation, and a number of other parameters
This proof check gives the color distance E and the maximum value for the following parameters:
· Average
· Maximum
· Primary colors (max): CMY total
· Maximum H primary colors: maximum hue deviation from E for primary colors

· Mean H gray: mean hue deviation from E for gray
• Advanced evaluation of test charts
The advanced evaluation uses a test chart that has a much greater number of dots than the mini
spots mentioned before. This chart is used for the adjustment process, i.e. for the determination
and repeated correction of the proof profile. This check is much more thorough and offers addi-
tional checks because a much greater number of dots is measured:
· All dots of the test chart are included, the deviations of all test values from the internal
reference file are calculated, and the resulting mean values must fall below a maximum
threshold.
· Then, the saturated colored dots of the test chart determined by the standard are
included. The mean deviations from the internal reference are calculated and must fall
below a second threshold.
· Then, the deviations of all dots from the internal reference are calculated and sorted in
ascending order. The 95% limit of deviations must fall below a certain value.
Supported Mini Spots and Test Charts

The following mini spot test strips are normally used for a standard proof check:
• FOGRA MKV test strip v3
in the US
• After selecting "IDE Alliance" and clicking the button "Type", you can choose the IDE Alliance
test strip 2009 (already supported in Color Tool as "GRACOL-DCS"), or
• IDE Alliance test strip 2013
These US mini spot test strips contain additional gray dots not present in FOGRA MKV and IT8.7/
4. For this reason, the algorithm for the proof check had to be extended.
116 Version 2015

For set-up and profile generation, the ISO12647-7 standard requires the advanced evaluation (not sup-
ported in older versions < 15). For this advanced evaluation, you usually need the standard test chart
ISO 12642-2=IT8.7/4 (in visual or random style).
You can also use the ECI2002 test chart for this purpose.
i
i
Note: A warning is issued if you use another mini spot test strip or a test chart type that is
not ideal for a proof check.
Selecting, Administrating and Editing Various Proof References in a Single Pro-

cess Standard
The "Proof Process Standard" is selected as reference for the proof check because all the parameters
can be set up in "Measure". Color Toolbox supports several process standard types now. For this rea-
son, you must select a proof process standard for a proof check.

A proof check being edited is indicated as "PS Norm Type: Proof".

The new "Proof Parameter" section is operable only if the "Proof" type is selected.
The parameters for the standard check (older versions: in Presettings > Proof Report) are accessible
in the upper part of this parameter section. Additional parameters for the advanced evaluation are
located in the lower part of the parameter section.
Proof printing process standards require an internal reference file for calibration. For coated printing
usually the FOGRA39L file describing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart.
i
i
Note: The reference file shown in the example is for coated printing materials. For uncoated
materials, you must use the file "FOGRA4TL".
Proof Check Under Measurement Conditions

With a proof process standard selected, you can open a mini spot test strip or test chart for proof
checking and measure it. In our example, we open a FOGRA MKV3 mini spot test strip:
118 Version 2015

In this case, the proof check has the following results:
This is the standard proof check for the FOGRA MKV test strip v3. The boxes for the advanced evalu-
ation values in the bottom section of the window are empty.
You obtain the following result if you select and open a test chart for the proof check in the "Setup"
area for profiling:

The values for the advanced evaluation appear in the bottom section because a test chart was used.
The upper area shows only the extracted part of the test charts that is identical with the FOGRA MKV
v3 control strip.
The overlapping area of control strip and test chart is empty for the US IDE Alliance control strip. This
is why there are no values in the overlapping area and why the respective boxes in the upper window
section are empty.
For the proof check, you can use the dialogs for printing material and color value, the detailed infor-
mation regarding paper white and primary and secondary colors:
120 Version 2015


You can print all these dialogs for reporting purposes with "File > Print".
Process Standards: Digital Print Check

Digital print process standards need to be aligned with an internal reference file. For coated printing
usually the FOGRA39L file describing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart. The internal reference
for uncoated printing materials is the FOGRA47L file.
Process standards

ISO 12647-2 ISO 12647-7 ISO 15311 ISO 15339
Offset printing
The following check dialogs are feasible for digital printing process standards:
• Color Values and
Digital print and proof standards are similar, but differ when it comes to calculating the elements.
Digital print only applies the new E00 color distance.
The digital print process standard uses 3 parallel tolerance classes and 3 different quality levels
checked in parallel:
• A = high: top quality meeting proof quality requirements
• B = good: digital printing is to match offset print quality. Meets the quality requirements in most
cases.
• C = acceptable: This quality level meets office requirements.
Two different comparison/check approaches are introduced for the digital print standard:
• Side-by-side: classical approach; offset and digital printing side by side
122 Version 2015

Offset printing versus Digital printing Different papers:

according to FOGRA hard to compare
• Media-relative: Comparison with converted and matched paper in order to compensate for the
differences in the printing material.
Offset printing versus Digital printing not a physical but a

converts paper white to converts paper white to virtual comparison,
Lab = 100, 0, 0 Lab = 100, 0, 0 better to compare
The digital print check comprises two steps:

• Standard check for a mini spot test strip
· You measure or open a mini spot test strip matched to digital printing and determine /
check:
· The quality of your digital printing paper white.
· The quality of the primary and secondary colors.
· You determine averages of all color patch deviations (from the internal reference file) and
the maximum deviation from the internal reference.
· The hue deviations and the resulting average of "almost neutral" patches are also deter-
mined.
• Advanced evaluation of test charts
The advanced evaluation uses a test chart that has a much greater number of dots than the mini
spots mentioned before. This chart is used for the adjustment process, i.e. for the determination
and iterative correction of the proof profile. This check is much more thorough and offers addi-
tional checks because a much greater number of dots is measured:
· All dots of the test chart are included, the deviations of all test values from the internal
reference file are calculated, and the resulting mean values must fall below a maximum
threshold.

· Then, the saturated colored dots of the test chart determined by the standard are
included. The mean deviations from the internal reference are calculated and must fall
below a second threshold.
· Then, the deviations of all dots from the internal reference are calculated and sorted in
ascending order. The 95% limit of deviations must fall below a certain value.

The following mini spot test strips are normally used for a standard digital printing check:
• FOGRA MKV test strip v3
in the US
• IDE Alliance test strip 2013
These US mini spot test strips contain additional gray dots not present in FOGRA MKV and IT8.7/
4. For this reason, the algorithm for the proof check had to be extended.
For set-up and profile generation, the ISO12647-7 standard requires the advanced evaluation (not
supported in older versions < 15). For this advanced evaluation, you usually need the standard test
chart ISO 12642-2=IT8.7/4 (in visual or random style).
124 Version 2015

You can also use the ECI2002 test chart for this purpose.
i
i

cess Standard
The "Digital Printing Process Standard" is selected as reference for the digital printing check because
all the parameters can be set up in "Measure". Color Toolbox supports several process standard types
now. For this reason, you must select a digital printing process standard for a digital printing check.
A digital printing check being edited is indicated as "PS Norm Type: Digital".

The new "Digital Parameter" section is operable only if the "Digital" type is selected.
The left part of the section contains the parameters for the "Side-by-side" check, the right part the
parameters for the "Media-relative" check.
The parameters for the standard check are accessible in the upper part of this parameter section.
Additional parameters for the advanced evaluation are located in the lower part of the parameter sec-
tion.
Digital print process standards need to be aligned with an internal reference file. For coated printing
usually the FOGRA39L file describing the ISO12647-2 (or IT8.7/4) test chart. The internal reference
for uncoated printing materials is the FOGRA47L file.
Digital Printing Check Under Measurement Conditions

With a digital printing process standard selected, you can open a mini spot test strip or test chart for
digital printing checking and measure it. In our example, we open a FOGRA MKV3 mini spot test strip:
In this case, the digital printing check has the following results:
The boxes for the advanced evaluation values in the bottom section of the window are empty because
this is the standard digital printing check with the FOGRA MKV3 mini spot control strip. All color dis-
tances are E00.
To quickly find out, which requirements are met, all three quality levels are shown in parallel.
126 Version 2015

You obtain the following result if you select and open a test chart for the digital printing check in the
"Setup" area for profiling:

The values for the advanced evaluation appear in the bottom section because a test chart was used.
The upper area shows only the extracted part of the test charts that is identical with the FOGRA MKV
v3 control strip.
The overlapping area of control strip and test chart is empty for the US IDE Alliance control strip. This
is why there are no values in the overlapping area and why the respective boxes in the upper window
section are empty.
For the digital printing check, you can use the dialogs for printing material and color value that pro-
vide detailed information regarding paper white and primary and secondary colors:
128 Version 2015


Measuring a Digital Press with the Digital Printing Standard

1. Digital presses use inks different from those of offset presses and therefore feature an integrated
color management to match the digital printing result to that of offset printing. Usually, the doc-
ument is converted from the offset color space to the CIELab color space, and then to the digital
printing color space. Because of the different properties of the used printing materials, the
applied "Rendering Intent" is "relative". Offset printing uses other papers than digital printing.
For this reason, print the "FOGRA MKV v3" control strip or the "ISO 12642-2 = IT8.7/4" test chart
on your digital press with the internal color management of the digital press enabled.
2. Measure the print result. Apply the "ISO13655.2009" measurement method in mode M0 or M1.
3. In Color Toolbox, open the internal reference file "FOGRA39" and open the measurement file.
4. Evaluate the results of the quality measurements in "Process standard": levels A, B and C and
check, which quality level is met.
The following example shows the result for a Linoprint 901 digital press with "Mondial glossy" paper:
130 Version 2015

Process Standards: G7 check
Process standards

ISO 12647-2 ISO 12647-7 ISO 15311 ISO 15339
Offset printing ANSI/CGATS
TR016
The G7 standard is an offset standard; for this reason, there are similarities to classical offset printing
(ISO 12647-2), similar to the check of primary and secondary colors.
But there are still some differences:
• The gray balance is predominant for the G7 check, and more emphasis is placed on it than for
current ISO checks. In other words, the gray balance replaces the dot gain check in the G7
check.
• In contrast to the ISO check, the G7 check also evaluates the luminance values of the CMY and
K patches with regard to color purity.
• The ISO standard determines the gray balance by comparing printed CMY gray patches with
printed reference K-patches. In the G7 standard, the K-patches are not printed but the reference
K-patches are calculated internally.
• The G7 applies the dynamic printing material adaption: primary and secondary colors are
adapted to the current paper white.
G7 process standards use a comparison with an internal reference file.

The following check dialogs are feasible for G7 process standards:
• Color values
• extended gray balance and
As the G7 standard supports the dynamic paper white adaption, the printing material check is redun-
dant and part of the advanced evaluation just like the CMYK contone check (to determine the sup-
pressed dot gain effect) and the density check.


The following mini spot test strips are normally used for a standard G7 check:
• P2P25 — Target control strip
The P2P25 — Target control strip is also suitable for set-up and profiling.
• FMS — G7 control strip (Heidelberg)
• the IDE Alliance test strip 2013
These US mini spot control strips contain additional gray patches not present in classical control
strips, in particular 25%, 50% and 75% patches.
i
i

cess Standard
The "G7 Process Standard" is selected as reference for the G7 check because all the parameters can
be set up in "Measure". Color Toolbox supports several process standard types now. For this reason,
you must select a G7 process standard for a G7 check.
132 Version 2015

The "PS Norm Type" must display "G7" for a G7 check!
G7 Check Under Measurement Conditions

With a G7 process standard selected, you can open a mini spot test strip or test chart for G7 checking
and measure it. In our example, we open a P2P25 mini spot test strip:
In this case, the G7 check has the following results:

The boxes for the advanced evaluation values in the bottom section of the window are empty because
this is the standard digital printing check with the FOGRA MKV3 mini spot control strip. All color dis-
tances are E00.
To quickly find out, which requirements are met, all three quality levels are shown in parallel.

The left section indicates the luminance deviations of the CMY patches. The center section indicates
the luminance deviations of the K patches. The right section indicates the chroma deviations of the
CMY patches.
For the G7 check, you can use the dialogs for printing material and color value that provide additional
information regarding paper white and primary and secondary colors.
134 Version 2015

"Substrate" View
You can open this view by clicking the "Substrate" tab.
"Display of the substrate (paper) values"

This view shows details for paper white.
• The CIELab color values (actual values) for paper white display at the top of the view, with the
calculated color distance ΔEab above them as a decimal value and a bar.
• The ΔL* value displays in the middle as a bar and to its right chroma difference ΔCh* displays
on the ab plane.
• The lower part of the view displays differential values ΔL*, Δa* and Δb* and the ΔE00 value cal-
culated using the new color distance formula that is much more accurate than the ΔEab value.
The ΔE values are marked by colors:

Currently, the single differential values ΔL*, Δa* and Δb* are evaluated for the substrate and not ΔE.

"Color values" View

You can open this view by clicking the "Color values" tab.
"Display of the color values"

These diagrams show details about the CIELab color values.
• The CIELab color values (actual values) display at the top for each of the primary colors cyan
(C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K), with the calculated color distance ΔEab above them
as a decimal value and a bar.
• The ΔL* value displays in the middle as a bar and to its right chroma difference ΔCh* displays
on the ab plane.
• The lower part displays differential values ΔL*, Δa* and Δb* and the ΔE00 value calculated using
the new color distance formula that is much more accurate than the ΔEab value.
Below that you can view the same diagrams for each of the secondary colors red (R), green (G) and
blue (B).
136 Version 2015

The ΔE values are marked by colors:

At the very bottom, the values for density and the difference in density display, each indicated by a
bar.

"Dot gain" View

You can open this view by clicking the "Dot gain" tab.
"Display of the dot gain curve (Measured density values)"

The dot gain curves of the printing process (process colors, mixed colors and/or spot colors) are
shown in the diagram. You can also switch over and view the printing characteristic curve here. You
can also view the related data table.
The dot gain curves or printing characteristics are calculated on the basis of real density values if you
also measured the density when measuring the colors (selected in the "Preferences" dialog).
If you don't, the density values are calculated from the spectral values or, if the latter were also not
measured, by general approximation from the Lab(xyz) values.
i
i
Note: The heading above the graph indicates how the tonal values or printing characteristic
were determined:
• "Display of the dot gain curve/printing characteristic (Measured density values)" if you have
density values.
• "Display of the dot gain curve/printing characteristic (Approximated tonal values ISO 12647-1)"
in red if density values are calculated.
138 Version 2015

"Diagram"
You can select the type of diagram you want to the right of the diagram:
• "Dot gain": Display of the dot gain curves
• "Printing characteristic": Display of the printing characteristic
The dots shown are the measured values that are used to determine the dot gain.
You select the curves that you want to view in "View".
"View"
In the list box, select the colors of the curves that will be shown.
The curves can be displayed together or separately. The number of colors depends on the data file
you selected. Color Toolbox supports the import and export of eight color channels. The color names
are taken from the color data file.
i
i
Note: When you save your quality data in Prinect Image Control, the color names are used
for the setup of the printing units. It is possible that the same color name is used because
of the automatic assignment of the different hues. If necessary, you can change these
names (in Prinect Image Control).
It is possible to view the dot gain curves or printing characteristic for a maximum of eight colors. How-
ever, the "Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the dot gain for as many as
twelve colors. "Prinect_6S" contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The
order of the colors depends on the setup of the printing units in Prinect Image Control and it can be
changed there.
A table is hidden below the graph. View this by dragging the horizontal bar upwards with the mouse.
This makes the curve diagram smaller (see Data table).
You can print the curve diagram and its data table as a log (see "General Information about Printing
Your Data", Seite 57).
You can also just print or save the curves or zoom in or out of parts of the diagram (see Context-
sensitive Menu).
"Process standard"
You can also display the tolerance range and/or standard curve of the process standard for cyan,
magenta, yellow and black by checking the appropriate box when viewing these four process colors
separately. You can also view the three chromatic process colors (CMY) jointly.
"Spot colors" also displays in "View" if you selected a spot color or multicolor process standard.
• "Process standard": Display of the tolerance range for the current process standard by a green
area above or below the dot gain curves. Optimally, the curves should be in the middle of the
tolerance range.
• "Standard curve": Display of a green curve defined for the process standard if the single process
colors (cyan, magenta, yellow or black) or joint CMY are selected.
i
i
Note: You can replace the process standard you are currently using by selecting a different
one in the "Process standard" main function.

Dot gain curves
Dot gain is the enlargement of screen dots by the printing process. An image can thus appear darker
and/or a color shift may occur.
Normally, dot gain is measured in the midtones at 40% and in the shadows at 80%.
Printing Characteristic
140 Version 2015

Printing characteristic is used to illustrate in screen percent the relation of the dot areas in print to
those on the film or in the data set. The ideal printing characteristic is linear and rises at an angle of
45°.
The printing characteristic depends on the ink used, the properties of the paper, the print form and
the way the press works.
The printing characteristics that are determined only apply to the process conditions at hand. If the
same data are to be produced on a different press or on different printing stock, the printing charac-
teristics will also change.
Data table
You can view the data table if you drag the horizontal bar below the curve diagram upwards. This
makes the curve diagram smaller. All the colors are always shown in the data table, irrespective of
the curve you select in the "View" list. If necessary, you can move the visible section using the scroll
bars.
The table displays the following values, separately for the four process colors:
• dot gain (%)
• deviation from the process standard (Δ)
The dot gain is shown for all other colors. All the dot areas (%) in the test chart or control element
are taken into account. Values that are not defined in the process standard are calculated from the
curves.

Context-sensitive Menu
You have the following additional functions through the context-sensitive menu (generally right-click)
in curve diagrams:
• "Save As": to save the graphic as a PNG file (*.png, Portable Network Graphics). This format is
suitable for viewing the graphic on a web site, supports a color depth of 24 bits and uses a loss-
less method of compression.
• "Print": opens the normal Windows print dialog with page and printer settings for printing the
graphic.
• "Zoom in": to scale up a curve section in the graphic either in horizontal or vertical direction or
symmetrically in both directions.
• "Zoom out": to scale down a curve section in the graphic either in horizontal or vertical direction
or symmetrically in both directions.
• "Auto Range": to reset the zoom functions, either in horizontal or vertical direction or symmet-
rically in both directions.
142 Version 2015

"Gray values" View

You can open this view by clicking the "Gray values" tab.
"Display of the gray balance curves"

The last details view displays the gray values.
Gray balance is not a set feature in the ISO standard but is a requirement in the GRACOL standard.
However, the gray balance process standard check as a quality indicator for high-quality print prod-
ucts is also very useful in the "ISO environment".
i
i
Note: This check shows values only if you use a minispot to check the gray balance (see
also ""ECI_GrayConL", "ECI_GrayConM" and ECI_GrayConS" with 52, 32 or 6 Patches",
Seite 126).
• GrayConL_...: This refers to the long version of the test strip with 52 patches. It is to be placed
vertically, parallel to printing direction, and is especially suited for checking ink balance and any
faults in gray balance.
• GrayConM_... (GrayConM_Eye1_...): This refers to the medium version of the test strip with 32
patches (there are less graduations in the primary colors). This strip should only be used if there
is not enough room for the "L" version.

• GrayConS_...: This refers to the small version of the test strip with only six patches (three gray
balance pairs). This test strip is designed only for a visual check.
In addition to checking the dot gain and the CIELab and density values, you can also check the gray
balance with this evaluation.
The additional grays of the control strip (K30, K50, K70 and their corresponding chromatic grays in
CMY) are evaluated for gray balance. The results display in a table and a graph.
The ISO 12647-2 process standard specifies that a gray composed of the three chromatic process col-
ors has the same L*, a* and b* values (CIELab) as an identical gray that is printed only with black.
In this case, the L*, a* and b* values for three real grays (black only) are compared at 30%, 50%
and 70% with those of the identical chromatic grays (cyan, magenta and yellow) and shown as a
table and a diagram with the calculated differential values for chroma difference (ΔCh* (Ch* =
chroma)) and lightness distance (ΔE):
• green if the deviations are within the tolerance range
Chroma (Ch*) describes the intensity of the difference in color. It describes what makes this color dif-
ferent from one which is perceived as achromatic and has the same degree of brightness. Terms such
as gray, pastel-colored, very chromatic, etc. are used to describe this property. Chroma depends
greatly on lightness. Colors perceived as being very light or very dark have only a slight amount of
chroma.
Chroma difference ΔCh* describes color casts that are perceived much more in neutral gray areas of
an image than in chromatic areas.
ΔCh* is the geometric distance between reference and target on the ab plane.
In the "Preferences", ""Individual Quality Index (IQI)" tab", Seite 55, in "Gray balance" you can define
the tolerance for the gray balance check within the process standard check. The sampling points are
"K30", "K50" and "K70".
The default value is "3.0". Values ranging between "3.0" and "4.0" make sense. The permissible val-
ues for the evaluations lie between "0" and "10".
144 Version 2015

Minispots for the evaluation of gray balance

Four variants of a new minispot are also available for the evaluation of the gray balance:
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_39: Paper grade 1 and 2, gloss coated and matt coated
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_43: FM screen, paper grade 1 and 2, gloss coated and matt coated
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_44: FM screen, paper grade 4, uncoated white
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_47: Paper grade 4, uncoated white
The advantages of these minispots are that there are 10 color patches for each color channel, in addi-
tion six color patches for the evaluation and calculation of the gray balance: K30, K50, K70 as well
as CMY30, CMY50 and CMY70. You can measure these strips with the X-Rite EyeOne strip in two
measure runs.

"Ink zones" View

You can open this view by clicking the "Ink zones" tab.
"Display of the ink zones"

You can view "Display of the ink zones", for example, if you evaluate the "Color Calibration Test
Chart" with the appropriate control element (see "Loading a Combined Test Chart", Seite 69). You
can also use a test strip with information about the ink zones that has solid tint patches in each ink
zone.
In this case, for example, the print control strips found on every press sheet are suitable for evalua-
tion of the data.
This view lets you check the ink stability of a press sheet. The ink stability indicates whether ink is
applied evenly in every ink zone.
A diagram of the ΔE values displays by default. You can select between the following view modes in
the list box:
• Show density
• Show ΔE
• Show density table
• Show ΔE table
146 Version 2015

The standard curve (continuous line in the relevant color) and the tolerance range (green) of the pro-
cess standard are shown when you view the curves. You can select the process standard that you
wish to view in the "Process standard" main function. You can also change the tolerance range in this
window, if it is necessary.
i
i
Note: You can set tolerances for the ink zones and gradual fading in the "Preferences > Tol
[%]" dialog. These tolerances do not refer to the process standard when you assess density.
This is where you define a threshold that refers to an evaluation diagram that displays for
the single views (see Show density).
Each single view of the ΔE evaluation displays the process standard tolerance for the color
you selected.
Show density
The graph shows the solid tint density curves for all defined color channels for the various ink zones.
The tolerance ranges of the process standard are also shown in green for the four process colors black
(DV BLACK), cyan (DV CYAN), magenta (DV MAGENTA) and yellow (DV YELLOW).
The ink zones used (position on the press sheet) are recorded on the horizontal axis and the mea-
sured solid tint densities on the vertical axis. The broken line indicates the mean in all the ink zones
used for each color.
It is possible to view the solid tint density curves for a maximum of eight colors. However, the
"Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the density values for as many as twelve
colors. "Prinect_6S" contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The order of
the colors depends on the setup of the printing units (e.g. in Prinect Image Control).
Click anywhere within a color channel to view this color with a scale range.

Example: Density values shown for magenta
The maximum deviation from the mean is shown in percent for this channel to the right of the curve.
You can set tolerances for the ink zones in the "Preferences > Tol [%]" dialog. By doing this, you
define the limit up to which the maximum deviation from the mean can be accepted. This is indicated
by a green area in the graphic. The red area indicates the part outside the set tolerance.
In our example, this value is exceeded, i.e. the maximum deviation from the mean in percent is in the
red area.
148 Version 2015

Show Delta E
The graph shows the ΔE values for all defined color channels for the various ink zones.
Green indicates the tolerance ranges of the process standard for the four process colors black (ΔE
BLACK), cyan (ΔE CYAN), magenta (ΔE MAGENTA) and yellow (ΔE YELLOW).
The ink zones used (position on the press sheet) are recorded on the horizontal axis and the calcu-
lated ΔE values on the vertical axis. The broken line indicates the mean in all the ink zones used for
each color.
It is possible to view the ΔE values for a maximum of eight colors. However, the "Prinect_6S" and
"Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the ΔE values for as many as twelve colors. "Prinect_6S"
contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The order of the colors depends
on the setup of the printing units (e.g. in Prinect Image Control).

Example: ΔE values shown for magenta
The Lab values of the process standard you selected and the mean values (Average) calculated from
the actual Lab values are shown to the right of the curve. Light green indicates the tolerance of the
process standard.
Show density table
150 Version 2015

The table lists all available solid tint density values of the defined color channels for each zone that
is taken into account. The deviation from the mean is also shown in each case. You can use the scroll
bar to move the part that you can view up or down.
Show Delta E table
The table lists all available ΔE values of the process colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) for each
zone that is taken into account. The deviation from the mean is also shown in each case. You can use
the scroll bar to move the part that you can view up or down.

"Gradual fading" View

You can open this view by clicking the "Gradual fading" tab.
"Display of the gradual fading"

Like the "Display of the ink zones", you can also view "Display of the gradual fading", for example, if
you evaluate the "Color Calibration Test Chart" with the appropriate control element (see "Loading a
Combined Test Chart", Seite 69). You can also use a test element with solid tint patches that runs
vertically along the entire press sheet.
This view lets you check any gradual fading on a press sheet.
A diagram of the ΔE values displays by default. You can select between the following view modes in
the list box:
• Show density
• Show ΔE
• Show density table
• Show ΔE table
152 Version 2015

The standard curve (continuous line in the relevant color) and the tolerance range (green) of the pro-
cess standard are shown when you view the curves. You can select the process standard that you
wish to view in the "Process standard" main function. You can also change the tolerance range in this
window, if it is necessary.
i
i
Note: You can set tolerances for the ink zones and gradual fading in the "Preferences > Tol
[%]" dialog. These tolerances do not refer to the process standard when you assess density.
This is where you define a threshold that refers to an evaluation diagram that displays for
the single views (see Show density).
you selected.
Show density
The graph shows the solid tint density curves for all defined color channels depending on the vertical
position on the press sheet. Green indicates the tolerance ranges of the process standard for the four
process colors black (DV BLACK), cyan (DV CYAN), magenta (DV MAGENTA) and yellow (DV YELLOW).
The vertical spacing (measured in mm from the top edge of the press sheet) is recorded on the hori-
zontal axis and the measured solid tint densities are recorded on the vertical axis. The broken line
indicates the mean in the printed area for each color.
It is possible to view the solid tint density curves for a maximum of eight colors. However, the
"Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the density values for as many as twelve
the colors depends on the setup of the printing units (e.g. in Prinect Image Control).

Example: Density values shown for magenta
The maximum deviation from the mean is shown in percent for this channel to the right of the curve.
You can set tolerances for gradual fading in the "Preferences > Tol [%]" dialog. By doing this, you
define the limit up to which the maximum deviation from the mean can be accepted. This is indicated
by a green area in the graphic. The red area indicates the part outside the set tolerance.
In our example, the maximum deviation from the mean in percent is in the green area.
154 Version 2015

Show Delta E
The graph shows the ΔE values for all defined color channels for the various ink zones. Green indi-
cates the tolerance ranges of the process standard for the four process colors black (ΔE BLACK), cyan
(ΔE CYAN), magenta (ΔE MAGENTA) and yellow (ΔE YELLOW).
The vertical spacing (measured in mm from the top edge of the press sheet) is recorded on the hori-
zontal axis and the calculated ΔE values are recorded on the vertical axis. The broken line indicates
the mean in the printed area for each color.
It is possible to view the ΔE values for a maximum of eight colors. However, the "Prinect_6S" and
"Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the ΔE values for as many as twelve colors. "Prinect_6S"
contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The order of the colors depends
on the setup of the printing units (e.g. in Prinect Image Control).

Example: ΔE values shown for magenta
The Lab values of the process standard you selected and the mean values (Average) calculated from
the actual Lab values are shown to the right of the curve. Light green indicates the tolerance of the
process standard.
156 Version 2015

Show density table
The table lists all available solid tint density values of the defined color channels for each solid tint
patch in vertical direction. The deviation from the mean is also shown in each case. You can use the
scroll bar to move the part that you can view up or down.
Show Delta E table

The table lists all available ΔE values of the defined color channels for each solid tint patch in vertical
direction. The deviation from the mean is also shown in each case. You can use the scroll bar to move
the part that you can view up or down.
158 Version 2015

Working with "Compare"
i
i
Note: The full scope of "Compare" is available only if you enabled Quality Monitor 13.0 with
a license key.
The following quality assessments are possible with "Compare":

• Comparison of the color data of two test charts, control elements or ICC profiles (quality check)
• Calculation and display of quality parameters and diagrams
• Printout of quality reports
To compare two color data sets, open the reference and comparison data using the relevant buttons,
menu commands or the Explorer panel. You can open the color data of one test chart or test strip as
the reference data and the data set of another test chart or test strip as the comparison data. You can
use different types of data. In this case, the data in common will be used. For example, the "ISO
12642-2 / ECI 2002" test chart contains the "PCS 40" test strip and the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3"
test chart or the "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4" test chart contains all of the "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002"
test chart. This is also applicable for the "Visual" and "Random" versions of the large test charts. In
"FMS" test strips where identical patches occur several times, a comparison is made from the middle
and the position evaluated.
You can view and compare all the device profiles based on the ICC specification and color data sets
in the "ISO 12642" format, including those that were not created with Color Toolbox or with PrintOpen
versions.
In "Preferences > Compare" you can enable "Use reference file for comparison" and set the path for
a file that will be used as the reference during the comparison. After a restart of the application, this
file is then always loaded automatically as the reference file in "Compare". This file is used as the
comparison file when you open a file or create a new one in "Measure" and then go directly to "Com-
pare". The comparison data from "Measure" are not used if you first go to another main function. You
then have to open the comparison data you want manually.

You can usually use the following reference files:

• "HDMcoated_bb.txt": Measurements with black backing (BB); offset printing
Path: "<Drive>:\Color Toolbox\Color Tool 13.0\data\hdm"
• "FOGRA39L.txt": Measurements with white backing (WB); glossy or matt
Path: "<Drive>:\Color Toolbox\Color Tool 13.0\data\fogra"
• "FOGRAMK3ABC_FOGRA39.txt": Measurements with white backing (proof)
Path: "<Drive>:\Color Toolbox\Color Tool 13.0\data\fogra\MediaControl"
You can also use loaded data from "Analysis". To do this, in one of the diagrams you must click the
point that represents the reference file you want and then click "Ref" in the context-sensitive menu
(generally right-click). After that, select another point for the comparison file and click "Cmp" in the
context-sensitive menu. The two files open in "Compare" as reference and comparison data as you
defined them and appear in the test chart diagram.
You can also view the reference or comparison file separately by selecting or deselecting it in some
diagrams.
You can open the following views and statistical results for the loaded color data sets using the tabs:
• "Test chart": You can view a a composite display of the loaded test charts, test strips or linear-
ization strips with small and large color patches (see "Test chart" View):
· Absolute or differential values (display with miscolors)
· Display of statistical results for deviation
· Display of patches, optionally with ΔE values
• "xy diagram": This two-dimensional color space is shown as a horseshoe-shaped diagram,

known as the chromaticity diagram. See "xy diagram" View.
• "ab diagram": You can view a two-dimensional color display of the ab plane with or without the
dots. See "ab diagram" View.
• "La/Lb diagram": You can view a two-dimensional color display of the L*a*b* color space (par-
allel to the lightness axis). See "La/Lb diagram" View.
• "3D color space" (tab): You can view a three-dimensional display of the color space where the
measured color data are displayed in an a*b* diagram (CIE L*a*b* or CIELAB color space). See
"3D color space" View.
• "3D color space" (button bar): You can view a separate three-dimensional display of the color
space where the measured color data are displayed in an a*b* diagram (CIE L*a*b* or CIELAB
color space). See "3D display of the color space" Window (with central projection and/or
animation).
160 Version 2015

• "Statistics": You can view different diagrams with statistical results that refer to the CIELab color
values. See "Statistics" View:
· Error histogram
· Trend (error distribution)
· Trend with mean (error distribution)
• "CIE report": You can compare the color data of two test charts, control elements or ICC profiles
(quality check) with the following weighting (see "CIE report" View):
· Dot gain at 25%, 40%, 50%, 70%, 75% and/or 80%
· Solid tint density values
· CIELab Color Values
· Analysis
· Proof report
• Proof report: Displays the overall result of a ΔE proof evaluation with the key color data (quick
overview). You can set that other evaluation parameters will be shown in the "Preferences >
Proof Report" dialog (see "Proof statistics" View).
• "Proof statistics": Display of the statistical results in the following diagrams (see "Proof statistics"
View):
· an error histogram
· two Lab scatter diagrams
• "ΔLab Report": Display of four histograms for a frequency distribution of differential color values
(Lab color values). See "ΔLab report" View.
• "ΔLCH Report": Display of four histograms for a frequency distribution of differential color values
(LCH values). See "ΔLCH report" View.
• "Tonal values": Display of different diagrams, see "Tonal values" View:
· Dot gain (curves)
· Printing characteristic
· Density curves (density profile)

• "Data table": Display of all the measured and calculated values in a table. You can select which
values will be shown in the table by checking the appropriate boxes to the right of the table or
in the "Preferences" dialog (see "Data table" View).
162 Version 2015


All relevant menu commands of the "Compare" main function are listed in the table below. Some of
File > Open reference data Opens a dialog where you can load a text file with mea-
sured data (color data, density values or screen per-
cents) as reference data in a comparison.
Select the view mode for the data by clicking the rele-
vant tab icon. You can select viewing options in "View"
on the right of the diagram.
File > Open comparison data Opens a dialog where you can load a text file with mea-
sured data (color data, density values or screen per-
cents) that will be compared to the reference data.
Select the view mode for the data by clicking the rele-
vant tab icon. You can select viewing options in "View"
File > Close documents Closes the open (current) documents.
File > Print Opens a dialog where you can set your printer options
and select the diagrams to be printed.
You can also connect a Dymo LabelWriter and print the
most important parameters (proof report) to a label.
to the easy mode), define settings for color measure-
ment, select a reference file for comparisons, define hot
folders, define settings for the proof and CIE report, set
tolerances and a custom quality index (iQi).
Test chart Shows the data sets with patches.
You can select viewing options for the data and statis-
tics on the right of the diagram.
You can switch pages in multiple page test charts (e.g.
"Page 1" thru "Page 4" for the "PrintOpen Extended 840"
test chart).

xy diagram Shows the data sets where the measured color data are
displayed in an xy diagram (horseshoe-shaped diagram,
known as the chromaticity diagram).
You can select viewing options on the right of the dia-
gram.
ab diagram Shows the data sets where the measured color data are
displayed in an a*b* diagram (CIE L*a*b* or CIELAB
color space).
gram.
La/Lb diagram Shows the data sets where the measured color data are
displayed in an L*a*-/L*b* diagram (CIE L*a*b* or
CIELAB color space).
gram.
3D color space (tab) Shows the data sets as a three-dimensional color space
where the measured color data are displayed in an a*b*
diagram (CIE L*a*b* or CIELAB color space).
gram. You can also switch to a two-dimensional sec-
tional plane of the color space if you wish.
3D color space (button) Shows the data sets as a three-dimensional color space
in a separate window where the measured color data
are displayed in an a*b* diagram (CIE L*a*b* or CIELAB
color space).
gram. You can also switch to a two-dimensional sec-
tional plane of the color space if you wish. You can dis-
able Central projection that is set by default. When
animation is enabled, the color gamut rotates on the
lightness axis, allowing it to be viewed from all sides.
This function depends on your graphics card.
Statistics Displays different diagrams with statistical results (his-
togram and trend) that refer to the CIELab color values.
You can select the diagram type on the right of the dia-
gram.
CIE report Displays the overall result (Quality Check) for a compar-
ison of reference and comparison data relating to dot
gain, solid tint density and/or solid tint CIELab color
values.
Proof report Displays the overall result of a ΔE proof evaluation with
the key color data (quick overview). The proof report is
also found in the CIE report.
164 Version 2015

Proof statistics Displays a screen with statistical results (error histo-
gram and Lab scatter diagrams).
ΔLab Report Displays four histograms for a frequency distribution of
differential color values.
ΔLCH Report Displays four histograms for a frequency distribution of
differential color values.
Tonal values Displays different density diagrams (dot gain, printing
characteristic, density curve).
You can select the type of diagram and viewing options
Data table Displays all the measured or calculated values.
You can select which data will be shown in the table by
enabling the appropriate items to the right of the table.
You can also configure what data will be shown in the
preferences.
grated CMM).

Views and Diagrams
Notes on the Diagrams

appropriate item in the tabs. To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for viewing
the color space. When you view a test chart, a separate window also displays, showing you the cur-
rent values for the reference and/or comparison data of the patches. You can also define preferences
for some views in the "Preferences" dialog (see "General Information about Preferences", Seite 43).
Status Bar
The status bar displays the file names of the reference and comparison data and a miniature of the
test chart or control element. If different types of test charts or test strips are open, the status bar
only displays patches that are in both files.
The full path is then shown as a tooltip when you move the mouse pointer to a name.
The filter setting displays after the file name (select in the "Preferences" dialog, "Measurement" tab):
• "M0": No filter (M0:ISO-13655)
• "M1": D50 (M1:ISO-13655)
• "M2": UV (M2:ISO-13655)
• "M3": Pol (M3:ISO-13655)
166 Version 2015

"Test chart" View


The view allows a visual comparison of both data sets and is particularly suited to checking measured
color data. The test chart and/or control element is shown as color patches in the diagram. To the
right of the diagram, you can define various settings for displaying the test chart or test strip.
"View"
You can display the reference and comparison data either separately or together by checking the
appropriate boxes.
"Analysis"
The following values are used for the evaluation:
• the values that were measured (XYZ values, Lab values)
• the difference of the measured values (ΔL, Δa, Δb) and the color distance (ΔE).
If you have measured color data, you can view the patches either with absolute or differential values
(select in "Analysis"). Other settings are possible, depending on what you select in this box.
i
i
Note: It is not possible to display differential values for density values or screen percents.

"Diagram"
You can select three different diagrams for an analysis with differential values:
• View with miscolors
• View with miscolors (scaled up threefold)
• View with color differences
"Parameter"
You can select the following parameters to view the test chart with absolute or differential values:
• "ΔE(ab)", "ΔE(2000)": Color differences relating to Lab color values, calculation based on dif-
ferent definitions for color distances
• "ΔL*", "Δa*", "Δb*": Lab differential values of reference and comparison data
• "ΔC", "Δh": Chroma and hue difference
"Color deviation"
Color deviation is calculated for various parameters that you can select and the following data are
shown:
• "Mean"
• "StdDev" = Standard deviation
• "Max" = maximum deviation value
• "Patch (Max)" = patch number of maximum deviation
"Mark all patches with"

When you enable this function, you can use the slider to set a value for the differential values for the
parameter selected (e.g. ΔE(ab)). In this case, all patches whose differential value exceeds this value
(e.g. "10") are marked by a red-and-white frame. All the patches are marked if you push the slider to
the far right to "0.00".
168 Version 2015

View with Absolute Values and Marked Patches
The patches can be shown together or individually. When both reference and comparison data are
checked, the reference data are depicted by large patches and the comparison data by smaller ones
on top of them.
The accuracy of the color data displayed on the monitor depends on the position of the colors in the
color space and the monitor settings.
The ΔE value denotes the distance between two colors in the color space. Under favorable viewing
conditions, a ΔE value of "1" to "2" is barely perceptible to the human eye. In grays, however, a finer
differentiation is possible, allowing a ΔE value of "0.7" to be perceived in this range.
Viewing the differential values with miscolors is recommended for a visual comparison.
In this example, all patches whose ΔE(ab) value is greater than 10 are marked.

View with Differential Values
"Diagram > Miscolors"

Viewing the data with differential values is suited to localizing errors as you can easily see any devi-
ations. Differential values can be calculated and displayed for different parameters (color difference
ΔE, differences of the L*, a* and b* coordinates, chroma or hue difference). The default view is with
miscolors. These are used instead of the "real" colors to highlight slight differences in colors (espe-
cially grays).
A color scale with a range of "0" to "12" shows the meaning of the colors. For example, the biggest
differences (ΔE greater than or equal to 12) are red and the smallest blue. Differences lying in
between this are orange, yellow or green.
170 Version 2015

"Diagram > Enhance miscolors"
The miscolors display can also be scaled up threefold to be able to see smaller differences better. The
scale range changes from "0" to "4" if you enable the "Enhance miscolors" option.
"Diagram > Color difference"
You can also switch over to view the color differences instead of the miscolors. These differences are
difficult to recognize if the deviations are very small, and as a result you see "white" patches.

Data window
A separate window with the following data and reference values displays when you move the mouse
pointer to a patch:
• "Ref. [Lab]": Displays the Lab color values for the current patch of the reference data set
• "Cmp." (beside "Ref. [Lab]"): Displays the Lab color values for the current patch of the compar-
ison data set
• "Δ": Displays the differential Lab color values for the reference and comparison data set
172 Version 2015

• "ΔE(ab)", "ΔE(2000)", "ΔL*", "Δa*", "Δb*", "ΔC" or "Δh": Displays the differential value of the
reference and comparison data for the current patch, depending on what is set in the "Parame-
ter" list
• "Ref. [XYZ]": Displays the XYZ color values for the current patch of the reference data set
• "Cmp." (beside "Ref. [XYZ]"): Displays the XYZ color values for the current patch of the compar-
ison data set
• "Δ": Displays the differential XYZ values for the reference and comparison data set
• "Ref. [D]": Displays absolute or relative cyan, magenta, yellow, and black density values for the
current patch.
i
i
surement" tab).

"xy diagram" View

You can open this view by clicking the "xy diagram" tab.
"Display of the xy diagram"

The xy diagram is shown as a horseshoe-shaped diagram, known as the chromaticity diagram. It
shows the purely color-related information of a visible color, independent of lightness.
The horseshoe-shaped curve is known as the spectrum locus and is plotted from the xy coordinates
of all the pure wavelengths in the visible spectrum. Each color displayed is an additive mixture of
spectral colors.
All colors that are possible lie within the boundary formed by the spectrum locus.
The intensity and, consequently, the purity of a hue is greatest at the edge of the curve, but decreases
towards the middle of the diagram, as there are no colors purer than spectral colors.
In the xy diagram, lines join up the locations of primary and secondary colors and give you an idea of
the size of the color gamut. By displaying a reference and a comparison data set together, you can
compare the position and size of two color gamuts with the help of these "cobwebs" and/or measur-
ing points.
174 Version 2015

"View"
To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color space:
• "Reference data", "Comparison data": You can select the color to show the data (dots and cob-
web) of the reference and comparison data. The following colors are set by default:
· Reference data: Blue
· Comparison data: Red
• "Dots": Display with or without measuring points
The small dots that can be seen are the color values (locations) of all the patches measured in
the test chart or control element.
• The green circles/ellipses mark the tolerance range in the process standard for each process
color. This graph shows the size of the color space and the position of the process colors in rela-
tion to the tolerance range.
• "Cobweb": Display with or without cobweb
The "cobweb" joins up the locations of certain color patches selected in the test chart (primary
and secondary colors) and gives you a rough idea of the size of the color gamut.
Only the outline of the color gamut is shown in the xy diagram when you uncheck this box.
• "Colored graphic": Display without or without color graph
The colored background (e.g. horseshoe) is hidden when you uncheck this box. The outlines and
the colors you selected for displaying the data set, however, remain as they are. This setting is
very suitable for printing a screen shot to a black-and-white printer.
• You can print the view as a log (see "General Information about Printing Your Data", Seite 57).
You will find further information in ...

• "Notes on the CIE XYZ System and xy Diagram", Seite 184
• "Notes on the CIELAB Color Space", Seite 184

"ab diagram" View

You can open this view by clicking the "ab diagram" tab.
"Display of ab plane"
In the ab diagram, lines join up the locations of primary and secondary colors and give you an idea
of the size of the color gamut. By displaying a reference and a comparison data set together, you can
compare the position and size of two color gamuts with the help of these "cobwebs" and/or measur-
ing points.
176 Version 2015

"View"
The color circle and the colored corners of the diagram help you in your orientation on the ab
plane. Both are hidden when you uncheck this box. The outlines and the colors you selected for
displaying the data set, however, remain as they are. This setting is very suitable for printing a
screen shot to a black-and-white printer.


"La/Lb diagram" View

You can open this view by clicking the "La/Lb diagram" tab.
"Display of the La/Lb diagrams"

The two graphs show color gamuts in the L*a*b* color space viewed from the side, parallel to the
lightness axis.
In the top graph, the color space is shown in the direction of the a* axis, that is from green to red,
and in the bottom graph in the direction of the b* axis, i.e. from blue to yellow.
The color gradations, right and left, show the influence of the color lightness.
From the diagrams, you can assess the depth resolution of a printing process in the color space and
its size and which colors can be displayed.
178 Version 2015

"View"
• "Cobweb": Only the outlines of the color gamuts are shown in the La or Lb diagram with this
function.
Only the color gradient bars on the sides are hidden when you uncheck this box. The outlines
and the colors you selected for displaying the data set, however, remain as they are.
This setting is very suitable for printing a screen shot to a black-and-white printer.


"3D color space" View

Click the "3D color space" tab to view a three-dimensional display of the test chart in the CIE L*a*b*
or CIELAB color space.
"3D display of the color space"

This diagram shows a three-dimensional display of the color gamut in the L*a*b* color space.
This display is suited for comparing print and proof color spaces. For example, you can judge to what
extent a proofer is capable of reproducing the colors of a printer.
The diagram shows the maximum color gamut of the color data of the measured test chart. If you
wish, you can confine the result by profile settings, for example, by limiting the total dot area and/or
maximum black or black width. The color gamut then diminishes in chromatic, dark colors.
Dirt on the test charts or measuring errors causes the color gamut to become uneven. You can then
remedy this by smoothing the data.
180 Version 2015

"View"
To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color gamut:
• You can select how the color gamut will be displayed in "Diagram":
· "Stacks": 3D display of the stacks (layers) of the color gamut, see Examples: 3D displays
of the layers ("Stacks" diagram).
· "Sections": 2D display with sections through the color space, see Examples: 2D sections
throughout the color space ("Sections" diagram).
• In the "Stacks" diagram, you can change the vertical position of the layers with the lightness
slider (L). All of the color gamuts are shown if lightness is set to maximum (L=100). You remove
layers as you gradually reduce lightness. The graduation depends on the ΔE setting.
• In the "Sections" diagram, you can view the 2D sections throughout the color space by moving
the lightness slider (L).
• In the "Stacks" diagram, the "Elevation" and "Hue angle" sliders allow you to set the observer's
viewpoint, and consequently, from which point you are looking at the color gamuts.
• In the "Stacks" diagram, you can use the "ΔE" slider to set the layer distance ΔE, that is the dis-
tance between the layers of the color gamuts.
• You can scale up or down the view as you wish with the "Zoom" slider.
• If the default is left as it is, the reference data set is blue in the diagram and the comparison data
set is red. You can swap the colors or select "Black". For a better overview, you can also hide
the data set concerned by selecting "None".
• You can show or hide the color circle of the ab plane by enabling and disabling the "Colored
graphic" function respectively.
• The "Show wire model function" allows you to display the color gamut either as a full color or
transparently as a wire model (see Examples: "Show wire model" view).
• "Color space volume" shows the gamut volume for the reference and comparison data and the
deviation in percent in both cases. This lets you check whether the gamut has increased or
decreased.
i
i
Note: In the earlier versions of Quality Monitor, the influence of black in the color space that
you viewed in the 3D graphic was only approximate. Now voxel algorithms make precise
calculation possible and the influence of black that displays is exact.

Examples: 3D displays of the layers ("Stacks" diagram)
"Lightness (L)" slider

L=100 L=66 L=33
"ΔE" slider
ΔE=2 ΔE=5 ΔE=10
"Elevation (ele)" slider

ele=30° ele=60° ele=90°
"Hue angle (hue)" slider

hue=5° hue=180° hue=270°
182 Version 2015

Examples: 2D sections throughout the color space ("Sections" diagram)
i
i
Note: You can only use the "Lightness" and "Zoom" sliders in this view.

L=50 L=65 L=80

Examples: "Show wire model" view
Default setting in the "Stacks" diagram

• "Lightness (L=100)" slider
• "Elevation (ele=30°)" slider
• "Hue angle (hue=5°)" slider
• "ΔE (ΔE=2)" slider
Wire model unchecked Wire model checked
Default setting in the "Sections" diagram

184 Version 2015

"3D display of the color space" Window (with central

projection and/or animation)
Click "3D color space" in the button bar to view a separate, three-dimensional display of the test
chart in the CIE L*a*b* or CIELAB color space.
In contrast to the 2D/3D view that you can display with the tab, this function lets you switch to a cen-
tral projection of the color space and/or also show it as an animated graphic. In addition, you can
display different test charts, each in their own window, in this 3D view, allowing you to compare the
color spaces directly with one another.
i
i
Note: This function uses the graphics card of your computer and, for that reason, depends
on your hardware.
"3D display of the color space"

This diagram shows a three-dimensional display of the color gamut in the L*a*b* color space. This
display is suited for comparing a print and proof color space. For example, you can judge to what
extent a proofer is capable of reproducing the colors of a printer.
The diagram shows the maximum color gamut of the color data of the measured test chart. If you
wish, you can confine the result by profile settings, for example, by limiting the total dot area and/or
maximum black or black width. The color gamut then diminishes in chromatic, dark colors.

Dirt on the test charts or measuring errors causes the color gamut to become uneven. You can then
remedy this by smoothing the data.
"View"
To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color gamut:
• "Reference data", "Comparison data": If the default is left as it is, the reference data set is
blue in the diagram and the comparison data set is red. You can swap the colors or select
"Black". For a better overview, you can also hide the data set concerned by selecting "None".
• "Colored graphic": This function lets you view each dot in the color gamut in the color of its
coordinates (chroma, hue and lightness).
Chroma and hue describe its position on the a*b* axis and lightness L* specifies its vertical posi-
tion in the color space.
The graphic shows the color circle on the a*b* axis for clearer viewing of the color space. This
detailed view of the colors is hidden when the function is disabled and you view the color gam-
uts in the colors selected for the reference and comparison data.
You can see the colored graphic more clearly when you move the sliders (especially "ΔE" and
"Elevation") or disable the "central projection".
• "Show wire model": Enabling this function allows you to display the color gamuts transpar-
ently as a wire model (see examples "Show wire model" function). You cannot see the "Colored
graphic" view because it is covered by the grid lines.
The color gamuts display as follows when the function is disabled:
· "Colored graphic" enabled: in the appropriate hue, depending on the observer's view-
point (see "Elevation" and "Hue angle" sliders).
· "Colored graphic" disabled: as a full color for reference and comparison data.
• "Sections": When you enable this function, you switch from a 3D display of the color space with
stacks (layers) to a 2D display with sections through the color space.
· 3D displays of the layers
· 2D sections throughout the color space ("Sections" enabled)
• "Central projection": You change the view to a parallel projection (like the view displayed in
the "3D color space" tab) when you disable this function.
• "Animation": You start a rotation of the display around the lightness axis when you enable this
function.
• "Lightness" slider: The effect depends on the "Sections" function.
· In the stacks diagram ("Sections" disabled), you can change the vertical position of the
layer with the lightness slider (L). All of the color gamuts are shown if lightness is set to
maximum (L=100). You remove layers as you gradually reduce lightness. The graduation
depends on the ΔE setting.
186 Version 2015

· In the "Sections" diagram, you can view the 2D sections throughout the color space by
moving the lightness slider (L).
• "Elevation" and "Hue angle" sliders: Use these sliders to set the observer's viewpoint, and
consequently, from which point you are looking at the color gamuts/layers.
• "ΔE" slider: In the stacks view ("Sections" disabled), this slider lets you set the layer distance
ΔE, that is the distance between the layers of the color gamuts.
i
i
Note: You can make the window bigger or smaller as you wish by dragging at the sides of
the window with the mouse.
Examples:
The following graphics show some examples of color gamuts in the color space.
3D displays of the layers

Three different view are shown one below the other:
• Row 1: The "Colored graphic" and "Central projection" functions are enabled.
• Row 2: The "Colored graphic" function is enabled and "Central projection" disabled.
• Row 3: The "Colored graphic" and "Central projection" functions are disabled.
These graphics are identical to the examples for the 2D/3D views that you can display with the
tab (see "3D color space" View).
Only one slider setting at a time was changed to illustrate the effect of the four sliders. The following
basic setting was used (left graphic in each case):
The changed slider setting is shown in each case.


L=100 L=66 L=33
188 Version 2015

"Elevation (ele)" slider

ele=30° ele=60° ele=90°

"Hue angle (hue)" slider

hue=5° hue=180° hue=270°
190 Version 2015

"ΔE" slider
ΔE=2 ΔE=5 ΔE=10

2D sections throughout the color space ("Sections" enabled)

L=50 L=65 L=80
192 Version 2015

"Show wire model" function
Slider setting for "Stacks" diagram

("Sections" disabled)

Slider setting for "Sections" diagram

("Sections" enabled)
194 Version 2015

"Statistics" View
You can open this view by clicking the "Statistics" tab.
"Display of statistical results"

The statistical results provide you with information about error distribution of the two data sets. You
can choose between three different diagrams:
• Histogram
• Trend
• Trend with mean
The error is selected by means of the following parameters:

• "ΔE(ab)", "ΔE(2000)": Color differences relating to Lab color values, calculation based on differ-
ent definitions for color distances
• "ΔL*", "Δa*", "Δb*": Lab differential color values of reference and comparison data
• "ΔC", "Δh": Chroma and hue difference
In addition, the deviation is shown for the selected parameter, showing the mean, the standard devi-
ation as the dimension for the scatter and the maximum value (specifying the patch number).

Display of the Error Histogram
You can view the frequency of actions in a histogram or bar graph. The frequencies are specified as
absolute values in this diagram.
This histogram displays the frequency of errors of various differential values. The error magnitude is
depicted along the horizontal axis, for example the values for color distance ΔE(ab) from "0" to "10".
The vertical axis displays the frequency of these color distances. In other words, the histogram pro-
vides you with information about the distribution of errors of a certain size (in this case, the number
of color distances). You can assume that both data sets are well matched if the greatest frequencies
are found in the low-range values and if the frequency tends towards "0" as the error magnitude
increases. With identical data sets, there is only one bar at "0" as no color deviations can occur.
In the "Parameter" box to the right of the diagram, you can select which errors will be shown.
Point the mouse at a bar in the diagram to display a tooltip showing the frequency and upper and
lower limit of that bar.
196 Version 2015

Display of the Error Distribution (Trend)
Scatter diagrams, also referred to as x-y diagrams, are used to provide a graphic display of data with-
out trends or to detect first trends in data sets. Pairs of variates are entered as single dots in the scat-
ter diagram.
In this scatter diagram, the error (differential value) is shown by a dot for each patch of the test chart
or control element. Point the mouse pointer at these dots to display a tooltip showing the patch ID
and deviation.
You can read the error distribution from the diagrams, for example, which patches have the greatest
or smallest amount of errors.
The error distribution corresponds to the geometric arrangement of the patches in the test chart from
top left to bottom right.
As a means of orientation, you can enable "Color dots" to see which patches are represented by dots.
All the dots are shown in the color of the relevant patch in the test chart or test strip. An overview in
the status bar shows the evaluated reference and comparison data. This is just the patches that are
found in both data files.
The more the values are scattered, the greater the deviations between the two data sets. You can see
this more clearly in the third diagram "Trend with mean".

Display of the error distribution (trend with mean)
In this scatter diagram, the calculated mean (olive-green line) and scatter (yellow lines) are added to
the previous display.
198 Version 2015

"CIE report" View

You can open this view by clicking the "CIE report" tab. It displays the overall result (Quality Check)
of a comparison of measured data.
"Display of the results (Quality Check)"

When you open the reference and comparison data, an overview with the main results of the compar-
ison then appears. Click the relevant tab on the left to view more details of the comparison.
You can print the view as a log (see "General Information about Printing Your Data", Seite 57).
The result gives you an overview of how accurately the two data sets match each other and is divided
into the following sections:
• Total results
• Dot gain at 25%, 40%, 50%, 70%, 75% and/or 80%
• Density values
• CIELab Color Values
• Analysis
• Proof report

For a better overview, these sections (except for "Total results") are minimized to a caption bar and
can be shown or hidden by clicking this bar.
i
i
Note: In the "Preferences > CIE report" dialog (see ""CIE Report" Tab", Seite 53), you can
select which sections will be shown by checking the relevant boxes.
An icon at the end of the bar shows you the result of the comparison:
No values available
All the values are in the tolerance range.
At least one value is not in the tolerance range.
Only for proof report:
One value is at the tolerance limit, all other values are in the tolerance range.
The result refers to the four process colors cyan, magenta, yellow and black and is shown with the
appropriate initial letters and color bars. To date, process standards are defined only for four-color
printing with these colors. For that reason, spot colors ("Multicolor" option) are not shown in this dia-
log.
The broken lines on the bars mark a typical tolerance range. Small black arrows are used to highlight
the differential values that exceed the bar graph.
If no color data is available, for example, with dotmeters, these values are shown in black and the
other colors remain empty.
i
i
Note: For dotmeters, for example, the display of the results only contains the dot gain com-
parison. For that reason, switch to the dot gain and printing characteristic view for more
details ("Tonal values" tab).
Total results
"Total results": The overall result from all the evaluated data is indicated by a vertical black line on a
color bar. The color bar goes from green to yellow to red and shows how well the data match each
other. A black line in green means that the data are well to very well matched and, correspondingly,
a line in red means a bad to insufficient match.
i
i
Note: The various data evaluated is weighted differently in the total result. Each result of
the evaluated data contains precise details so that you can assess the quality of the data.
The icons on the right of the caption bar give you an overview of the result.
200 Version 2015

Dot gain
"Show DotGain at xx%": This section displays the dot gain at 25%, 40%, 50%, 70%, 75% and/or
80% for cyan, magenta, yellow and black. The percent shown depends on what you set in the "CIE
report" tab in the "Preferences" dialog.
The dot gains in the reference and comparison data and the calculated differential values "Δ" are
shown in tables:
The difference in dot gain between the reference and comparison data is shown by bars to the right.
Normally, the dot gain is positive in normal printing processes, but it can also be negative (test strips,
dotmeters). The display switches dynamically.
Density values
"Show density values": This section displays the solid tint density values for cyan, magenta, yellow
and black. In addition, the difference in density between the reference and comparison data is shown
in the "Δ" column and by bars on the right.
CIELab Color Values
"Show CIELab color values": This section displays the solid tint CIELab values for the primary and
secondary colors (black, cyan, magenta, yellow, red, green and blue) and also for paper white and
CMY gray (Overprint).

The difference between the reference and comparison data is shown in the "ΔE" column and by bars
on the right.
Analysis
"Show analysis": All the test chart or test strip patches that are in both the reference and comparison
data are evaluated in the analysis and three statistical values are computed. Patches that are only in
one file are ignored in the analysis. If patches have the same CMYK tonal values, the first patch with
this value is evaluated in the analysis. The following values are shown in a table:
• the mean of the difference in color (mean ΔE)
• the scatter (standard deviation)
• the maximum deviation value
• the patch number with the greatest deviation (maximum)
Proof report
"Show proof report": The overall ΔE proof result gives you an overview of the most important color
data.
This simplified form of the in-depth single evaluations is based on the media strip method recom-
mended by FOGRA for checking process standards. You can also view this on its own using the "Proof
report" tab.
This proof report displays the color distances ΔE and the maximum value defined for the process
standard as well as the patch number for the following parameters:
202 Version 2015

• Paper: paper white, printing material
• Mean value
• Maximum
• Primary colors (Max): CMY total
• Maximum ΔH primary colors: maximum hue difference of ΔE for primary colors
• Mean ΔH gray: mean hue difference of ΔE for grays
• Black, cyan, magenta and yellow: single results for the primary colors
• Red, green and blue: single results for the secondary colors
You can modify the maximum values by overwriting them in the "Proof Report" tab in the
""Preferences" Dialog", Seite 44. You can include other parameters in the evaluation (red area in the
diagram) by checking the appropriate box:
• Secondary colors (Max): RGB total
• Shadow
• Gray scale (K): result for black
• Gray scale (CMY): result for chromatic colors
The "Status" of the result is also listed:

• Green circle and "OK": The ΔE value is less than the maximum value and, consequently, is within
the tolerance range.
• Red circle and "Not OK": The ΔE value is greater than the maximum value and, consequently, is
not in the tolerance range.
• Yellow triangle and "Attention": The ΔE value is (almost) the same as the maximum value and,
consequently, is at the limit of the tolerance range.

"Proof statistics" View

Click the "Proof statistics" tab to view three diagrams with statistical results to compare the two data
sets.
"Summary proof statistics"

The statistical results provide you with information about error distribution of the color data in the
data sets.
For a comparison of both data sets, the values measured are used or the color deviations (differences
in color) ΔE for the Lab color values are calculated from the measured color data of the test charts.
The statistical results appear in four areas:
• At the top, a histogram for error distribution (frequency distribution) of the ΔE deviations
• At the bottom left, a scatter diagram towards chroma (distribution of the Δa and Δb color differ-
ences)
• At the bottom right, a scatter diagram in relation to lightness (ΔL differences)
• In the column on the right, a display with different ΔE values
204 Version 2015

Data table
To the right of the diagrams is a column showing values that are calculated from the Lab color values
of both data sets.
• "Mean": Mean of all ΔE values
• "StdDev": Standard deviation as the dimension for the scatter of the ΔE values
• "Max": Maximum error (greatest ΔE value)
• "White", "Black": ΔE values of white and black
• "C", "M", "Y": ΔE values of the primary colors (cyan, magenta and yellow)
• "R", "G", "B": ΔE values of the secondary colors (red, green and blue)
Display of the Error Histogram
You can view the frequency of actions in a histogram or bar graph. The frequencies can be specified
as absolute values or relative (in percent) to the maximum frequency.
This histogram displays the frequency of errors. The error magnitude is depicted along the horizontal
axis, in this case the values for color distance ΔE(ab) from "0" to "10". The vertical axis displays the
frequency of these color distances. In other words, the histogram provides you with information about
the number of color distances of a certain size.

You can assume that the color data of both data sets are well matched if the greatest frequencies are
found in the low-range values and if the frequency tends towards "0" as the error magnitude
increases. With identical data sets, there is only one bar at "0" as no color deviations can occur.
Display of the error distribution (trend)
Scatter diagrams, also referred to as x-y diagrams, are used to provide a graphic display of data with-
out trends or to detect first trends in data sets. Pairs of variates are entered as single dots in the scat-
ter diagram.
In this scatter diagram, the error (differential value) is shown by a dot for each patch of the test chart.
You can read the error distribution from the diagrams:
• on the left, in relation to chroma (Δa and Δb differences)
• on the right, in relation to lightness (ΔL differences)
The more the values are scattered, the greater the deviations between the two data sets.
In the left diagram, you can recognize any color shifts by clouds of dots going towards a certain color
(color cast).
The right scatter diagram has another two details:
• The green line marks the mean.
• The two yellow lines limit the area of standard deviation as the dimension for scattering.
If the dots are found mainly in the positive area, this means that the second value has become lighter;
if the dots are in the negative area, the value has become darker. In this way, you can recognize
errors, for example, in media simulation in proof profiles.
206 Version 2015

"ΔLab report" View

Four histograms are displayed when you click the "ΔLab report" tab.
"Display of the delta histograms"

These four histograms display the frequency distribution of differential color values for the data mea-
sured in the two selected data sets.
These histograms display the frequency of differential values. The horizontal axis displays the size of
these differential values. The vertical axis displays the frequency of these differential values. In other
words, the histogram provides you with information about the number of differential values of a cer-
tain size.
increases. With identical data sets, there is only one bar at "0" as no deviations can occur. By con-
trast, a greater number of bars means greater deviation and, consequently, a bad match of the two
data sets.
• "ΔE": The first histogram shows the frequency of color distances Δ between "0" and "16".

• "ΔL", "Δa", "Δb": The other three histograms show a frequency distribution of differences relat-
ing to lightness (ΔL) or chroma (Δa and Δb) between "-8" and "+8". Based on these diagrams,
you can recognize a trend for ink fluctuations.
All values that are not within the displayed range are marked by a red bar.
The following data are shown to the right of the histograms:
• "Mean"
• "Extr." = extreme value (greatest positive or negative value)
• "Max.Ind" or "Extr.Ind" = index number of the patch with the greatest deviation
208 Version 2015

"ΔLCH report" View

Four histograms are displayed when you click the "ΔLCH report" tab.
"Display of the delta histograms"

These four histograms display the frequency distribution of differential color values for the data mea-
sured in the two selected data sets.
These histograms display the frequency of differential values. The horizontal axis displays the size of
these differential values. The vertical axis displays the frequency of these differential values. In other
words, the histogram provides you with information about the number of differential values of a cer-
tain size.
increases. With identical data sets, there is only one bar at "0" as no deviations can occur. By con-
trast, a greater number of bars means greater deviation and, consequently, a bad match of the two
data sets.
• "ΔE": The first histogram shows the frequency of color distances Δ between "0" and "16".

• "ΔL", "ΔC", "ΔH": The other three histograms show a frequency distribution of differences relat-
ing to lightness (ΔL), to chroma (ΔC) and hue angle (ΔH) between "-8" and "+8". Based on these
diagrams, you can recognize probable fluctuations in saturation.
All values that are not within the displayed range are marked by a red bar.
The following data are shown to the right of the histograms:
• "Mean"
• "Extr." = extreme value (greatest positive or negative value)
• "Max.Ind" or "Extr.Ind" = index number of the patch with the greatest deviation
210 Version 2015

"Tonal values" View

You can open this view by clicking the "Tonal values" tab.
"Display of the dot gain/printing characteristic"

The density-based results can be seen in three different diagrams:
• Dot gain
• Printing characteristic
• Density curve
The comparison of the curves in these diagrams makes it easy for you to check the quality of a device
or process calibration or linearization.
For linearization (e.g. of an imagesetter or platesetter), a test strip is output and measured, giving you
the actual values. The nominal values are specified by device and process standards. Correction val-
ues (calibration values) are determined from the nominal and actual values. Ideally, the actual values
match the nominal values if you output and measure a test strip again after linearization.

After calibration, you can display the nominal values as reference data and the actual values as com-
parison data. This allows you to check the quality of linearization and to determine whether and how
much the actual values deviate from the nominal values; in other words, whether you have to rerun
calibration. This also allows you to detect when a renewed calibration/linearization is necessary.
However, this is easier with a long-term analysis (see "Working with "Analysis"", Seite 219).
"View"
The reference data have curves with continuous lines and the comparison data curves with dashed
lines. You can display the curves together or separately for the reference and comparison data and
likewise for all colors together or each color separately. You can also display the differential curves.
The following data are used for the comparison:
• the absolute density values measured
• the difference of the measured density values
• the absolute screen percents and dot gains calculated from the density
• a difference of the determined screen percents (identical to the difference of dot gain)
i
i
Note: Only screen percents and dot gain are used for plate measurements.
Only the primary colors are evaluated when examining the density. The reason for this is that a
unique density value (red, green or blue density filter) that can be used as a reference cannot be
assigned for secondary and tertiary colors.
An analysis of this view will give you usable results only if the dot gain curves can be calculated from
measured densities and/or spectral values.
For that reason, you should always enable the two respective options in "Preferences > Measure-
ment":
• "Measure and save density values as well (if supported by instrument)"
• "Measure and save spectral remissions as well (if supported by instrument)"
212 Version 2015

Display of the dot gain curves
Dot gain is the difference between the tonal values before and after processing. It can also be nega-
tive (dot loss).
In the diagram with the dot gain curves, the horizontal axis displays the tonal values of the film or
data set, and the vertical axis the dot gain.
also measure the density when measuring the colors (selected in the "Preferences" dialog).
measured, by general approximation from the Lab(xyz) color values.

Display of the printing characteristic
45°.
In process calibration, you attempt to calibrate the current printing characteristic to a reproducible
standard. The calibration curve corresponds to the difference between the printing characteristic you
want and the current one of the printing process. Generally, at least four printing characteristics
(CMYK process colors) must be set.
214 Version 2015

Display of the density curves (density profile)
The density profile view shows the density curves scaled from D = 0.0 to D = 3.0, the range that is
important for reproduction. The relation between tonal values and density values is shown in this
view.
If deviations are detected (e.g. drifts), these density curves can provide you with details about the
change, for example, whether you have to rerun linearization.

"Data table" View

You can open this table by clicking the "Data table" tab.
"Display of the data table"

This view displays a table with all the measured and calculated values. You can select which data will
be shown in the table by checking the appropriate boxes to the right of the table. You can change the
column width by dragging at the right edge, holding down the mouse button.
The values are sorted by size or alphabetically if you click the column heading:
• first click: ascending
• second click: descending
• third click: by patch number
You can sort the table as you want and print it with "File > Print".
216 Version 2015

Explanation of the columns:

• "ID": Consecutive number that identifies the patches in the test chart, starting with the first
patch
• "Name" (A1, A2, ..., G8, ...): Name of the patches in the test chart
• "CYAN", "MAGENTA", "YELLOW", "BLACK": Reference data depending on test chart defined
• "L*[1]", "a*[1]", "b*[1]": Lab color values of the reference data
• "X[1]", "Y[1]", "Z[1]": Measured XYZ color values of the reference data
• "C*[1]": Chroma of the reference data
• "h[1]": Hue angle of the reference data
• "Dc[1]", "Dm[1]", "Dy[1]": Measured red, blue and green density of the reference data
• "Dv[1]": Visual density of the reference data
• "Dot[1]": Measured or calculated screen percents of the reference data
• "DotGain[1]": Dot gain of the reference data
• "L*[2]", "a*[2]", "b*[2]": Lab color values of the comparison data
• "X[2]", "Y[2]", "Z[2]": Measured XYZ color values of the comparison data
• "C*[2]": Chroma of the comparison data
• "h[2]": Hue angle of the comparison data
• "Dc[2]", "Dm[2]", "Dy[2]": Measured red, blue and green density of the comparison data
• "Dv[2]": Visual density of the comparison data
• "Dot[2]": Measured or calculated screen percents of the comparison data
• "DotGain[2]": Dot gain of the comparison data
• "ΔL*", "Δa*", "Δb*": Lab differential color values of reference and comparison data
• "ΔC*": Chroma difference (difference of the two chromas C*[2] minus C*[1])
• "Δh": Hue angle difference (h[2] minus h[1])
• "ΔDc", "ΔDm", "ΔDy": Density differences (red, green and blue)
• "ΔDv": Visual difference in density
• "ΔDot": Dot gain differences
• "ΔE(ab)", "ΔE(2000)": color differences relating to Lab values, calculation based on different
definitions for color distances

"Save table as CSV file" Dialog

Click "Export" in the "Data table" to open the "Save table as CSV file" dialog.
This dialog lets you save all the data of the selected columns as a CSV file.
In the CSV file, the order of the data is matched to the analysis file for the "Ugra/FOGRA CMYK media
strip CMYK V2.0" for further processing with Microsoft Excel.
218 Version 2015

Working with "Analysis"
i
i
Note: The "Analysis" main function is available only if you enabled "Quality Monitor" 13.0
with a license key.
The following quality assessments are possible with "Analysis":

• Long-term analysis of the color data of several test charts or control elements (time series anal-
ysis).
• Comparison of more than two test charts or control elements
• Production check (see "Production check", Seite 244)
• Printout of quality reports ("Analysis report" with selectable tonal values and/or "Production
Check as per ISO 12647-2")
Information about Long-term Analysis
Analysis
"Analysis" lets you assess several color data sets created during a certain period. The results are
shown in three different analysis reports and depict trends relating to changes. If you check a test
chart or test strip at regular intervals, you can see how a process changes ("drifts off").
A time series analysis allows you to check whether and how changes in ambient conditions (e.g.
humidity, temperature), the replacement of worn parts (e.g. rubber blanket), the use of different inks
(e.g. from another manufacturer or a different batch) and different paper or fountain solutions can
affect the process. You can judge as of what point the changes are critical and when linearization or
calibration is necessary.
The results also show whether the changes are regular or whether they fluctuate and whether they
are found constantly or appear only as of a certain point. You can also print the results out as a record
(quality reports).
File Management
The file management function in "Analysis" lets you edit up to 15,000 data sets. Only the locations,
dot gains and densities are extracted when a data set is opened and they are saved together with the
path to the original file. This data format simplifies management and makes it easier to compare dif-
ferent elements.
For a long-term analysis, use the data of a process standard as the reference or select the measured
data of a test chart or control element. Based on these reference data, you then compare other mea-
sured data of test charts or control elements either individually or all together (mean values) see
"Mean calculation of test chart data" Dialog).

You can change the data set combination and the data selected as the reference data as required.
You can save the combined measured data as a series in xml format.
Series
All the data sets used for a long-term analysis are grouped together in one series. You can either com-
pile a new series or open an existing one. Both options allow you to make any number of modifica-
tions within the series (adding other data sets, disabling or deleting data sets already in the series,
changing the order or the reference). Use the "New", "Open", Add" and "Save" buttons on the right
as well as the "Change entry" dialog that you can open by double-clicking an item in the data table.
The series is saved as an xml file.
Reference data set

The reference data set provides you with defaults for a comparison and overall assessment. A
selected process standard (it has "P" as its "ID") is set by default as the reference data set. If you dis-
able this process standard, the first data set (ID = 1) in the data table is then automatically used as
the reference and "Ref" displays as its ID. You can change the reference data set as desired. Double-
click an item in the data table to open the "Change entry" Dialog where you can make the changes
you want to the current data set.
Hotfolder
You can define a maximum of four hot folders and their backup folders for the analysis results in the
""Hotfolder" tab", Seite 48 in the "Preferences" dialog. In the reports in "Analysis", there are three
elements to the left of the button bar (between data table and status bar) that are used to control
how the hot folders are polled. The items in the hot folders are updated every 30 seconds. After the
data in the hot folder are evaluated and displayed, they are copied automatically to their backup
folder.
i
i
Note: In Prinect Image Control 1, the data for quality control (quality data) are stored in the
"Results" folder (D:\cpc24\QualityMonitor\Results). This folder often has a large data vol-
ume because the quality data of different jobs are stored there and up to four presses can
access this folder. For that reason, to have a better overview of your data, you should not
define this "Results" folder as the hot folder. Select any other folder to which you can copy
the data you wish to evaluate from the "Results" folder.
In the successor, Prinect Image Control 2, you can define any folder as the hot folder and
enter the paths for the Quality Monitor output directory. You can then specify these hot fold-
ers also in Color Toolbox as hot folders for the analysis results.
220 Version 2015

How to use the hot folders
Use the right arrow beside the green Start button to open a list where you can select the hot folder
you want by enabling the relevant radio button. You must have defined the location of this hot folder
and of the backup folder in "Preferences > Hotfolder".
Polling of the selected hot folder starts when you click the green button.
Polling of the selected hot folder is paused when you click the yellow button (Pause). Resume polling
by clicking the green button.
Polling of this hot folder stops when you click the red button.


All relevant menu commands of the "Analysis" main function are listed in the table below. Some of
File > New Creates a new series. Use "Add" to copy the colors,
locations, dot gains and densities as well as the path to
the original file from the color data sets to this series.
File > Open Opens the "Open series" dialog where you can load an
existing series as an xml file that contains the compiled
data for colors, locations, dot gains and densities as
well as the path to the original file.
Select the analysis report you want by clicking the rele-
vant tab.
You can select viewing options for the data on the right
of the diagram.
The data sets in the series are displayed in rows in the
data table below the diagram in the order of their IDs.
Add Opens the "Open" dialog where you can select the data
files (text files with measured data). The colors, loca-
tions, dot gains and densities as well as the path to the
original file are copied from these color data files to the
new series.
The selected data sets are assigned an ID in the order
that they open and are displayed in rows in the data
table below the diagram.
A new series is saved as an xml file.
Select the analysis report you want by clicking the rele-
vant tab.
You can select viewing options for the data on the right
of the diagram.
File > Close document Closes the open (current) document.
File > Save Opens a dialog where you can save a series as an xml
file that contains the compiled measured data (loca-
tions, dot gains and densities and path to the original
file).
222 Version 2015

ers and master data (MDS), define settings for the proof
and CIE report, set tolerances and a custom quality
index (iQi).
Test chart > Calculate mean data Opens the "Merging of test chart data" dialog, where
you can average color data from various measurements.
When you save your data, you create a new test chart
file that contains the mean measured values.
You cannot average the data sets of a series in xml for-
mat.
CIE report Displays the overall result (trend) for a comparison of
reference and comparison data relating to solid tint
CIELab values and average deviation (ΔE(ab)).
gram.
Dot gain report Displays the overall result (trend) for a comparison of
reference and comparison data relating to dot gain and
dot gain differences (DDot Gain).
gram.
Density report Displays the overall result (trend) for a comparison of
reference and comparison data relating to solid tint
density and density differences (ΔD).
PV Overview Displays production variation (comparison of produc-
tion sheets with OK sheet compliant with ISO12647-2),
showing the overall result, a table with values for each
of the colors and a comparison of OK sheet and process
standard.
PV CIE report Shows a detailed report (diagram) of the primary colors
in production variation in relation to the permissible tol-
erances.
PV dot gain report Shows a detailed report (diagram) of dot gain in produc-
tion variation, optionally for 40% or 80%.

224 Version 2015

Dialogs
"Change entry" Dialog

You open this dialog by double-clicking an item in the data table of the following reports:
• CIE report
• Dot gain report
• Density report
• PV CIE report
• PV dot gain report
This dialog lets you change the items listed for the data sets in the open series. The dialog contains
the items of the data set used to display it. This data set is enabled in the data table (orange back-
ground).
"File name"
The name of the original color data file appears in this box. You cannot change this name.

"Location"
The path of the original color data file appears in this box.
Click the button with the three dots to set a different location with the "Open file" dialog.
"Status"
The status lets you define how the current data set will be handled in the long-term analysis. There
are three status options:
• "Enabled": The data are compared with the reference data during the long-term analysis. The
box is enabled (ticked) in the list.
• "Disabled": The data are not to be included in the long-term analysis but are to remain in the
current series. The box is disabled (no tick) in the list.
You can delete the data set from the series by clicking "Remove".
• "Reference": A selected process standard (it has "P" as its "ID") is set by default as the reference
data set.
If you disable this process standard, the first data set in the list below is then automatically used
as the reference.
You cannot change the status of a reference data set. You must first define another data set as
the reference, then the status of the previous reference data set automatically switches to
"Enabled". However, the ID remains the same.
"Date"
Date the data file was saved on. You can change the entry by overwriting it or using the arrow keys.
The format is set: Year - Month - Day.
"Time"
Time the data file was saved at. You can change the entry by overwriting it or using the arrow keys.
The format is set: Hours : Minutes : Seconds.
"Comment"
You can type any comment you wish or modify an existing one to have a better overview of the dif-
ferent data sets.
226 Version 2015

"Update process standard"

Use this function to change the current process standard. Proceed as follows:
1. Select the printing standard you want in the "Process standard" main function.
2. Double-click the first row in the data table (indicated by "P" for process standard).
3. Check the "Update process standard" box in the "Change entry" dialog and click "OK".
The dialog closes and the relevant reference values are refreshed in the data table.
Buttons
Click "OK" to confirm your settings for the current data set and copy it to the list. The dialog closes.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without changing the settings for the current data set.
You delete the current data set from the series by clicking "Remove".
The item is removed from the list. The IDs of the subsequent data sets are changed accordingly.

"Mean calculation of test chart data" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Calculate mean data" menu.
With this dialog, you can import data from the same type of test charts to Color Toolbox so that you
can average measured values. A document must be loaded in order to open this dialog. You must
have added at least one other test chart file in order to average the data.
i
i
Note: When you go to the "Analysis" main function, all the test chart files in the loaded
series are shown in the "List of test chart files to merge". For that reason, you should
remove any test chart files that are not to be averaged from the list.
This function is useful, for example, if the printing process is not stable, in other words, if there are
noticeable fluctuations in the (proof) print of the test chart. You can then measure the various signa-
tures with the printed test chart. In this way, you obtain mean values for your printing process.
If you have a "good" signature and would like it to feature more during your averaging process, you
can also use the same color data several times when determining the mean.
"Process colors"/"Test chart type"
The number of process colors and the test chart type of the open or empty (new) test chart file are
displayed here (for example, "4-color CMYK" and "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3").
Click "Add..." to open the "Open" dialog where you can search for and select the files you want.
"Measured data (.txt, .it8)" must be set for "Files of type".
When you double-click the file name or select the file and click "Open", the selected file is copied to
the "List of test chart files to merge" in the "Merging of test chart data" dialog. Select all files whose
color data are to be averaged. Multiple selection is possible.
i
i
Note: The number of process colors and test chart type must always match the open test
chart file.
228 Version 2015

You delete a selected file from the list by clicking "Remove".

When you click "Merge files...", the mean value is calculated for every measured value from all the
test chart files in the list. The mean values replace the corresponding values in the open (first) color
data file.
Click "OK" to apply the mean data to the first open color data file. The dialog closes.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog and discard the mean data.

Display of the result

The "Display of the result (trend)" appears for the "CIE report", at first without any data, when you
select the "Analysis" main function.
After you opened a series or compiled a new one with reference and comparison data or started a
hot folder, you can then view the following analysis reports with the appropriate tab icons:
• "CIE report": Display of the overall result (long-term analysis or trend) with a comparison of the
· Solid tint CIELab values (L, a, b)
· Average deviation (ΔE(ab))
• "Dot gain report": Display of the overall result (long-term analysis or trend) with a comparison
of the
· Dot gains
· The dot gain differences (ΔTWZ)
• "Density report": Display of the overall result (long-term analysis or trend) with a comparison of
the
· Solid tint density values (D)
230 Version 2015

· Density differences (ΔD)
The result displays in a diagram of the selected report and below that a data table of the relevant data
sets.
Notes on the Diagrams

appropriate item in the tabs or selecting the item you want in the "View" menu. To the right of the
diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color space.
"View"
Color names display to the right of the graphic with two boxes:
• right box: Check or uncheck the relevant boxes to select the colors that will be shown. The num-
ber of colors (process colors, mixed colors and/or spot colors) depends on the data sets you
selected. It is possible to view a maximum of eight colors. The color names (if any) are taken
from the data sets.
i
i
Note: If you use quality data from Prinect Image Control, you can also name the colors
according to the set printing units as "X", "Z", "U", "V", "S1", "S2", etc.
• left box: You can show or hide the tolerances of the current process standard for the defined pro-
cess colors by checking or unchecking the relevant boxes.
The name of the currently used process standard displays in the status bar. You can change the
process standard or modify the tolerances in the "Process standard" main function. Then, in
"Analysis", double-click the first row in the data table ("P" ID). Check the "Update process stan-
dard" box in the "Change entry" dialog and confirm with "OK". The inputs in the row change
accordingly.
• "Mean": You can show or hide the calculated mean for color distance (mean ΔE value) for all
color channels in the data series by enabling or disabling this option.

"X axis"
The analysis reports are shown as time series. These are line diagrams with the horizontal axis form-
ing the timeline. They are used to graphically illustrate time-based developments: to recognize a
"trend". You can define how the timeline (x axis) will be displayed by checking the appropriate box:
• "Time": The timeline is defined in this case by the period that is defined by the date and time of
the single data sets in the series (e.g. three days).
• "ID": The timeline is defined in this case by the order of the single data sets in the series ("ID").
• "Sheet": In this case, the timeline is defined by the sheet number. A difference is made here
between front and back.
For example, to check the way linearization changes during a defined period, you can create the fol-
lowing series:
• Reference data: Nominal values or actual values after linearization. Ideally, these values are the
same.
• Comparison data: Actual values after linearization at a regular interval, for example, after a cou-
ple of hours.
Y axis
In the Preferences (General), you can set a fixed scaling on the Y axis to a defined maximum value
for the trend, separately for the CIE, dot gain and/or density report. As a result, you can tell your
results better and compare them visually with each other. In particular, analysis of the dot gain is
facilitated by the same display pane. The Y axis is always scaled dynamically to a file-specific maxi-
mum value if this function is not enabled. The display is matched automatically after this function is
enabled or disabled in the Preferences.
232 Version 2015

Example: Display of a dot gain report without fixed axis scaling
The display pane is matched to the data-specific maximum value if the function is disabled.
Example: Display of a dot gain report with fixed axis scaling
When the function is enabled, the display pane always appears in the same size with a defined max-
imum value, irrespective of the current range.

Zoom Functions
In an analysis report diagram, you can zoom right up to a single point by drawing a bounding box with
the mouse.
You can reset the zoom in two ways:
• by moving the mouse to the top left holding down the mouse button
• with "Auto Range" in the context-sensitive menu (generally right-click), either in horizontal or
vertical direction or symmetrically in both directions (see Context-sensitive Menu).
in curve diagrams:
graphic.
• "Ref", "Cmp": to send a reference file (Ref) and/or a comparison file (Cmp) to "Compare".
To do this, in an analysis report diagram, you must click the point that represents the reference
file you want and then click "Ref" in the context-sensitive menu (generally right-click).
After that, select another point for the comparison file and click "Cmp" in the context-sensitive
menu. The two files open in "Compare" as reference and comparison data as you defined them
and appear in the test chart diagram.
234 Version 2015

• "Disable": to hide outliers in measured data.
You can hide data outliers interactively and thus exclude them from averaging before the data
are averaged. This can be important, for example, if minispot measured data are used for cor-
rection of a process calibration.
In an analysis report diagram, you can use "Auto Range" in the context-sensitive menu (generally
right-click) for this to scale up right to the single points in the area that interests you.
A red broken reticle displays. You must click the point that represents the outlier data set and
then click "Disable" in the context-sensitive menu.
Alternatively, you can disable the check box of the outlier data set in the data table.
Data table
Example: Density report
You can view the data table if you drag the horizontal bar below the diagram upwards. This makes
the graphic area smaller or even totally hidden. All the data sets of a series and always all the colors
are shown in the data table, irrespective of what you select in the "View" list on the right. If necessary,
you can move the visible section of the data table using the scroll bars.
The data table always contains the following items:
• A check box in the first column for enabling or disabling the data set you want.

You can enable or disable all data sets at one go using the check box in the caption bar. This is
practical if you disabled single data sets and wish to enable them again or, vice versa, if you
wish to display just a few data sets. In this case, disable all the data sets at one go and then pick
out the ones you wish to use.
• "ID": Identification number that defines the order in the data set. The ID of the current process
standard is "P" and this standard is set as the reference by default. If it is disabled, the file you
open first is given the ID "Ref" and is automatically defined as the reference file ("Status: Refer-
ence"). All the files you open after that are defined as comparison data. They are given consec-
utive IDs in the order in which they were opened.
· The current process standard always displays in the first row with a green background.
It has an orange one if it is selected.
· A data set row also has an orange background if it is selected.
To edit the data table, double-click a row to open the "Change entry" dialog where you
can change or enter the location, status, date, time and comment for that data set or
also remove it from the series.
• "Date": Date the data file was saved on. You can change the item. The format is set:
Year.Month.Day
• "Time": Time the data file was saved at. You can change the item. The format is set:
Hours:Minutes:Seconds
• "File Name": Name of the original data file.
• "Comment": Text you can enter to have a better overview of the different data sets.
236 Version 2015

The other content of the table depends on the analysis report you selected.
• In a "CIE report", the solid tint CIELab color values ("L", "a" and "b") and the mean deviation in
each case ("ΔE") are shown.
• In a "Dot gain report", the dot gains ("Dot Gain") and the dot gain differences ("ΔDot Gain) are
shown.
• In a "Density report", the solid tint density values "D" and the density differences "ΔD" are
shown.
• The colors are shown by the relevant color fill in the heading of each column ("L", "a", "b", "ΔE",
"Dot Gain", "ΔDot Gain", "D" and "ΔD").
Status Bar
The status bar displays the name of the series and the name of the current process standard (if any).
• green: The data set is unchanged or changes were saved.
• yellow: The data set was changed and not yet saved.

"CIE report" View

You can open this view by clicking the "CIE Report" tab. It displays the overall result (trend) of a com-
parison of measured data.
This view first appears as a template without any data when you select the "Analysis" main function.
The analysis result appears in the CIE report when you open a series and reference and comparison
data are defined or when a hot folder starts.
"Display of the result (trend)"

This shows you information that is applicable for all analysis reports:
• Information about Long-term Analysis
• Notes on the Diagrams
• Zoom Functions
• Context-sensitive Menu
• Data table
• "Change entry" Dialog
• "Update process standard"
238 Version 2015

The result gives you an overview of the measured data during a certain period.
The solid tint CIELab color values are shown in the data table for all the colors of the measured data.
Each mean deviation ΔE is shown on the side and also in the diagram above, depending on whether
you selected "Time", "ID" or "Sheet" for "X axis".

View "Dot gain report"

You can open this view by clicking the "Dot gain report" tab.
Normally, dot gain is measured in the midtones at 40% and in the shadows at 80%. These percents
are mandatory for process standards. In Color Toolbox" the dot gain can be specified in steps of 10%
and in addition for the two checkpoints 25% and 75%.
also measure the density when measuring the colors.
measured, by general approximation from the Lab(xyz) color values.
Dot gain is the difference between the tonal values before and after processing. It can also be nega-
tive (dot loss).
240 Version 2015

An analysis of this view will give you usable results only if the dot gain curves can be calculated from
measured densities and/or spectral values.
For that reason, you should always enable the two respective options in "Preferences > Measure-
ment":
• "Measure and save density values as well (if supported by instrument)"
• "Measure and save spectral remissions as well (if supported by instrument)"

• Zoom Functions
• Data table
"View"
In "View" you can show and hide the single color channels and tolerances like in "CIE report".
You select the checkpoint you want for dot gain (in steps of 10%, also at 25% or 75%) in the list.
Normally, evaluation is at 40% and 80%. These percents are mandatory for process standards.
If there are dot gains for the selected checkpoint, the values display in the table in the "Dot Gain" col-
umn for all the colors in the measured data. The dot gain difference ("ΔDot Gain") is also listed in
each case.
The "relative" list box gives you two display options:
• "relative" disabled: The dot gains (Dot Gain) display, depending on whether you selected "Time",
"ID" or "Sheet" for "X axis".
• "relative" enabled: The dot gain differences (ΔDot Gain) display in relation to the reference (pro-
cess standard or reference data set) for "Time", "ID" or "Sheet".

View "Density report"

You can open this view by clicking the "Density report" tab.

• Zoom Functions
• Data table
242 Version 2015

If deviations are detected (e.g. drifts), these density curves can provide you with details about the
change, for example, whether you have to rerun linearization.

Production check
In order for an OK sheet to be released, a check is run to see whether the tolerances of the selected
process standard are complied with. In a production check (production variation = PV), during prin-
ting the sheets are no longer compared with this process standard but with the OK sheet. It is not
necessary for all of the sheets to be optimal in this comparison. However, in compliance with
ISO 12647-2, at least 68% of the print values must be within the defined tolerances. The tolerance
for cyan, magenta and black is ±4 for ΔE, only for yellow is a ΔE of ±5 allowed.
A production check is run separately to the conventional analysis but its operation is analogous to it
(see "Menus, Buttons and Tabs", Seite 222). By default, the first sheet is set as the reference data set.
If required, this can be changed like in the conventional analysis (see "Reference data set", Seite
220).
You can check production in three different views:
• PV Overview: Statistical overview of overall production
• PV CIE report: Displays solid tint CIELab color values for all color channels in the data series.
You can select a single view or any combination of the data.
• PV dot gain report: Displays dot gains or dot gain differences for all color channels in the data
series. You can select a single view or any combination of the data.
The "PV Overview" is the main document in the analysis and is a summary of all the results. The other
two views, "PV CIE report" and "PV dot gain report", are for in-depth analysis and debugging, espe-
cially if the result of the production check was negative. These let you identify and localize an error.
244 Version 2015

"PV Overview" View

You can open this view by clicking the "PV Overview" tab.

The overview provides you with a general summary of the results of the production check.
The OK sheet is compared to the process standard in the top part of the view. The lower part shows
the statistical analysis of production quality. This means that the production sheets are compared
with the OK sheet.
A bar showing the percent of values within the tolerances displays below the information about the
number of sheets measured (= analyzed sheets + OK sheets). The bar is green if this total value com-
plies with the specification of ISO12647-2.
The OK sheet is the reference during the production check. Because Color Toolbox does not have
information about which sheet is the OK sheet, "Sheet 1" is always used as the OK sheet by default.
If you wish to use a different sheet from the data set as the OK sheet, you must define this as the
reference. To do this, go to the "PV CIE report" or "PV dot gain report" view. Double-click the item you
want in the list to open the "Change entry" dialog where you select "Reference" as the "Status" and
confirm the dialog with "OK". In the data table, "Ref" then displays in "ID" for this sheet.

In the "PV Overview", the table shows the measured values for ΔE, density and dot gain at 40% and
80% for each color channel. The values in each case show you the mean and the highest and lowest
values. The table provides you with a more accurate analysis of which values might not be within the
tolerance (in the example shown, for example, ΔE for yellow). Below the table, the tolerance analysis
is summarized for ΔE, dot gain and dot gain spread.
The "Spread" is the maximum difference between the three chromatic process colors in the midtone.
This is the maximum spacing between the curves in the graph.
246 Version 2015

"PV CIE report" View

You can open this view by clicking the "PV CIE report" tab.
This detailed report for the color channels in the data series lets you analyze more accurately where,
i.e. on which sheet, a color value was out of the specified ΔE. "1" is the reference, in other words, the
sheet defined as the OK sheet.

• Zoom Functions
• Data table
The result gives you an overview of the quality result of the color data.

The solid tint CIELab color values are shown in the data table for all the colors of the measured data.
Each mean deviation ΔE is shown on the side and also in the diagram above, depending on whether
you selected "Time", "ID" or "Sheet" for "X axis".
"View"
The check boxes below "View" let you control which color curves (right) and tolerances (left) will dis-
play. In our example, all four primary colors and the tolerances for cyan (ΔE=4, bluish background)
and yellow (ΔE=5, yellowish background) display.
The value for yellow on sheet 14 is slightly out of the tolerance in this case. This is equivalent to 95%
within the tolerance in the "ΔE" column for yellow in the table of the PV overview:
248 Version 2015

"PV dot gain report" View

You can open this view by clicking the "PV dot gain report" tab.

• Zoom Functions
• Data table
The result gives you an overview of the quality result of the dot gains and/or dot gain differences.
"View"
In "View" you can show and hide the single color channels and tolerances like in "PV CIE report".

You select the checkpoint you want for dot gain (in steps of 10%, also at 25% or 75%) in the list.
Normally, evaluation is at 40% and 80%. These percents are mandatory for process standards.
If there are dot gains for the selected checkpoint, the values display in the table in the "Dot Gain"
column for all the colors in the measured data. The dot gain difference ("ΔDot Gain") is also listed in
each case.
The "relative" check box is enabled for the graphic. The dot gain differences (ΔDot Gain) display in
relation to the reference (OK sheet) for "Time", "ID" or "Sheet".
In our example, the dot gain at 40% for cyan on sheets 2 and 16 thru 18 is out of the tolerance. This
is equivalent to 80% within the tolerance in the "Dot Gain 40%" column for cyan in the table of the
PV overview:
250 Version 2015

Quality Report
For your records and for archiving purposes, you can print the analysis reports and production check
to a PDF file or to paper (see "General Information about Printing Your Data", Seite 57). The two
screenshots below show the two-page print preview for the example just described (select "Produc-
tion Check as per ISO12647-2" in the Print dialog).

252 Version 2015

Working with "Create"
i
i
Note: The "Create" main function is available only if you enabled Profile Tool 13.0 with a
license key.
"Create" describes all the steps you must take to create an ICC output profile.
• You can set the parameters for profile calculation, see "Profile Generation Setup" Dialog:
· Printing process parameters (process, paper grade/media, process colors/profile type)
· Color composition/black generation (UCR and GCR setting)
· Options for profile calculation (gamut mapping, paper white correction and color data
correction)
· Loading and saving profile settings
• You can define the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade, process
color, screening and plate). See "Process parameters" Dialog.
• You can calculate the ICC output profile and enter save options for the profile (profile descrip-
tion). See "Profile calculation" Dialog
• You can save the ICC profile with or without the measured data, save the measured data to an
ASCII text file in ISO 12642 (IT8.7) format.
• You can view different color spaces and diagrams, see Views and Diagrams
· Test charts with color patches and information about the current patch
· xy, ab or La/Lb diagram
· Dot gain/printing characteristic
· Gray balance or density curves
• You can view source and target color values for the output profile. See "Color calculator", Seite
2.
• You can calculate a device link profile from two ICC profiles, see "Device link profile", Seite 7.
• You can calculate gray balance data for process calibration or to edit reference data for gray bal-
ance correction of a process calibration. See "Gray Balance Calibration", Seite 15.
where you can select data, define settings or do calculations.
You can create a new ICC press profile either from the color data or from an ICC profile that has color
data.

Creating an ICC output profile based on the data

of a test chart
The procedure for creating an ICC output profile using the color data of a test chart will now be
described.
i
i
Note: You can calculate an ICC output profile only if you have a test chart with at least 100
color patches. Other requirements must be met depending on the process, for example,
there must be solid tints (CMY and RGB colors), contones and a certain number of combi-
nations. The open data file is checked automatically and, in some cases, rejected with an
error message. The smallest test chart in the shipment that you can use to calculate a pro-
file is the "PrintOpen Basic 135" with 135 color patches.
1. In the "Create" main function, click "Open" in the button bar or select "File > Open" to open the
test chart that has the data you will use to calculate the profile.
You can also open an ICC profile containing color data.
The color data are displayed as a test chart:
To calculate the profile, you must set parameters for the printing process, color composition and
black generation and any other options you need. You can use preferences or define your own set-
tings for it. You can save your settings in a parameter set and load them again.
254 Version 2015

You can define the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade, process color,
screening and plate) and save them in the profile as well. They are displayed in the profile browser
and facilitate profile selection.
Profile Parameter Setup

2. Open the "Profile Generation Setup" dialog by clicking "Profile parameters" in the button bar or
with the "Profile > Profile parameters" menu.
Further information: "Profile Generation Setup" Dialog.
3. Select the cases that need an optimized ICC output profile in the list boxes. Defaults for profile
calculation are displayed, depending on what you define in the boxes.
You can then use these default settings or you can click the appropriate "Modify ..." button and make
changes to the various parameters in the dialog that then displays.

4. If necessary, change the color composition and black generation with the UCR and/or GCR set-
tings.
5. If you wish to confine the total dot area, enter the appropriate values:
• You can set a value between 210% and a maximum of 400% for the total dot area.
• You can set maximum black to values between 60% and 100%.
6. Click the "Modify" button if you wish to change the settings for black generation. The "GCR set-
ting/Black generation" dialog appears.
Further information: "GCR setting/Black generation" Dialog.
7. In this dialog box, select the type of black you wish to use for printing (separations) and proof-
ing:
• "GCR black generation "or
• "Black generation with length and width"
8. Set a "GCR value" with the top slider or set the starting point for black with the "Black length"
slider (from "Skeleton" to "Full range") and the effective range of black with the "Black width"
slider (from "Only in gray" to "Full extent").
9. Confirm your settings by clicking "OK".
The dialog closes.
You can also return to the default setting by clicking "Default".
256 Version 2015

i
i
Note: If needed, you can define other special settings for profile calculation:
· Gamut mapping
· Paper white correction
· Smoothing of measured data
More details about this can be found in the "Profile calculation options".
10. Click "Store" to save your profile settings.

The "Store parameter set" dialog appears.
11. Enter a name in the box and then click "OK".
Your profile settings are saved to a parameter set of this name and can be displayed again with
"Load".
12. Now confirm all your parameter settings for profile calculation by clicking "OK".
The dialog closes.
i
i
Note: All your parameter settings are also saved in the ICC profile and are displayed again
when the profile opens.
Process parameters
You can save printing process parameters in an ICC profile. When you select the profile, these param-
eters are also displayed in addition to the profile name and description, giving you more details about
the profile.
13. Open the "Process parameters" dialog by clicking "Process parameters" in the button bar or with
the "Profile > Process parameters" menu.

Further information: "Process parameters" Dialog.
14. You can define all the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade, pro-
cess color, screening and plate) in this dialog.
i
i
Note: You can save these parameters to a parameter set (with the "Store" button) if you
need them frequently. You can display the parameter set again by clicking "Load" and
selecting and opening it.
15. Confirm your settings by clicking "OK".

The dialog closes.
258 Version 2015

Profile Calculation
Before you start profile calculation, select the profile size and type a profile description. This descrip-
tion is automatically used as the file name. The profile description and the file name should be iden-
tical because some applications recognize only this profile description as the file name.
16. Open the "Profile calculation" dialog by clicking "Calculate" in the button bar or with the "Profile
> Calculate" menu.
Further information: "Profile calculation" Dialog.
17. Select the size of the profile from the list box.
18. Enable "Calculate V4 profile" if you are going to calculate a profile based on the more recent
V4.2 ICC specification.
However, V4 profiles are not very common and not especially recommended because in most
cases users do not consider them to be better.
19. Click "Start".

Calculation takes place now. You can follow the progress of calculation in the status display line.
20. Check the automatic profile description and, if necessary, change it. This is possible during cal-
culation.
Now you only have to save the ICC profile.
21. Click "Save".
(22).Alternatively, you can close the dialog with "OK" and then click "Save" in the button bar.
The "Save file" dialog appears.

It has the following defaults:
• the location for profiles ("profiles" folder) as its destination folder
• the profile description as the file name
• "ICC profile with measured data" as the file type
23. If necessary, change the suggested file name and/or destination.

24. Select the type of file you want to save:
• "ICC Profile (.icc)": contains the calculated profile data as well as the color data in IT8.7 format
and the parameter settings for profile generation. This type of file can be opened again by Color
Toolbox.
• "ICC profile without measured data (.icc)": only contains the calculated profile data and cannot
be opened by Color Toolbox again.
• "Measured data (.txt)": contains the color data in IT8.7 format and the parameter settings for
profile generation. This type of file can be opened again by Color Toolbox.
25. Then click "Save" in the "Save file" dialog.

The ICC output profile is saved as specified and the dialog closes.
26. Close the dialog with "OK".
You now have created an ICC output profile.
You can now change some fine details in the transformation tables in this profile. These changes will
be written to either the print or proof tables. This step is done in the "Edit" main function. You can
make the following profile changes in this section:
• Edit the profile information, see ""Profile info." View", Seite 317
• Edit the printing characteristic/dot gain, see ""Dot gain" View", Seite 325
• Edit the gray balance, see ""Gray balance" View", Seite 329
• Edit the global gradation, see ""Global gradation" View", Seite 332
• Edit the lightness gradation, see ""Lightness" View", Seite 335
• Correction of the proof profile, see ""Proof correction" View", Seite 337
• Edit the process parameters, see ""Process param." Dialog", Seite 343
260 Version 2015


All relevant menu commands of the "Create" main function are listed in the table below. Some of the
commands can also be triggered by buttons in the button bar or by tabs.
File > Open Opens a dialog where you can load a color data file or
an ICC output profile containing color data.
File > Close document Closes the open (current) document.

File > Save Opens a dialog where you can save the current color
data file or a calculated ICC profile.
parameters), define settings for color measurement and
other defaults for the other main functions.
Profile parameters Opens the "Profile Generation Setup" dialog where you
can set all the parameters required for generating a pro-
file of the print and proof table (print/proof process,
color composition/black generation, options for profile
calculation).
Process parameters Opens the "Process parameters" dialog where you can
define the printing process parameters (data about out-
put device, paper grade, process color, screening and
plate).
Calculate Opens the "Profile calculation" dialog where you can
calculate a new ICC output profile and enter a profile
description.
Test chart Shows the color data file with patches.
You can switch pages in multiple page test charts (e.g.
"Page 1" thru "Page 4" for the "PrintOpen Extended
840" test chart).
xy diagram Shows the color data file where the measured color
data are displayed in an xy diagram (horseshoe-shaped
diagram, known as the chromaticity diagram).

ab diagram Shows the color data file where the measured color
data are displayed in an a*b* diagram (CIE L*a*b* or
CIELAB color space).
La/Lb diagram Shows the color data file where the measured color
data are displayed in an L*a*/L*b* diagram (CIE L*a*b*
or CIELAB color space).
Dot gain Opens a diagram showing either the dot gain curve or
printing characteristic. You can select viewing options
Gray balance Opens a diagram showing either the gray balance or
density curve. This can only be displayed after profile
calculation. You can switch between the views using the
check boxes to the right of the diagram.
grated CMM).
Tools > Device link profile Opens the "Device link profile" dialog where you can
calculate a device link profile from two ICC profiles.
Tools > Profile smoothing Opens the "Correct profile by smoothing" dialog where
you can convert an ICC profile using a low-pass filter.
Tools > Gray balance calibration Opens the "Gray balance calibration" dialog where you
can calculate gray balance data for process calibration
or edit reference data for gray balance correction of a
process calibration.
262 Version 2015

Dialogs
"Profile Generation Setup" Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Profile parameters" or with the "Profile > Profile parameters"
menu.
In this dialog, you can set all the parameters required for generating a profile (for print and proof):
• Process parameters (process/technology, paper grade/media, process colors/profile type)
• Color composition/black generation (UCR and GCR setting)
• Special options for profile calculation (gamut mapping, paper white correction and smoothing of
measured data)
Click "OK" to confirm your parameter setup and close the dialog.

"Print process parameters"
"Process/Technology"
This is where you can select the application or printing process for which you will generate an ICC
output profile. The settings are also influenced by the paper grade you select.
When you select your field of application, the parameters for "Color composition/Black generation"
(GCR/black) and for "Profile calculation options" (gamut mapping, proof setting and correction of
measured data) are automatically set with default values which generally produce good results.
This can be seen by the attribute "Default" which appears in the relevant boxes. You can, however,
change these default values and use either your own settings, other defaults from the printing shop
or values determined by a series of tests. This changed setup is marked by " Custom".
• "ISO Offset Printing": typical defaults for offset printing with the new ISO12647-2_2006 (ECI) set-
tings.
• Offset Printing": typical defaults for offset printing based on the Euro standard or SWOP for
coated paper are used.
• "Newspaper Printing": typical defaults for newspaper printing with black generated with UCR
(not GCR!) and the total dot area limited (for normal newspapers).
• "Gravure Printing": typical defaults for gravure.
• "ScreenPrinting": typical defaults for screen printing.
• "ScreenPrinting": typical defaults for flexographic printing.
• "Color Ink Jet Printing": typical defaults for printing to ink jet printers, especially for proofing but
also for offices for higher resolutions on coated paper.
• "Color Laser Printing": typical defaults for printing to color laser printers for offices on normal
white laser printer/copier paper. These printers frequently use their own procedure for the gen-
eration of black (GCR) which is taken into consideration during the profile calculation.
• "Multicolor Offset Printing": defaults for printing with more than four process colors with a spe-
cial 50% GCR setting (Multicolor).
• "default": this setting generally produces satisfactory results if the printing process on which the
data are based is not known or no particular specifications are made.
Our quality tests have shown the following parameters to be optimal: total dot area 280%, K =
98%, GCR = 70%.
264 Version 2015

"Paper class/Media"
In this box, you can select the printing material for which you want an optimized ICC output profile:
• "gloss coated", "matt coated", "gloss coated, web": Names for the three classic coated paper
grades.
Printing material with a very smooth surface, special ink absorption and high opacity, very suited
for the reproduction of black-and-white and color photos. This paper is also known as art paper
that can go from matt to gloss. Coated papers are used for labeling and packaging printing or for
high-quality productions such as catalogs and coffee table books. The paper weight ranges
between 80 and 100 g/m² for machine-coated papers and between 90 and 135 g/m² for coated
art papers.
• "uncoated, white", "uncoated, yellowish": Names for the two classic uncoated paper grades.
The printing of uncoated paper depends greatly on the quality of its surface finish. Uncoated
papers can have a calendered (machine-glazed paper) or super-calendered finishing.
Uncoated paper is used especially for offset book-printing and rotary printing. Uncoated, wood-
free papers are known as fine papers.
• "Proof glossy", "Proof matt", "Proof semi-matt": Special papers for proofing with high-quality
color ink jet printers (e.g. Iris proofer) or with thermosublimation printers.
• "Foil": Printing material (e.g. PVC or polycarbonate) for flexographic, screen and offset printing.
The printing of (plastic) foils depends on the quality of its surface finish and on its translucency.
i
i
Note: Classification compliant with the following process standards:
· ISO 12647-2 offset printing
· ISO 12647-3 newspaper printing
· ISO 12647-4 gravure printing

"Process colors / Profile type"

The profile type shown here ("CMYK", "CMY" or "Gray") depends on the test chart you selected.
• "3 color CMY": With a four-color test chart (CMYK), you can also calculate a profile for CMY
without black if you check this box. Black generation is then disabled for the profile setup.
This function is required for printing processes where black is hard to control or if a large
amount of black has to be used because of other elements on the page (for example, fonts). In
such a case, there would be too much black in the black separation and the colors would appear
dirty.
• A three-color composition using only CMY may be the best choice for certain laser color printers
if black is calculated by internal processes in the printer and cannot be deactivated for profile
calculation.
• "Gray": A single-color gray profile just using black will be calculated if you check this box.
"Color composition / Black generation"
Black generated for the print and proof table is determined by the UCR setting for total dot area and
maximum black. Black is also influenced by the parameters "Black length" and "Black width". An
alternative method is to generate black by setting a GCR value (Gray Component Replacement).
Explanations of the terms "GCR" and "UCR" can be found in "Definitions and Fundamental of Color",
Seite 177.
266 Version 2015

"UCR setting"
The UCR calculated for black in the print and proof table depends on the setting for total dot area and
maximum black.
The "Total dot area" and the "Maximum black" affect each other. A restriction in maximum black
affects the available density range in printing much more than a restriction of the total dot area. For
that reason, you should first try to reduce the total dot area and leave the maximum black as high as
possible. In offset printing, black is usually the first color to be printed. It is often a good idea to
restrict maximum black to between 95% and 97% so that black does not fully cover the paper sur-
face at once and that splitting of the next ink is diminished.
Depending on the printing medium and printing process you use, it may be necessary to restrict the
total dot area for all colors.
• "Total dot area": The maximum dot area that can be set is obtained from the total of cyan,
magenta and yellow dot areas in the darkest neutral dot (three-color composition without black)
and the maximum dot area permitted for black.
You can set the total dot area to values between 210% and 400%.
If no specific values are required by the printer, you should enter the following values:
· a value between 300% and 370% for offset printing and proofing
· 300% for color printers (ink jet or laser) and copiers
· 400% for ink jet proofers on coated paper to have the maximum gamut.
If you want to set a higher value, you must first increase the maximum dot area for black.
A small loss of contrast always occurs in the image: the lower the selected total dot area, the
higher the loss of contrast. A satisfactory contrast can be achieved by defining a high value if this
is possible with the printing medium you use.
• "Maximum black": Use the setting for maximum black to define the maximum screen percent
possible in the black separation of the print and proof table.
You can set the maximum dot area for black to a value ranging between 60% and 100% (or to
the press limit of the test chart).
"GCR setting"
Click "Modify" if you wish to generate black either with GCR or with black length and width. The "GCR
setting/Black generation" Dialog then appears.
"Profile calculation options"

You can use these special profile calculation options to define more settings for your print and/or
proof table.
"Gamut mapping"
This function allows you to define special options for color composition in the color conversion table
for printing (print table/separations).
Gamut mapping lets you set how the original images will be matched visually to the color gamut
available in printing.
By default, an optimized gamut mapping for your printing process is calculated.
Click "Modify" to open the "Gamut mapping" Dialog.
i
i
Note: Corrections relating to a specific image should not be made using the profile settings
but with the appropriate functions of an image editing program.
"Paper white correction"

You can set further options with this function that are important for certain proofs. You can correct
the effect of fluorescent whitening either by automatic paper white correction or by a spectral con-
version of the color data. Paper white can also be corrected by matching the lightness of the L value
to proofing.
If you wish to change these settings, click "Modify" to open the "Correction of color data" Dialog.
"Smoothing of measured values"
This function allows you to trigger an automatic correction of the measured data (plausibility check)
or an intelligent smoothing of the color data. The changed color data are used for profile calculation.
The original color data are retained, however.
i
i
Note: If you use this correction function in the "Measure" main function, the changed color
data will be saved and your original values will be overwritten. For that reason, we recom-
mend that you save the changed data as a new file.
If you wish to change these settings, click "Modify" to open the "Smoothing of color data" Dialog.
268 Version 2015

"Profile parameters"
Preferences for color composition and black generation are set after you define the field of application
("Process/Technology", "Paper class/Media" and "Process colors/Profile type"). You can save param-
eters for the entire dialog in a parameter set and display it again using the name you assigned it.
Click "Store" to display the "Store parameter set" Dialog where you can save your current parameters
for profile calculation to a parameter file you name. These settings are then available for other profile
calculations, making it unnecessary to retype the parameters. You can, of course, make changes to
them at any time.
set with saved settings for profile calculation.
If an ICC profile is loaded, open the "Profile parameters" Dialog by clicking "Show". This shows all the
parameter settings.

"Profile parameters" Dialog

You can open this dialog by clicking "Show" (profile parameters) in the "Profile Generation Setup"
dialog. This is possible only if the ICC profile is already open.
This dialog shows the parameters set for the ICC profile last open. You can use these settings to cal-
culate another profile. To do this, load the color data file that will be used to calculate the profile.
Click "Apply" to automatically copy all the profile parameters to the relevant boxes.
You close the window by clicking "Close". The parameters are shown until you load another profile.
Then the data are replaced by the parameters of this profile.
270 Version 2015

"GCR setting/Black generation" Dialog

You can open this dialog by clicking "Modify" (GCR setting) in the "Profile Generation Setup" dialog.
This dialog lets you set the way black will be generated:
• either variable achromatic with conventional GCR
• or with "Black length" (starting point) and "Black width".

"GCR black generation"
"GCR value"
The "GCR value" (in percent) (Gray Component Replacement) represents the amount of chromatic ink
(C, M, Y) that is replaced by black (see also "GCR", Seite 182).
You can set a value for GCR between 10% (minimum GCR) and 100% (maximum GCR) using the GCR
slider.
i
i
Note: You define a starting point for GCR with the "Starting point K[%]" slider (see below).

• "Min. GCR": The minimum setting "10%" corresponds to normal chromatic reproduction with
skeleton black.
• "Max. GCR": The maximum setting "100%" corresponds to greatest possible achromatic repro-
duction. In this case, no position in the image (except in the darker image areas) has more than
two chromatic inks plus black or only black in the neutral gray image areas.
• In practice, a setting between 50% and 70% is usual.

With a GCR of 100%, the black screen can become very noticeable in gray in amplitude-modu-
lated screening (there is no longer a screen rosette there).
"Starting point K[%]"

This option lets you define a cyan value between 0% and 40% for the ratio of black to cyan in grays
as of which the chromatic inks are replaced by black. The slider is set to "0%" by default. This means
that CMY are replaced immediately by black.
You can keep the highlight area clear of black by moving the sliding point. This affects light skin tones
especially because you can avoid or at least diminish the dirtying effect caused by black at such
points.
Example: Gray balance as seen in ICC profiles with 80% GCR and three different starting points
(0%, 20%, and 35%)
• Left starting point "0%": Black is applied immediately depending on the GCR setting.
• Center starting point "20%"
• Right starting point "35%": This shows that non-monotonic gray balance curves can occur with
a high GCR value (greater than 70%) and a high starting point (greater than 30%).
i
i
Note: A starting point between 10% and 15% has proved to be successful especially if fash-
ion shots with many light skin tones have to be reproduced with GCR. In this case, GCR
starts only when cyan reaches 10% to 15%, thus avoiding light skin tones from being gen-
erated with black.
272 Version 2015

"Black generation with length and width"
In normal color composition, black begins in the midtones (starting point or black length) and
increases slowly towards shadow. The effective range of black in chroma varies (black width).
"Black length"
You define the starting point for black (relative to cyan in the gray area) with the "Black length" slider:
from a very short black (skeleton black) to a long black (full range).
• Short black: A black known as skeleton black is produced if the slider is in position "2".
Depending on your process, the first two levels can produce very similar results since a sudden
use of black has to be avoided. If a hue can be created using three colors, no black is used. Black
will only be added for very dark shades of black. The portion of black will increase considerably
with the density.
i
i
Note: The minimum setting is "2" because values less than that are of no use for reproduc-
tion.
If skeleton black is used for images, the amount of black ink can be adjusted for the text without
adversely affecting the images during the printing process. This reduces the effect of any moiré
that may appear. However, the dot area is greater and the gray balance (see also "Gray Balance",
Seite 183) is susceptible to fluctuations in the printing process.
• Standard black: A standard black is produced in slider positions "5" to "7".

The use of black begins in the midtones and slowly increases towards shadow. This is the most
widely used type in color composition.
• Full range: A long black is produced in slider positions "8" to "10".

The use of black already begins in the quarter tones and slowly increases towards shadow.
Currently the trend is to a long black (slider position "9").
Examples:
• For a short black set the slider to position "3", this corresponds to a 70% starting point for black
relative to cyan.
• For a long black set the slider to position "7", this corresponds to a 30% starting point for black
relative to cyan.

"Black width"
You define the effective range of black with the "Black width" slider: from a narrow black ("Only in
gray") to a wide black ("Full extent").
The effective range also depends on the setting for black length.
• Narrow black: Black only affects a narrow range around the gray axis if the slider is in position
"0" (minimum setting). Only in very dark colors does it go further outwards.
• Standard black: Standard black is produced in slider position "5". Its effect is moderate, going
up into the chroma range.
This is the most frequently used black in color composition.
• Wide black: Black goes way into the chroma range if the slider is in position "10" (maximum
setting).
i
i
Note: Currently the trend (ISO / Fogra) is to a wide black (slider position "10"). Note that
the color gamut in the dark chromatic colors will also have constraints if you confine black
width. A black width of "5" is sufficient for a vivid dark blue to lose much of its brilliance.
An optimal black is calculated by Color Toolbox on the basis of the settings for "Black length" and
"Black width" and the information taken from the color data.
274 Version 2015

"Gamut mapping" Dialog

You can open this dialog by clicking "Modify" (gamut mapping) in the "Profile Generation Setup" dia-
log.
You can set a user-specific gamut mapping here or switch back to the default setting (optimized
gamut mapping).
You can change color saturation in this dialog. These changes affect the entire image, for example, if
there is not enough chroma in the image. You can also set a a gray axis correction for color paper in
this dialog.

Optimized gamut mapping

• Colors located outside the printable color space are remapped harmoniously into the space
occupied by the printable colors. Moreover, maximum utilization of all printable colors is
desired. The hue remains unchanged, the chroma, if required, is reduced moderately and the
lightness adjusted.
• Dark, chromatic colors normally become lighter; light, chromatic colors become darker. The
details of the image are retained as much as possible. Colors which actually can be mapped
with the printing process are shifted slightly within the color space to obtain space for the even
purer colors which are to be mapped.
• Absolute white (density = 0.0) is reproduced as paper white; absolute black (density > 3.5) is
reproduced using the maximum dot area permitted for the process colors.
Use the global setting to influence the reproduction of saturation (chroma) right across the entire
color gamut. For example, you can change the default settings for the profile if the chroma of images
that were edited is too high or not enough, even if the camera or scanner profile was correct.
For certain cases, you can modify the restrictions which are part of optimized gamut mapping by
changing the gamut mapping settings in different areas.
"Setting for light saturated colors"
You can influence gamut mapping in light colors using the "Preserve lightness/Preserve contrast"
slider. You can set the lightness/contrast ratio by moving the slider. In particular, you can thus influ-
ence the reproduction of the saturated and light non-printable colors.
• "Preserve lightness": If you shift the slider to the left, i.e., set a value between "0" (central posi-
tion) and "-5", lightness is maintained and weighted accordingly. If you want to prevent the sat-
urated colors from becoming darker (affecting the chroma negatively), shift the slider to position
"-5" (only lightness). This may result in a loss of detail in the image.
• "Preserve contrast": If you shift the slider to the right, i.e., set a value between "0" (central posi-
tion) and "+5", contrast is maintained and weighted accordingly. This may cause light, chro-
matic colors to appear too "heavy". If you have an optimally reproduced detail contrast, it may
be accompanied by a loss of chroma in the colors which then appear darker in position "+5"
(only contrast).
• The default setting is slider position "0". This setting reflects conventional results in reproduc-
tion work.
276 Version 2015

"Setting for dark saturated colors"
The second slider ("darker/lighter") is used to influence gamut mapping in saturated dark colors.
• "darker": If you shift the slider to the left, i.e., set a value between "0" (central position) and "-
5", the chromatic colors become darker. As a result, the darker and more chromatic a color, the
higher the percentage of black. However, this makes strict checking of the printing process more
important.
• "lighter": If you shift the slider to the right, i.e., set a value between "0" (central position) and
"+5", the saturated colors become lighter. Particularly dark, chromatic colors appear lighter and
more brilliant. At the same time, there is a noticeable loss of detail.
This setting is suitable for the reproduction of slogan-like or placard-type material in which a
high degree of definition is not important (e.g. newspaper printing) and also for printing pro-
cesses with low UCR values (e.g. with dot areas of 270%).
tion work.
"More contrast in dark colors": Check this box if you wish to increase shadow details (lightness
correction). By default, this function is disabled.

"Global setting of color saturation"
The "gray/colored" slider affects the entire image in a similar way to chroma gradation, but for each
color in relation to the chroma available in each case.
• "gray": If you shift the slider to the left towards "gray", in other words, a setting between "0"
(central position) and "-4", all colors are desaturated. Colors are fully desaturated if the slider is
in position "-5". This corresponds to a four-color black-and-white reproduction ("quadruplex")
as is found in newspaper printing.
• "colored": If you shift the slider to the right towards "colored", in other words, a setting between
"0" (central position) and "+5", there is a post-saturation of all colors, an effect which is usually
desired in newspaper printing. On the other hand, this also means that the color at the outer
sections of the process color space might be pushed together so strongly that it may not be pos-
sible to differentiate the chroma in them at all.
tion work.
"Global setting darker / lighter"
The "gray/colored" slider affects the entire image in a similar way to chroma gradation, but for each
color in relation to the chroma available in each case.
• "darker": If you shift the slider to the left towards "darker", in other words, a setting between "0"
(central position) and "-5", the image becomes darker on the whole (as if underexposed).
• "lighter": If you shift the slider to the right towards "lighter", in other words, a setting between
"0" (central position) and "+5", the image becomes lighter on the whole (as if overexposed).
tion work.
"Keep gray axis"
278 Version 2015

Normally, in Color Toolbox the separations in color papers are calculated relative to paper white
("Perceptual" rendering intent). In other words, the gray axis is also calculated relative to paper white.
For that reason, in yellowish papers, the gray axis is also yellowish when reproduced. The eye, how-
ever, perceives this gray axis relative to the (yellowish) paper as neutral. In some cases, however, you
do want that the gray axis remains neutral (absolute) when reproduced on yellowish papers as well.
This option allows you make the gray axis neutral (from the dark midtones to the light midtones) going
towards highlight as far as the hue of the paper). You can set how neutral the gray axis will be with
this slider. You enable the slider by first checking the box.

"Correction of color data" Dialog

You can open this dialog by clicking "Modify" (paper white correction) in the "Profile Generation
Setup" dialog.
i
i
Note: In the "Measure" main function, you open this dialog (only the top part) with "Test
chart > Correction - Fluorescent whitening".
"Check and correct color data"

In this dialog, you can correct paper white that is important for certain proofs. You can correct the
effect of fluorescent whitening either by automatic paper white correction or by a spectral conversion
of the color data. Paper white can also be corrected by matching the lightness of the L value to proof-
ing.
"Correction of fluorescent whitening effect"
This function is relevant when papers with fluorescent whitening agents are used (for example, paper
for color copiers and ink jets). It affects the proof part of the profile.
Optical whiteners have a fluorescent effect so that the paper is perceived as particularly white
although technically speaking it has a bluish color cast. If you make a proof based exactly on the val-
ues measured, the result will appear too yellow.
Correction can be in two ways:
• using an automatic paper white correction
• or a spectral conversion of the color data.
280 Version 2015

"Change paper white automatically"

This function can automatically reduce the effect of fluorescent whitening agents when the proof part
is calculated in the profile. By default, this function is disabled. When this function is activated, eval-
uation of the proof with a measuring device may produce different results.
"Spectral conversion of color data"
Spectral color data must be available for this type of correction. In this procedure, all the measured
values are corrected before profile calculation. As a result, this correction affects the entire ICC pro-
file (all transformation tables).
Fluorescent whitening causes ultraviolet light that cannot be seen by the human eye to be absorbed
and visible blue fluorescent light to be emitted in its place. As a result of this conversion, an observer
considers the paper to be whiter. But this impression of white is subjective: In Europe, for example,
paper is "absolutely white" if the reflected light has somewhat more bluish portions.
You can set the correction intensity (amount of blue) with the slider:
• The default setting (slider position "5") is the equivalent of the spectral effect of a UV filter.
• As you move the slider towards "max" (slider position "10"), the bluish color cast is gradually
removed by the correction so that the result seems to be yellowish.
• As you move the slider towards "none" (slider position "0"), the correction of blue diminishes.
There is no correction of the fluorescent whitening effect when the slider is at "none" ("0").
"Lightness adaption for proof"

This function adapts lightness for proofs when papers which are darker than the paper of the simu-
lated printing process are used. If a reproduction is based exactly on the values measured, this might
impair the light definition and paper white cannot be simulated correctly.
The range of lightness of the proof is increased somewhat so that the lightness required in the printing
process you want to simulate can fit into the larger range of the proof process. In this way, light defi-
nition is retained and media white can be reproduced correctly, but the proof is somewhat darker on
the whole. In proofs, slight errors in the reproduction of lightness are generally less disturbing than
errors in hue in paper white simulation.
i
i
Note: This function should not be enabled if you want a correction of a proof profile (see
""Proof correction" View", Seite 337).
"L value"
The L* value refers to the lightness of color in the CIELAB color space. In this function, the L* value
of paper white in the proof process is shown. To correct lightness, the L* value of paper white of the
(lighter) printing process you want to simulate is entered. On the basis of these data, Color Toolbox
automatically calculates the lightness correction required for the proof process.
This setting has no effect if a value lower than the L* value of the proof white is entered.

"Smoothing of color data" Dialog

You can open this dialog by clicking "Modify" (smoothing of measured values) in the "Profile Gener-
ation Setup" dialog.
i
i
Note: You can call up this dialog with the "Test chart > Correct - Smoothing" menu in the
"Measure" main function.
"Check and smooth color data"

In this dialog, you can enable/disable an option for smoothing the measured data as you need it. The
correction or smoothing of the measured data comprises two subfunctions:
• plausibility check of the data and
• intelligent, global smoothing.
These two functions can be used separately or as a combination and be applied to the color data of
both CMYK and RGB printing processes.
i
i
Note: You can also use these functions in the "Measure" main function (see "Smoothing of
color data" Dialog).
The difference is that, in "Measure", the color data are changed irrevocably by the correction
whereas, in this case, the correction is only applied to profile calculation and the original color data
are retained.
When calculating profiles from smoothened color data, remember that an appropriate setting for the
profile causes the smoothened data to be smoothened once again.
Enable the correction/smoothing function you want.
282 Version 2015

Click "OK" to confirm your changes and close the dialog. The measured data are converted.
"Automatic plausibility check of color data"
This function lets you adjust implausible values which were detected during the analysis. Such values
can result from errors during the measuring process but also from dirt or scratches on the test chart.
Such local distortions of the color data are corrected automatically.
In RGB ink jet printers, color transformations which cannot be deactivated take place in the driver
software. These are very noticeable in certain tonal value ranges and can result in a loss of quality,
something which would be eliminated by measurement correction.
Even with high-precision printing processes, such as proofers, there can be slight, but intentional dis-
tortions in vignettes which would be eliminated by a correction of the measured data. This can cause
a loss of quality. For that reason, the automatic measurement correction should be deactivated in
such cases.
By default, automatic correction of the measured data is enabled for all CMY(K) printing processes
and disabled for proofer (for example, ink jet printers) and RGB printing processes.
"Intelligent smoothing of color data"
You can use this function to eliminate distortions that have a global effect. In this process, empirical
models for typical printing processes are used with all the measuring points to eliminate large-scale
distortions. This result of the calculation is that the current measured data are smoothened without
changing the accuracy greatly.
This method also works with unusual process colors and with printing materials with color cast.

Example of correction or smoothing of measured data

An example is used to explain the effect of smoothing on the measured data.
There are two ways to correct or smooth measured data:

• in the "Measure" main function after the colors are measured (open with "Test Chart > Correct
- Smoothing"). When you save the file, this correction overwrites the original measured data, in
other words, your data file is modified. To keep the original data, we recommend that you use a
different file name when you save the changed data.
• in the "Create" main function (open with "Modify" in "Profile calculation options > Smoothing of
measured values" in the "Profile Generation Setup" dialog. This correction affects the measured
data that are to be used for profile calculation. The original color data are retained.
Diagram 1: Critical color data
Diagram 1 shows critical measured data in an ECI test chart of a badly set printing process. Not only
are there problems with the actual printing process such as bad ink zone control but also the plate-
setter was probably badly linearized.
284 Version 2015

The plausibility check corrects the first type of error. Such errors are characterized by the fact that
the patches measured in the test chart don't match the other adjacent patches in the color space.
The reason for this can be measuring errors, scratches or local effect of a bad ink zone control.
The "wavy lines" in diagram 1 indicate that the last-named reason was quite predominant. The plau-
sibility check adjusts the measuring points of such patches in such a way that they match their sur-
roundings in the color space better.
Diagram 2: Effect of the plausibility check
The effect of the plausibility check on the data is shown in diagram 2. You can see that any local
occurrences of wavy lines are gone but that the strange tonal gradation is still there (seen by the
clearly different spacing of measuring points in the web). There is the occasional process that is actu-
ally characterized by such a pattern and where any corrections to this pattern would result in an
unwanted distortion (particularly with proofers).
Global smoothing acts against this second type of distortion. In this process, empirical models for typ-
ical printing processes are used with all the measuring points to eliminate large-scale distortions,
without however defining fixed reference values for solid tints or similar in this process.
For that reason, this method also works with unusual process colors and with substrates with color
cast.

Diagram 3: Result of this correction
The result is shown in diagram 3. You can see that, in this case as well, the tonal gradation has been
made harmonic. You can vary the intensity of this correction with the slider between "0" and "10".
Global smoothing is only suitable for measured data that are part of a relatively unadulterated phys-
ical printing process. You should not use it or, if so, just a weakened version of it if you cannot influ-
ence conversion of the color data, for example, by a printer driver or additional color management
that cannot be disabled when you are printing the test chart.
286 Version 2015

"Process parameters" Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Process parameters" or with the "Profile > Process parame-
ters" menu. The button and menu are only enabled if "Setup of the process parameters and save in
measurement data and ICC profile" is checked (default) in the ""Preferences" Dialog", Seite 44 ("Gen-
eral" tab).
You can define the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade, process color,
screening and plate) in this dialog. The process parameters are saved in the color data file or the ICC
profile.
them at any time.

Click "OK" to confirm your process parameter setup and close the dialog. The process parameters are
also saved in the color data file or the ICC profile.
"Process parameter settings"
The process parameters are also saved in the data file or the profile. However, they do not change
the color conversions in the profile or influence processing by certain CMMs.
profile browser during profile selection (you can configure the display as required) and help you
select and sort different ICC profiles.
i
i
eral" dialog. This function is enabled by default. You cannot call up the "Process parame-
ters" dialog in the "Measure" and "Create" main functions if the function is disabled. The
button and menu are then disabled (dimmed). It's also not possible to edit the process
parameters in the "Edit" main function.
288 Version 2015

"Profile calculation" Dialog

You can call up this dialog by clicking "Calculate" in the button bar or with the "Profile > Calculate"
menu.
In this dialog, you start calculation of the ICC output profile after you selected the profile size and pro-
file specification (V2 or V4).
You can then save the new ICC profile to any folder you specified or directly to the system folder for
profiles.
i
i
Note: You can calculate an ICC output profile only if you have a test chart with at least 100
color patches. Other requirements must be met depending on the process, for example,
there must be solid tints (CMY and RGB colors), contones and a certain number of combi-
nations.
The open data file is checked automatically and, in some cases, rejected with an error message. The
smallest test chart in the shipment that you can use to calculate a profile is the "PrintOpen Basic 135"
with 135 color patches.
Calculating the ICC output profile
• "Profile size": The transformation tables in the profiles are calculated with a different color
depth and a different number of coordinates depending on what you set here. The computing
time required, the profile size and the quality of the ICC output profile vary accordingly. The
default for profile size is "Large (16 bit profile)".

You can select the following profile sizes in the list box:
· "Small (8 bit profile)": All the transformation tables are 8 bit.
· "Medium (8/16 bit profile)": As "Small" but the colorimetric transformation tables are 16
bit and have a large number of coordinates (as "Large").
· "Large (16 bit profile)": All the transformation tables are 16 bit and have a large number
of coordinates.
• "Calculate V4 profile": The V4 specification for ICC profiles that has been valid since 2002
allows additional tags and structures such as matrixes. However, these new profiles are still not
very widespread and are not yet supported by many applications.
The ICC profile is calculated on the basis of the new V4 ICC specification and not on V2.1 of 1998
if you enable this option.
Click "Start" to start an analysis of the measured data. During the analysis the program examines all
the results for errors and corrects these.
Afterwards, calculation of the profile starts. You can follow the progress of calculation in the status
display line.
A message saying that color patches with significant deviations were found may appear. Confirm this
message with "OK" to automatically correct the data and continue calculation. Click "Cancel" to stop
profile calculation. You can now remeasure or correct the implausible values and then restart profile
calculation.
You can stop calculation at any time by clicking "Stop".
"Profile description"
The description you type is suggested as the file name of the ICC output profile when it is being
saved.
The file name of the currently open data file and its key parameters displays automatically in the text
box. The suggested file name has no blanks to avoid issues when saving the file.
290 Version 2015

You can edit this suggested file name and type any description for the new ICC profile into this box.
We recommend that your description shows you at once what type of profile it is, e.g.
"OffsetPT1_glosscoated_IT873 U340 K95 7-5":
• Process/technology (e.g. offset)
• Paper grade/media (e.g. PT1_glosscoated or gloss coated)
• Test chart type (e.g. IT 873)
• Total dot area (e.g. U340)
• Maximum black (e.g. K95)
• Black length and width (e.g. 7--5)
• [Profile type (e.g. CMYK)]
• [Number of patches (e.g. 928)]
• [set GCR value (e.g. G50)]
This profile description is saved along with the profile. Some applications or system extensions use
this entry instead of the file name for selecting ICC profiles.
After calculation of the profile is finished, close the dialog box by clicking "OK". Now you only have to
save the new ICC profile.
Click "Save" in the button bar to open the "File Save" dialog.
Select the type of file here:
Toolbox and is the default setting.
• "ICC profile without measured data (.icc)": only contains the calculated profile data (benefit:
small file size) and cannot be opened by Color Toolbox again.
• "Measured data (*.txt)": contains the color data in IT8.7 format and the parameter settings for
profile generation. This type of file can be opened again by Color Toolbox. Can be used for
archiving, for example, if the profile is saved without measured data.

Views and Diagrams

appropriate item in the tabs or selecting the item you want in the "View" menu. To the right of the
diagram, you can define various settings for viewing the color space.
The CIE color space diagrams allow you to evaluate the position of the color data in the color space
and to evaluate the color gamut.
Status Bar
The status bar displays the name of the loaded color data file and of the calculated profile (if any)
and a thumbnail of the test chart or control element.
The full path is then shown as a tooltip when you move the mouse pointer to a name.
292 Version 2015

"Test chart" View


This view mode shows you the currently loaded data file and its patches. The number of patches in
the palette depends of the type of test chart/control element.
The color patches are reproduced as precisely as possible on the monitor (depending on the color
depth set for the monitor and the monitor calibration).

"Field", "Ref. [%]", "Ref. [Lab]", "Ref. [XYZ]", "Spectrum", "Density"

The following information and reference values display beside the graphic when you move the mouse
pointer to a patch or enable the patch with a click (the patch is highlighted by a red-and-white frame):
• "Ref. [Lab]": Displays the Lab values for the current patch
• "Ref. [XYZ]": Displays the XYZ values for the current patch
• "Density": Displays absolute or relative cyan, magenta, yellow, and black density values for the
current patch.
i
i
surement" tab).
294 Version 2015

Right-click Display
The mouse pointer position shows you additional information about the color patch when you right-
click this:
You can view the following information, if it is available:

• "Values measured": Displays the number of patches in the loaded test chart or test strip.
• "Reference values": Displays the CMYK values for the current patch.
• "Density values": Displays the density values for the current patch.
• "XYZ values": Displays the XYZ values for the current patch.
• "Spectral values": Displays the spectrum for the current patch if you have spectral values.
• "delta E", "delta ab": Displays the differential value between another selected patch and the cur-
rent patch. The ΔE value and Δab value is zero if the patches are identical.
You can use this function, for example, to check the gray balance. Click a patch that only has black,
then point to the relevant gray patch and right-click at the mouse pointer position. The ΔE value and
the Δab value between these two patches display.

Viewing Locked Zones

You can lock zones in Prinect Image Control. An appropriate message displays above the main func-
tion bar if you open a color data file with locked zones in Color Toolbox. You can view the locked
zones by hitting "Z" on the keyboard. All the patches in the locked zone are covered by a flashing
white bar. You can clear the display by hitting "Z" again.
More information about the different test charts and graphics can be found in "Test Charts and
Control Strips", Seite 79.
296 Version 2015

"xy diagram" View

You can open this view by clicking the "xy diagram" tab.
"Display of the xy diagram"

The xy diagram is shown as a horseshoe-shaped diagram, known as the chromaticity diagram. It
shows the purely color-related information of a visible color, independent of lightness.
The horseshoe-shaped curve is known as the spectrum locus and is plotted from the xy coordinates
of all the pure wavelengths in the visible spectrum. Each color displayed is an additive mixture of
spectral colors.
All colors that are possible lie within the boundary formed by the spectrum locus.
The intensity and, consequently, the purity of a hue is greatest at the edge of the curve, but decreases
towards the middle of the diagram, as there are no colors purer than spectral colors.

"View"
The colored background (e.g. horseshoe) is hidden when you uncheck this box. The outlines and
the colors you selected for displaying the data set, however, remain as they are. This setting is
very suitable for printing a screen shot to a black-and-white printer.

298 Version 2015

"ab diagram" View

You can open this view by clicking the "ab diagram" tab.
"Display of ab plane"

"View"
Only the outline of the color gamut is shown in the ab diagram when you uncheck this box.
The color circle and the colored corners of the diagram help you in your orientation on the ab
plane. Both are hidden when you uncheck this box. The outlines and the colors you selected for
displaying the data set, however, remain as they are. This setting is very suitable for printing a
screen shot to a black-and-white printer.

300 Version 2015

"La/Lb diagram" View

You can open this view by clicking the "La/Lb diagram" tab.
"Display of the La/Lb diagrams"

The two graphs show the color gamuts in the L*a*b* color space viewed from the side, parallel to the
lightness axis.
In the top graph, the color space is shown in the direction of the a* axis, that is from green to red,
and in the bottom graph in the direction of the b* axis, i.e. from blue to yellow.
The color gradations, right and left, show the influence of the color lightness.
From the diagrams, you can assess the depth resolution of a printing process in the color space and
its size and which colors can be displayed.

"View"
• "Cobweb": Only the outlines of the color gamuts are shown in the La or Lb diagram with this
function.
Only the color gradient bars on the sides are hidden when you uncheck this box. The outlines
and the colors you selected for displaying the data set, however, remain as they are. This setting
is very suitable for printing a screen shot to a black-and-white printer.

302 Version 2015

"Dot gain" View

You can open this view by clicking the "Dot gain" tab.
"Display of the dot gain/printing characteristic"

shown in the diagram. You can also switch over and view the printing characteristic curve here. You
can also view the related data table.
also measured the density when measuring the colors (selected in the "Preferences" dialog).
measured, by general approximation from the Lab(xyz) values.
i
i
Note: The heading above the graph indicates how the tonal values or printing characteristic
were determined:
• "Display of the dot gain curve/printing characteristic (Measured density values)" if you have den-
sity values.
• "Display of the dot gain curve/printing characteristic (Approximated tonal values ISO 12647-1)"
in red if density values are calculated.

"Diagram"
You can select the type of diagram you want to the right of the diagram:
• "Dot gain": Display of the dot gain curves
• "Printing characteristic": Display of the printing characteristic
The dots shown are the measured values that are used to determine the dot gain.
You select the curves that you want to view in "View".
"View"
In the list box, select the colors of the curves that will be shown.
The curves can be displayed together or separately. The number of colors depends on the data file
you selected. Color Toolbox supports the import and export of eight color channels. The color names
are taken from the color data file.
i
i
Note: When you save your quality data in Prinect Image Control, the color names are used
for the setup of the printing units. It is possible that the same color name is used because
of the automatic assignment of the different hues. If necessary, you can change these
names (in Prinect Image Control).
It is possible to view the dot gain curves or printing characteristic for a maximum of eight colors.
However, the "Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the dot gain for as many as
twelve colors. "Prinect_6S" contains the first six defined colors, "Prinect_6S+" all other colors. The
order of the colors depends on the setup of the printing units in Prinect Image Control and it can be
changed there.
A table is hidden below the graph. View this by dragging the horizontal bar upwards with the mouse.
This makes the curve diagram smaller (see Data table).
You can print the curve diagram and its data table as a log (see "General Information about Printing
Your Data", Seite 57).
You can also just print or save the curves or zoom in or out of parts of the diagram (see Context-
sensitive Menu).
"Process standard"
You can also display the tolerance range and/or standard curve of the process standard for cyan,
magenta, yellow and black by checking the appropriate box when viewing these four process colors
separately. You can also view the three chromatic process colors (CMY) jointly.
• "Process standard": Display of the tolerance range for the current process standard by a green
area above or below the dot gain curves. Optimally, the curves should be in the middle of the
tolerance range.
• "Standard curve": Display of a green curve defined for the process standard if the single process
colors (cyan, magenta or yellow) or joint CMY are selected or of a black curve.
i
i
Note: You can replace the process standard you are currently using by selecting a different
one in the "Process standard" main function.
304 Version 2015

Dot gain curves

45°.
Data table
You can view the data table if you drag the horizontal bar below the curve diagram upwards. This
makes the curve diagram smaller. All the colors are always shown in the data table, irrespective of
the curve you select in the "View" list. If necessary, you can move the visible section using the scroll
bars.
The table displays the following values, separately for the four process colors:
• dot gain
• deviation from the process standard (ΔDot Gain)
• tolerance (Tol.)
The dot gain is shown for all other colors. All the dot areas (%) in the test chart or control element
are taken into account. Values that are not defined in the process standard are calculated from the
curves.
306 Version 2015

in curve diagrams:
graphic.
• "Zoom out": to scale down a curve section in the graphic either in horizontal or vertical direc-
tion or symmetrically in both directions.

"Gray balance/Density curves" View

You can open this view by clicking the "Gray balance" tab.
i
i
Note: This function is available only after an ICC output profile was calculated.
"Display of the gray balance curves"

The cyan, magenta and yellow color separation curves and the black curve for gray are shown in this
diagram.
You can also switch over and view the density curves.
You can print or save the curves or zoom in or out of parts of the diagram (see Context-sensitive
Menu).
308 Version 2015

Display of the gray balance curves
Gray balance is used for a correct reproduction of gray tones and depends on the process colors and
print conditions. Due to the misabsorption of process colors and filters, equal parts of the three chro-
matic inks do not produce gray in the overprint but brown.
The print table already contains an optimal gray axis. Modifications to it are only required for deviat-
ing processes or for subjective corrections.

Display of the density
The density curve is determined from the Lab values using an approximation formula and is scaled
between D = 0.0 and D = 3.2, a range that is important for reproduction.
310 Version 2015

in curve diagrams:
graphic.
• "Zoom out": to scale down a curve section in the graphic either in horizontal or vertical direc-
tion or symmetrically in both directions.

Working with "Edit"
i
i
Note: The "Edit" main function is available only if you enabled Profile Tool 15.0 with a
license key.
"Edit" describes all the steps you must take to view and modify an ICC output profile:
• Import and saving of profiles
• Display and editing of profile parameters, see "Profile info." View
• Display and editing of profile color tables
· Dot gain (curve) correction, see "Dot gain" View
· Gray balance correction, see "Gray balance" View
· Global gradation correction, see "Global gradation" View
· Simple correction of lightness L, see "Lightness" View
• Display and correction of a proof profile, see "Proof correction" View
• Display and editing of process parameters, see "Process param." Dialog
• You can view source and target color values for the output profile. See "Color calculator", Seite
2.
• You can calculate a device link profile from two ICC profiles, see "Device link profile", Seite 7.
• You can convert an ICC profile using a low-pass filter to enhance profile quality by smoothing
the color space even further. See "Profile smoothing", Seite 13.
• You can view the current profile parameters (see View Profile Parameters)
where you can select data or define settings.
You can select an ICC profile and view its inputs by clicking "Open profile" or using the Explorer
panel. You can change some of these inputs in the editor and then save the revised profile (if neces-
sary, rename it) with "Save profile".

Basically, all types of profiles can be opened with the editor, this means, not only those profiles that
were created with Color Toolbox or PrintOpen releases.
In the editor, you can see read-only boxes as well as boxes where you can make your changes.
Only output profiles (CMYK and RGB) can be edited.
i
i
Note: Depending on your profile type, some of the tab icons may be disabled (dimmed).
314 Version 2015


All relevant menu commands of the "Edit" main function are listed in the table below. Some of the
commands can also be triggered by buttons in the button bar or by tabs.
File > Open profile Opens a dialog where you can load an ICC profile that
complies with the ICC profile specification.
File > Close document Closes the open (current) ICC profile.
File > Save profile Opens a dialog where you can save the currently edited
profile based on the ICC specification.
Show profile parameters Opens the "Profile parameters" dialog, showing the pro-
file parameters of the current ICC profile.
File > Print You cannot select this function in "Edit".

parameters), define settings for color measurement and
other defaults for the other main functions.
Profile info. Displays the currently loaded profile with all available
profile data, some of which you can edit.
Dot gain Displays the dot gain curves or printing characteristic so
that you can correct them directly either by changing
the curves or entering different coordinates.
Gray balance Displays the gray balance curves so that you can correct
them directly either by changing the curves or entering
different coordinates.
Global gradation Displays the gradation curves of the printing process so
that you can correct them directly either by changing
the curves or entering different coordinates.
Lightness Displays the lightness curve of the printing process so
that you can correct it directly either by changing the
curve or entering different coordinates.
Proof correction Displays the test chart of a proof profile so that you can
make other corrections to it.

Process param. Displays a dialog where you can define the printing pro-
cess parameters (data about output device, paper
grade, process color, screening and plate).
The process parameters are saved in the profile.
grated CMM).
Tools > Device link profile Opens the "Device link profile" dialog where you can
calculate a device link profile from two ICC profiles.
Tools > Profile smoothing Opens the "Correct profile by smoothing" dialog where
you can convert an ICC profile using a 3D low-pass fil-
ter.
316 Version 2015

Profile Information
"Profile info." View

You open a view with profile details when you click the "Profile info." tab.
"Edit the profile information"
i
i
Note: Profile Tool (Color Toolbox) lets you create profiles in compliance with the V4 ICC
specification (2002). This gives you additional tags and structures.
Like with PrintOpen, you can also create profiles based on profile version 2.1 of 1998. In other words,
it doesn't use the specific enhancements of the more recent ICC specifications in order to be com-
patible with as many applications and RIPs (incl. older versions) as possible.
Display Boxes
The profile information screen displays the following items that cannot be changed:

• "CMM type": A "CMM" (Color Management Module) is a module in the operating system or a
specially installed software that can compute ICC profiles and apply them to image data.
This software is mainly used indirectly, for example, if the image editing program or RIP used
requires color conversions. In this case, the application calls up the CMM and sends it the image
data and the required profiles. The CMM then performs the conversions and sends back the fin-
ished data to the application.
Different makes of CMMs are available. They differ mainly in the way they implement the con-
version and in their speed and accuracy.
Several CMMs can be installed together on one computer. In this case, you must specify which
CMM is to perform the conversion.
Some image editing programs have a setting for selecting the CMM. The profiles themselves also
contain an input specifying the preferred CMM. This is used if it has been specified and no other
specifications have been made. In the profiles created by Profile Tool or PrintOpen, "HDM" is
always entered for the Heidelberg CMM.
• "Profile version": The version number refers to the version of the ICC specification on which
the profile is based. All profiles with a "2" as the first digit in the version number have the same
format with regard to their main components. The differences are mainly found in optional
inputs with additional data about the profile.
All profiles with a "4" as the first digit in the version number were calculated based on the newer
V4.2 ICC specification. However, V4 profiles are very seldom and not recommended because
they have not been accepted by users.
• "Device class": shows what type of profile it is. There are three classes for devices profiles:
· "prtr" for print processes
· "scnr" for scanners
· "mntr" for monitors
318 Version 2015

There are also other special types of profiles:
· "link": combinations of two or more profiles, such as for scanners and printers together
or for a transformation from one color space to another (device link profile).
· "spac": profiles for converting "XYZ" or "Lab" data to other device-independent color
spaces such as "Luv" or "YCC" (color space conversion profile).
• "Device color space": This indicates the color space in which a device is operating, for
example, "CMYK" for most print processes and "RGB" for scanners, monitors or desktop/office
printers.
• "Connection space": For device profiles, this indicates the color space used for the device-
independent part of the profile. Only "XYZ" and "Lab" are permitted as color spaces here.
• "Creation date": This shows the date and time when the profile was created or modified. Sub-
sequent changes to the profile made with the editor do not affect this input, enabling you to
always recognize the original date the profile was created on.
• "Copyright": contains the name of the profile manufacturer.
Text boxes
The profile information screen displays the following items that can be changed:
• "Device attributes": refers to the properties of the medium for which the profile was created.
An input here only makes sense for scanners and print processes.
The first setting defines whether the material is transparent or reflective.
· "Reflective" is for photos and paper originals on scanners
· "Transparency" is for slides (transparencies).
In print media, a difference is made between paper and overhead film.

The second setting describes the surface of the material (for example, of the photographic
paper):
· "Glossy" is for a smooth, shiny surface
· "Matte" for a matte surface.
i
i
Note: Only few applications use these inputs.

• "Rendering Intent" defines the approach taken in color reproduction. There are four different
"Rendering Intents":
· "Perceptual": reproduction is based on perception or is "photographic". In this variant,

the colors you wish to reproduce are mapped to the color gamut of the reproduction pro-
cess (gamut mapping) so that there is no loss of definition in the image when it is repro-
duced. Normally, the very chromatic colors are desaturated slightly and a pure (neutral)
white is reproduced on the white of the medium (for example, of the paper).
· "Relative colorimetric": if this option is selected, only the lightness and color cast in the
colors are mapped to the medium. All colors that cannot be displayed as a result of
these measures are located along the outer edges of this gamut and lose some of their
definition.
· "Saturation": widely used option for reproducing chroma in colors, with less importance
attached to retaining lightness.
This method is not really suitable for traditional color reproduction but rather for syn-
thetically produced images such as business graphics. Now and again, the "Saturation"
intent is implemented in profiles in such a way that you obtain the same results as with
"Perceptual".
· "Absolute colorimetric": refers to colorimetrically accurate reproductions. This is partic-

ularly important for proofs or soft proofs. All colors that are in the displayable range of
the process are reproduced without any colorimetric changes. However, to obtain this
result, all non-displayable colors must be confined to the outer edges of the gamut, and
as a result, a greater loss of definition can occur here in this restricted color gamut than
with "Relative colorimetric".
Only when the color solid of a proofer, for example, is large enough to contain all colors in an
image can the reproduction be really colorimetrically correct in all parts.
In many cases, the rendering intent used in reproduction is determined by the image editing pro-
gram. Only if this is not the case (for example, in some RIPs) is the default intent specified in the
profile used. You can set this in the appropriate box.
• "Media white point" is first of all the measured white of the medium (for example, of paper).
It only takes affect if the colorimetric "rendering intent" (proof) is used since in all other intents
the colors are matched to the medium white at hand.
Occasionally, the subjective visual impression does not match the colorimetric results. This
occurs above all in papers which use optical whiteners or in lighting conditions that only match
the standard light unsatisfactorily (metamerism).
320 Version 2015

A slight darker proof is also often preferred to a loss of definition in highlight if the paper used
in the proofer is not light enough. In such cases, it may be useful to change the white point. The
simplest way is to enter a modified white point in "Lab" because lightness and color cast are
kept separate here. An input in "XYZ" is suited, for example, if the desired white point is available
as measured data in "XYZ".
• "Profile description": This is a name or a short piece of text that describes the profile.
Take note that some programs working with profiles show this text and not the file name when
the profile is selected. This means that a profile saved with a different name appears with the
old name in the selection list. You can avoid such problems by changing the text in this input
box. We recommend that you change this text when changing profiles to avoid any ambiguities
later on.
i
i
Note: You can edit the profile description when you save calculated profiles. Color Toolbox
automatically uses the profile description as the profile file name.
Click "Save profile" (in the button bar) or select "File > Save profile" to open the "Save profile" dialog
where you can save your modifications to the profiles (if necessary, use a different profile name and/
or target folder).
Visual Correction of Proof Profiles

In some cases, Heidelberg proof results can appear to be slightly yellow. While the colorimetric dif-
ferences are optimal, a slight yellow cast appears to be seen because of the fluorescent whitening
agents and different illumination conditions for device and validation station.
By clicking "Improve proof profile visually", you correct the gray axis and neutral hues which eliminate
this effect
• This function applies only to proof profiles.
• Visual correction must be the last step in an iterative proof correction.
• After correction the proof result appears more neutral (no longer any yellow cast).
i
i
Note: Please do not use iterative correction on profiles corrected in this way! Instead, set
aside the uncorrected profile and use this for other corrections. This case is a visual correc-
tion that is not based on measured data. Iterative correction would try to undo this correc-
tion.

View Profile Parameters

You can view the parameters that were used for calculation of an ICC profile.
"Profile parameters" Dialog

You can call up the dialog in the "Edit" main program function by clicking "Show profile parameters".
This is possible only if the ICC profile is already open.
i
i
Note: You can also open this dialog in "Create" by clicking "Show" in the "Profile Genera-
tion Setup" dialog.
This dialog shows the parameters set for the ICC profile currently open (color composition, black gen-
eration, UCR/GCR, gamut mapping, smoothing of color data). This supplements the profile informa-
tion that is shown and you can only check the ICC profile with it.
Click "Apply" to automatically copy all the profile parameters to the relevant boxes (in the "Profile
Generation Setup" dialog in "Create").
i
i
Note: Remember that this overwrites the current parameter setup with the settings shown
in this dialog.
322 Version 2015

You close the window by clicking "Close". You can now resume editing of the open ICC profile or open
another profile.

Profile Modifications
You can only modify ICC output profiles (CMYK and RGB). If the specifications for ICC profiles are
complied with, you can also modify output profiles that were not created with Color Toolbox or Prin-
tOpen.
Using the editor for modifying output profiles, you can modify a profile as follows:
• Dot gain/Printing characteristics
• Gray balance
• Global gradation
• Lightness gradation
• Post correction of a proofer profile
• Process parameters
Process Color Modifications

Process colors are modified in the color conversion tables in an ICC output profile. These changes are
written to the print or proof tables. They affect all the CMYK color separations or RGB channels of the
conversion tables.
Click "Open profile" or use the "File > Open profile" menu to select the ICC output profile whose pro-
cess colors you wish to modify.
The profile data are shown.
324 Version 2015

"Dot gain" View

The dot gain or printing characteristic displays when you click the "Dot gain" tab.
"Edit the printing characteristic/dot gain curve"

shown in the diagram. You can also switch over and view the printing characteristic curve here.

Dot gain
326 Version 2015

45°.
Editing the Curves

To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for editing the dot gain or printing char-
acteristic.
"Curve"
Select the type of diagram you want by clicking the appropriate option.
The values for dot gain and printing characteristic are calculated from density values. With the dot
gain correction function, the values for dot gain are calculated from the spectral XYZ color data. For
that reason, the curve can deviate from the dot gain values that were determined with a densitometer.
"Color"
The number of colors depends on the profile selected. Color Toolbox supports the editing of multiple
color profiles (Multicolor). It is possible to view and correct the dot gain curves or printing character-
istic for a maximum of eight colors. The color names are taken from the profile.
You can change the dot gain or printing characteristic curves for the color channels by dragging the
curves to the value desired or entering different coordinates.
Select the curve whose dot gain or printing characteristic is to be changed by clicking the appropriate
radio button. Coordinates are shown as handles.
One handle always appears at the start. You can change the curve to make it more harmonic as a
whole by clicking and dragging this handle. Double-click the left mouse button to add other handles
at the cursor position (maximum 16). When you add a new handle, the previous one becomes fixed,
in this way defining the shape of the curve.
If you set several handles, you can then change the shape of the curve locally around the handle that
is currently selected. You can remove a handle by a single click with the right mouse button.
"Values"

When you click a handle, the numbers (Index, 0, 1, 2,...) of the reference point and its X and Y coor-
dinates are shown.
You can also change the curve by overwriting these X and Y coordinates with new values.
Click "Reset" to reset the curves to the values you had when opening the screen.
Click "Apply" to write the dot gain change to the color conversion table of the ICC output profile.
or target folder).
328 Version 2015

"Gray balance" View

The gray balance displays when you click the "Gray balance" tab.
"Edit the gray balance curves"

The gray balance curves of the printing or proof process (process colors, mixed colors and/or spot
colors) are shown in the diagram. You can switch between print or proof views as you want.
Gray balance
Gray balance is used for a correct reproduction of gray tones and depends on the process colors and
print conditions. Due to the misabsorption of process colors and filters, equal parts of the three chro-
matic inks (cyan, magenta and yellow) do not produce gray in the overprint but brown. The print table
already contains an optimal gray axis. Modifications to it are only required for deviating processes or
for subjective corrections.

Editing the Curves

To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for editing gray balance.
"Print or proof"
In the popup menu, select which color conversion table in the ICC profile will be modified:
• "Print" = print table (separations, Perceptual (photographic) Rendering Intent)
• "Proof" = proof table (proof, soft proof, Colorimetric Rendering Intent)
"Color"
color profiles (Multicolor). It is possible to view and correct the gray balance for a maximum of eight
colors. The color names are taken from the profile.
Change the gray balance by dragging the curves to the value desired or entering different coordinates.
i
i
Note: In multiple color profiles (Multicolor), gray is made up of black with GCR (at least
50% recommended). For that reason, spot colors do not affect gray balance or only very
slightly.
Select the curve whose gray balance you wish to change by clicking the appropriate radio button.
Coordinates are shown as handles.
whole by clicking and dragging this handle.
Double-click the left mouse button to add other handles at the cursor position (maximum 16). When
you add a new handle, the previous one becomes fixed, in this way defining the shape of the curve.
"Values"
330 Version 2015

dinates are shown.
Click "Apply" to write the gray balance change to the print and/or proof table of the ICC output pro-
file.
or target folder).

"Global gradation" View

The global gradation displays when you click the "Global gradation" tab.
"Edit the global gradation"

The gradation correction curves of the printing or proof process (process colors, mixed colors and/or
spot colors) are shown in the diagram. You can switch between print or proof views as you want.
Gradation
A "gradation" (reproduction of the tonal value) defines the relation between the original values and
the reproduction values (e.g. density values or screen percentage).
The gradation of the printing process is contained (implicitly) in the color conversion tables of the ICC
profile. To change the gradation of the printing process, you can correct the present gradation by a
global gradation correction.
332 Version 2015

Editing the Curves

To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for editing global gradation.
A linear curve is displayed at the beginning of correction, equivalent to no correction. You can set the
global gradation curves for the color channels by dragging the curves to the value desired or entering
different coordinates.
"Print or proof"
"Color"
color profiles (Multicolor). It is possible to view and correct global gradation for a maximum of eight
colors. The color names are taken from the profile.
You can change the global gradation curves for the color channels by dragging the curves to the value
desired or entering different coordinates.
Select the curve whose gradation correction you wish to change by clicking the appropriate radio but-
ton. Coordinates are shown as handles.
whole by clicking and dragging this handle.
"Values"

dinates are shown.
Click "Apply" to write the global gradation correction to the color conversion table of the ICC output
profile. Afterwards, gradation correction is reset again to no correction (linear curve displayed).
i
i
Note: Each global gradation correction that is written to the ICC profile is based on the cur-
rent gradation of the printing process (additive correction).
or target folder).
i
i
Note: You can tell that the global gradation correction was written to the ICC profile by
viewing, for example, the gray balance curve (see "Gray balance" View). This allows you to
check the current gradation of the printing process.
334 Version 2015

"Lightness" View
The lightness gradation displays when you click the "Lightness" tab.
"Edit the lightness gradation"

The lightness gradation curve of the printing or proof process (process colors, mixed colors and/or
spot colors) is shown in the diagram. You can switch between print or proof views as you want.
Lightness gradation
A "gradation" (reproduction of the tonal value) defines the relation between the original values and
the reproduction values (e.g. density values or lightness values).
The ideal lightness value of the profile color space is shown on the horizontal axis. The real lightness
values in the print or proof are shown on the vertical axis.
To correct certain lightness areas, you can use (measured) L values from the print or proof.
This special lightness correction only changes the lightness gradation of the printing process and not
the hue of the color data. This type of correction cannot be used with single CMYK gradation correc-
tions.
Editing the Curve

To the right of the diagram, you can define various settings for editing lightness gradation.

"Print or proof"
Change the lightness gradation by dragging the curve to the value desired or entering different coor-
dinates.
Coordinates are shown as handles. One handle always appears at the start.
You can change the curve to make it more harmonic as a whole by clicking and dragging this handle.
"Values"
dinates are shown.
Click "Reset" to reset the curve to the values you had when opening the screen.
Click "Apply" to write the lightness gradation change to the color conversion table of the ICC output
profile.
or target folder).
336 Version 2015

"Proof correction" View

A test chart showing the color data of the proof profile you wish to correct is displayed when you click
the "Proof correction" tab.
"Correction of proofer profile"

This function lets you improve the proof result by making corrections to a proofer profile.
i
i
Note: In a proof correction, only the color conversion for "absolute colorimetric" Rendering
Intent (i.e. a colorimetrically accurate reproduction) is changed.
The ""Lightness adaption for proof"", Seite 281 function also should not be enabled for paper white
correction when setting the profile calculation options.

Principle of Proof Correction

Measured color deviations between the print and proof are used for the automatic correction of the
proofer profile.
This requires that you have the color data of a test chart of the printing process and the proof result
in addition to the ICC profile for the proof. The test chart must be the same type and have quite an
amount of color data.
We recommend a large test chart, for example:
• "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3"
• "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4"
• "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002"
A comparison of the color data between the print and proof shows the color differences, and an
appropriate correction is automatically written to the proof to minimize the differences.
This procedure can be used several times (iterative), with the differences to be corrected becoming
less with every step.
i
i
Note: In most cases, a first correction step is fully adequate, and the measured differences
between print and proof are acceptable for proofing and color measurement.
Prerequisites
The following steps are required for a proof correction:
1. The ICC profile and the color data of a test chart of the printing process are available.
2. The proof profile that simulates the printing process of the printed test chart on the proofer is
generated.
3. With the print and proof profile, you output a proof using the test chart data of the printing pro-
cess.
4. You then measure this proof.
You now have the three files you need for proof correction:
• 1: the proof profile you will correct
• 2: the color data of the test chart of the printing process (production process, usually ISOcoat-
ed_v2_ECI or ISOcoated_v2_300_EC)
• 3: the color data of the test chart of the first proof
338 Version 2015

Controls and Displays

To the right of the graphic, you will find control elements and display boxes that you can use to make
subsequent corrections to the proof profile.
• "Measurement data from print": Button for opening the test chart data file for your printing pro-
cess.
• "Measurement data from proof": Button for opening the test chart data file of the first proof
(print simulation).
• "View": Check boxes for highlighting the differences in color in the two test chart data files. You
can combine both functions (see also Procedure).
· "Enhance differences": The difference colors are scaled up threefold.
· "Miscolors": Shows the miscolors instead of the "real" colors.
• "Proofer profile correction": Paper white is kept in the proofer profile if you check this box.
• "Calculate": Button for starting calculation of the modified proofer profile.
• "Field", "Ref. [%]", "Ref [Lab]", "Cmp. [Lab]", "Delta": Move the mouse pointer to a patch to dis-
play the following values next to the graphic:
· "Field": Displays the number (ID) of the current patch in the test chart
· "Ref [%]": Displays cyan, magenta, yellow, and black screen percents for the current
patch
· "Ref [Lab]": Displays the Lab values for the current patch of the measurement data from
print
· "Cmp. [Lab]": Displays the Lab values for the current patch of the measurement data
from proof
· "Delta": Displays the ΔE, ΔL, Δa and Δb values for the current patch

Procedure
1. Open the proof file you wish to correct.
(click "Open profile" in the button bar or with the "File > Open profile" menu).
2. Open the test chart for correction of the proof profile by clicking the "Proof correction" tab.
Any measured values saved in the proof profile are shown as color patches. However, you can also
use other test chart types for calculation of the corrections.
3. Open the test chart file for your print process by clicking "Open..." (Measurement data from
print).
4. Click "Open..." (Measurement data from proof) to open the test chart file of the first proof output
(print simulation).
i
i
Note: The test chart type for the production process must be the same as that used for this
proof.
The data are displayed as large and small color patches in the test chart file. You can make this
clearer by checking the "Enhance differences" function. The difference colors are scaled up threefold
so that it's easier for you to see the differences in colors.
Post correction of a proofer profile
340 Version 2015

You can see the differences even more clearly if you switch over to a display showing miscolors ("Mis-
colors" check box). These are used instead of the "real" colors to highlight slight differences in colors
(especially grays). A color scale with a range of "0" to "12" shows the meaning of the colors. For
example, the biggest differences (ΔE greater than or equal to 12) are red and the smallest blue. Dif-
ferences lying in between this are orange, yellow or green.
The miscolors view can also be scaled up threefold to be able to see the differences better. The scale
range changes from "0" to "4" if you enable the "Enhance differences" option.
5. If you wish to keep paper white in the proofer profile, then check the relevant box.
6. Start correction calculation by clicking "Calculate".

The application now calculates a modified proofer profile. Take note that the creation date and profile
description are not yet changed by this action.
If you wish to change these inputs, you can type a new profile description in "Profile info." and then
save the profile. This also updates the creation date.
7. Click "Save profile" (in the button bar) or select "File > Save profile" to open the "Save profile"
dialog where you can save your modifications to the profiles (if necessary, use a different profile
name and/or target folder).
342 Version 2015

"Process param." Dialog

The view for entering process parameters displays when you click the "Process param." tab. The but-
ton is only enabled if "Setup of the process parameters and save in measurement data and ICC pro-
file" is checked (default) in the ""Preferences" Dialog", Seite 44 ("General" tab).
"Edit the process parameters"
i
i
Note: This screen has the same function as the "Process parameters" Dialog that you can
display in the "Measure" and "Create" main functions.
This is where you can define the printing process parameters (data about output device, paper grade,
process color, screening and plate). The process parameters are saved in the ICC profile.
The process parameters are also saved in the data file or the profile. However, they do not change the
color conversions in the profile or influence processing by certain CMMs.
profile browser during profile selection (you can configure the display as required) and help you select
and sort different ICC profiles.

i
i
eral" dialog. This function is enabled by default.
You cannot call up the "Process parameters" dialog in the "Measure" or "Create" main functions if the
function is disabled. The button is then disabled (dimmed).
"Settings"
them at any time.
or target folder).
i
i
Note: This function lets you add process parameters to existing ICC profiles, for example,
to use view and sorting functions of the profile browser. The profiles can also be from older
PrintOpen versions or from profiling tools of other manufacturers.
344 Version 2015

Working with "Process standard"

There are only process standards for printing, especially for offset printing. In this context, we support
the "G7-GRACOL" print standard used in the US to a certain extent.
PSO
Print
Until today, the entire standard check procedure focused on "measuring" while the proof check pro-
cedure comprised the "measure" and "compare" steps. This drew criticism on the proof procedure
used so far, in particular with regard to the following topics:
• The procedure requires too many dialogs to process, resulting in too many steps.
• The procedure used so far only functions correctly for coated FOGRA39, not for uncoated
FOGRA47 printing materials.
• Setting up parameters is difficult, and only one parameter record is supported.
To facilitate operation and to centralize all controls, the new version comes with new process stan-
dard types, and all checks are available in "Measure" now.
Process standards

ISO 12647-2 ISO 12647-7 ISO 15311 ISO 15339
Offset printing

The new types are:

• Proof check — has been restructured
• Digital printing check and
• G7 printing check
Operation
You can do the following actions with "Process standard":
• Select a process standard that you wish to use to display the color data
• View or modify the settings for the standard used in "Measure > Process standard"
• Modify or delete a standard
• Import or export a standard
• Calculate/generate a wet process standard
• Create a new four-color (CMYK), multicolor or spot color standard
You can view and edit standards for the following print processes:
• "CMYK": conventional four-color printing
• "Multicolor": a maximum of seven process colors (CMYK primary colors and up to three addi-
tional secondary colors red/orange, green and/or blue)
• Spot colors: a maximum of eight spot colors or four process colors (CMYK) and a maximum of
four spot colors
The nominal values and tolerances of a process standard that you can view and edit depend on the
printing material you selected for paper white and the primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and
black). You can also select the secondary colors (red, green and blue) and CMY gray (overprint) if you
wish.
This main function is divided into two sections that you can open with the appropriate tab icons or
menu commands:
• Select "Overview" to view information about a selected process standard (name, printing mate-
rial, comment, dot gain, CIELab data, if applicable density values, printing order).
To create a user-defined printing standard, you can modify the nominal values and tolerances or
the printing order of an existing process standard in the edit mode or use existing data from
"Measure".
You can also enable the CIELab values of the secondary colors and/or density values that are
specified, but disabled, in the process standard.
346 Version 2015

• You can view all the process standards saved in the local or global master database (MDS) in a
tree structure in "Administration".
Tooltips provide you with more details about the process standard (printing materials, comments
and any write protection).
There are four buttons for editing a process standard on the right of both views:
• Use "Edit" to go from the view mode to the edit mode.
• Use "Save" to apply the settings to a process standard.
• Use "Cancel" to return to the view mode.
• Use "Delete" to remove a user-defined standard from the hierarchic structure.
i
i
Note: In the "MDS" tab in the "Preferences" dialog you can define whether the process stan-
dards will be saved locally or in the MDS (Master Data Store).
You can import the process curve set for multicolor process standards from Calibration Tool. But in
this case you cannot edit the dot gain curves. You can edit dot gain curves only when you create and
save process standards locally or when the option using Calibration Tool is disabled. If the option is
enabled, you can edit dot gain curves only with Calibration Tool.


All relevant menu commands of the "Process standard" main function are listed in the table below.
Some of the commands can also be triggered by buttons in the button bar or by tabs.
File > Import Opens a dialog where you can select the file with the
process standard that you wish to import.
You must rename or delete the existing process stan-
dard if the one you wish to import has the same name.
File > Export Opens a dialog so that you can save the current process
standard outside the MDS.
Opens a dialog where you can calculate a wet process

standard.
File > Print Opens a dialog where you can set your printer options
and print the applicable process standard.
ers and master data (MDS) as well as define settings for
the proof and CIE report and tolerances.
Overview Shows a view where you can select and edit a process
standard with the following diagrams and tables:
• Dot gain for CMY and K
• Data tables for CIELab values and density values
• View of the order of printing
Administration Shows all existing process standards in a tree structure
After you select a process standard, go to the overview
with "Edit".
Edit Switches the overview to the edit mode for the process
standard you selected. You can enable/disable and
modify the data tables.
348 Version 2015

Save saves a new or edited standard for the selected process
type ("CMYK", "Multicolor "or "Spot Colors") with the
name specified in "Standard". You must save the pro-
cess standards separately for every printing material
that is defined.
The process standards included in the shipment are
write-protected. You must assign a different name to a
standard that you modified or to a new one so that you
can save it.
Cancel Ends the editing of a process standard without saving
any changes made.
Delete Deletes a modified or new process standard.
The process standards included in the shipment are
write-protected and cannot be deleted.
You may not delete the applicable process standard. If
you wish to delete the process standard, first define
another process standard as the applicable one and
only then delete the process standard you want to
delete.

Views and Diagrams
"Overview"
You can open this view by clicking the "Overview" tab.
You go to the edit mode for the process standard you selected when you click "Edit" in "Overview"
and "Administration".
"Select and edit process standard"

This part of the dialog shows you the diagrams and data tables of the process standard currently
selected, either for your information in the view mode or for editing in the edit mode.
The diagram is divided into five sections. For a better overview, these sections are minimized to a
caption bar and be shown or hidden by clicking this bar.
350 Version 2015

The following diagrams can be shown:

• Dot gain curves separately for CMY and K, for multicolor and spot colors of all process colors
• Dot gain values in 10% steps and 25% and 75% if these are present, and also the CMY spread
at 50%
• Paper white (optional)
• CIELab color values (solid tint) for primary and secondary colors and three-color gray (overprint)
or for processes involving sport colors the CIELab color values of defined process colors, also
solid tint densities as an option
• Print order through stylized display of the printing units
To create a user-defined process standard, click "Edit" to go from the view mode to the edit mode.
View mode
In the view mode, select the process standard you want in the "Standard" and/or "Printing Material"
lists. The following data displays in diagrams and data tables when you click the respective caption:
L*a*b* values for paper white, dot gain, nominal values and tolerances of CIELab data plus any den-
sity values and the order of printing.
"Standard"
You select the standard from two list boxes:
• in the left list box, select the type of the printing process ("CMYK", "Multicolor" or "Spot Colors").
• In the right list box you select the name of an existing process standard.
The following process standards are included in the shipment:

• "ISO 12647-2_2007 FograWB": Current FOGRA39 standard based on "ISO 12647-
2_2004Amd1" and "ISO 12647-2_2007WB", white backing; with secondary colors and overprint;
without density values; with real values defined; defined for paper grades:
· "PT1 - gloss coated": FOGRA39 (current)
· "PT4 - uncoated white"
• "ISO 12647-2_2007 HDM_BB": Current HDMcoated standard based on "ISO 12647-

2_2007BB", equivalent to FOGRA39 for black backing; with secondary colors and overprint;
without density values; with real values defined; defined for paper grades:
· "PT1 - gloss coated"
· "PT4 - uncoated white"
i
i
Note: You will find the color data in Color Tool 13.0\data\hdm

• "ISO 12647-2_2007BB": Current standard for offset printing based on "ISO 12647-
2_2004Amd1" for 2007; black backing; without secondary colors, overprint and density values;
defined for paper grades "PT1" thru "PT5", theoretical.
• "ISO 12647-2_2007WB": Current standard for offset printing based on "ISO 12647-
2_2004Amd1" for 2007; white backing; without secondary colors, overprint and density values;
defined for paper grades "PT1" thru "PT5", theoretical.
• "ISO 12647-2_2008 FograWB NP": Current "FOGRA43/44" standard based on "ISO 12647-
2_2004Amd1"; white backing; with secondary colors and overprint; without density values; with
real values defined; for NP = non-periodic screening (FM screening); defined for paper grades:
· "PT1 - gloss coated": FOGRA43
· "PT4 - uncoated white": FOGRA44
Some of these process standards are defined for a number of printing materials and you can select
the ones you want in the "Printing Material" list.
Notes on the Process Standards

• ISO 12647-2 (2007): yellow and secondary colors were slightly modified, now matching real prin-
ting conditions better.
• FOGRA39 is based on ISO 12647-2 (2007); for white backing only
· compared to ISO 12647-2 (2004): yellow and secondary colors were slightly modified
· compared to ISO 12647-2 (2007): secondary colors Green and Blue slightly modified;
realistic and therefore enabled
• ISO 12647-2 (2007) HDM: is based on ISO 12647-2 (2007); for black backing
· added for black backing (HDM)
• FOGRA43/44: are based on ISO 12647-2 (2007); for white backing only
· for NP = non-periodic screening (FM screening)
· for two paper grades, gloss coated/matt (FOGRA43) and uncoated white (FOGRA44)
· can be selected as "ISO 12647-2_2008 FograWB NP"
"Printing Material"
The various printing materials have different color data and tolerances. The following paper grades
are defined for Color Toolbox:
• PT1 - gloss coated white
• PT4 - uncoated white
352 Version 2015

"Comment"
The process standards included in the shipment have more details about the name in a comment
(e.g. details about the basis, backing, the defined printing materials) if you need more information.
This comment appears as a tooltip in the tree structure of "Administration" and helps you decide
which process standard is the one you need.
"Show/Hide Dot Gain Curves"
The dot gain is shown in a diagram in the view mode. In Color Toolbox you can determine the dot gain
in 10% steps and also for the two reference points 25% and 75%.
When you create and save process standards locally, the curves for the three chromatic process col-
ors Cyan, Magenta and Yellow (primary colors) are shown together. Black (K) is shown separately
because it usually has higher deviating defaults. The small dots you see in the diagrams show you
where the dot gain was determined.
When you import dot gain from Calibration Tool, all the colors will appear in a single diagram. Click
the graphic area to switch to single views of colors or to go to the next curve. The corresponding color
channels are shown to the right of the diagram. These are generally the HD-ISO curves.

"Show/hide dot gain values"
The dot gain value table shows the nominal values and tolerances for dot gain specified in the pro-
cess standard in black; non-existing values are shown in gray.
A color sample at the upper table edge shows the process colors.
• Std = defined dot gain of the process standard
• Tol = tolerance value
The "Spread" is calculated without black as the dot gain tolerances for the three chromatic colors
cyan, magenta and yellow are generally different from the tolerance for black. The "Spread" is the
maximum difference between the three chromatic process colors. This is the maximum spacing
between the curves in the graph. An additional limit is evaluated with the "Spread". This means that
the actual values are not in the process standard when this value is exceeded, even if the values are
within the tolerance range.
"Show/hide paper white"
Paper white is shown separately because the tolerances for the L*, a* and b* values usually differ.
The tolerances relating to the process standard are indicated separately in the table to the right as Δ
values.
You can hide and show this view as you like.
354 Version 2015

"Show/hide CIELab color values and density values"
In the data tables, the nominal values and tolerances of the CIELab values (solid tint) specified in the
process standard are black if they are enabled and gray if disabled.
The tolerance is specified by the color difference ΔE* (color distance).
i
i
Note: Secondary colors and overprint (CMY Gray) are disabled for older process standards
(2004) because the present standard values for them are difficult to comply with techni-
cally.
The process standard for secondary colors and overprint (CMY gray has been revised by
now; this means the values can be updated and activated for checking.
Some of the values are already enabled in the process standards of 2006, 2007, and 2008.
The process standards included in the shipment are write-protected. You must save the process stan-
dards under a different name if you wish to enable the values for secondary colors, overprint and, if
necessary, density.
You can also view the final density values for the primary colors cyan, magenta, yellow and for black
on the right side if the relevant boxes are checked.
i
i
Note: Although all the process standards shipped with Color Toolbox have solid tint density
values, these values are disabled. This is because it is very difficult to specify density
defaults due to varying measurement conditions.
ISO standards do not have any binding density defaults because this parameter is not standardized
and explicit.
You can enable these density values by checking the boxes in the edit mode. These default density
values correspond to measuring conditions with a polarization filter.

"Show/hide print order"
The order of printing defined for the process standard is shown by a press with a maximum of eight
printing units. Active printing units are numbered from right to left and marked by the respective col-
ors.
i
i
Note: The "Use measurement values" function is not available in the view mode.
Edit mode
To create a user-defined printing standard, you can modify the nominal values and tolerances or the
printing order of an existing process standard in the edit mode or use existing data from "Measure".
You can enable the density values that are not defined in the process standard and/or the CIELab val-
ues of the secondary colors and overprint. You must save the process standards under a different
name because the process standards included in the shipment are write-protected.
i
i
Note: In "Preferences > MDS" you can choose whether the process standards will be saved
locally or in the MDS (Master Data Store). In addition, you can set that the tonal values will
be taken from Calibration Manager. This is always the case when you work with an external
MDS.
You can migrate process standards that are saved locally to the external MDS.
Click "Edit" to enable the edit mode.

In the edit mode, select the process standard you want in the "Standard" and/or "Printing Material"
lists. The following data displays in diagrams and data tables: dot gain, nominal values and toler-
ances of CIELab data plus any density values and the order of printing.
"Standard"
You select the standard from two list boxes:
• In the left list box you select the process (CMYK, Multicolor or Spot Colors).
• In the right list box you select the name of an existing process standard.
Type a name for the new printing standard.
356 Version 2015

"Printing Material"
Use one of the default paper grades.
The various printing materials have different color data and tolerances. The following paper grades
are defined for Color Toolbox:
• PT1 - gloss coated white
• PT2 - matt coated white
• PT3 - gloss coated web
• PT5 - uncoated yellowish
"Comment"
Enter more details about the name in this box if you wish a more precise description of the printing
standard (e.g. details about the basis, backing, the defined printing materials). This comment appears
as a tooltip in the tree structure of "Administration" and helps you decide which process standard is
the one you need.
"Show/Hide Dot Gain Curves"
The dot gain is shown in a diagram in the edit mode. In Color Toolbox you can determine the dot gain
in 10% steps and also for the two reference points 25% and 75%.
When you create and save process standards locally, the curves for the three chromatic process col-
ors Cyan, Magenta and Yellow (primary colors) are shown together. Black (K) is shown separately
because it usually has higher deviating defaults. The small dots you see in the diagrams show you
where the dot gain was determined.
When you import dot gain from Calibration Tool, all the colors will appear in a single diagram. Click
the graphic area to switch to single views of colors or to go to the next curve. The corresponding color
channels are shown to the right of the diagram.
"Show/hide dot gain values"
The dot gain value table shows the nominal values and tolerances for dot gain specified in the process
standard in black; non-existing values are shown in gray. A color sample at the upper table edge
shows the process colors.
• Std = defined dot gain of the process standard
• Tol = tolerance value
The nominal values are entered in "Std" (standard). You can define a tolerance (plus/minus standard)
in the "Tol" (tolerance) box.
You can type the dot gain in 10% steps and also for the two reference points 25% and 75%. Usually,
you define the tonal values at 40% and 80% and this is required for a process standard.
For the primary colors, you can also specify a value for the spread. The "Spread" is the maximum dif-
ference between the three chromatic process colors (the maximum spacing in the graph). This value
lets you define an additional limit. This means that the actual values are not in the process standard
when this value is exceeded, even if the values are within the tolerance range.

"Show/hide paper white"

Paper white is specified separately because the tolerances for the L*, a* and b* values usually differ.
The tolerances relating to the process standard are entered separately in the table to the right as Δ
values.
You can hide and show this view/input box as you like.
"Show/hide CIELab color values and density values"
If you wish, you can enter the L*a*b* values (solid tint) for all the colors if the appropriate color is
checked. The tolerance is specified by the color difference "ΔE*" (color distance).
i
i
Note: There is usually no check for secondary colors (red, green and blue) and overprint
(CMY Gray) because the standard values for them defined in older process standards
(2004) are difficult to comply with technically.
The process standard for secondary colors and overprint (CMY gray has been revised by
now; this means the values can be updated and the activated for checking.
Some of the values are already enabled in the process standards of 2006, 2007, and 2008.
Small color samples indicate the color. You can choose existing names in the list boxes or type them
in the text boxes.
Similarly, you can also enter the final density values for the primary colors cyan, magenta, yellow and
for black on the right side if the relevant boxes are checked.
i
i
Note: Although the process standards shipped with Color Toolbox have solid tint density
values, all these values are disabled. This is because it is very difficult to specify density
defaults due to varying measurement conditions. ISO standards do not have any binding
density defaults because this parameter is not standardized and explicit.
You can enable these density values by checking the boxes. These default density values correspond
to measuring conditions with a polarization filter. If necessary, you can overwrite these values.
"Show/hide print order"
The order of printing defined for the process standard is shown by a press with a maximum of eight
printing units. Active printing units are numbered from right to left and marked by the respective col-
ors.
358 Version 2015

You can modify the printing unit setup by clicking the printing unit colors. The color changes each
time you click.
Click through to the color you want for every printing unit, going from right to left.
i
i
Note: This is shown mainly for your information only and will not be gone into detail.
"Use value from measuring area"

The current color data of the test chart or control element open in "Measure" are automatically
entered as the reference data (standard) as well as the tolerances when you click "Use measurement
values".
You can also enable "Use tonal values, if available".
"Save"
Click "Save" to apply the current inputs or settings to the selected standard and printing material.
"Cancel"
Click "Cancel" to end the edit mode and return to the view mode. Any data you entered/changes you
made are discarded.
i
i
Note: You can delete a user-defined printing standard only in the view mode or in the
"Administration" view.

How to Create a Multicolor Process Standard

You can create process standards for a maximum of seven process colors (CMYK plus red (orange),
green and/or blue).
1. Choose a "CMYK process standard" and a suitable "Printing material" in the "Overview" or in
"Administration".
2. Click "Edit".
3. Choose "Multicolor" in the left "Standard" list box and edit the name for the standard on the
right.
4. Type all required parameters:
• Dot gain
Dot gains cannot be edited if the process standard is imported from Calibration Tool.
• Paper white
• CIELab color values and densities if applicable
5. Click "Save" to save your input.

6. Check the new Multicolor process standard in the "Measure > Process standard" main function.
i
i
Note: When you open the respective test chart or control strip, some process standards
might not be assigned automatically. In such a case you must manually assign colors.
7. Choose the desired color in the list boxes.

Click "OK" to assign this color to the respective color channel.
360 Version 2015

How to Create a Spot Color Process Standard

You can create process standards for a maximum of eight spot colors or CMYK plus a maximum of
four spot colors.
1. Choose a "CMYK process standard" and a suitable "Printing material" in the "Overview" or in
"Administration".
2. Click "Edit".
3. Choose "Spot Colors" in the left "Standard" list box and edit the name for the standard on the
right.
4. Type all required parameters:
• Paper white
• CIELab Color Values
CIELab values of spot colors can only be specified manually. There is no connection to the Pan-
tone color tables. You must specify the color names and Lab values for the spot colors.
• densities if necessary (read-only)
• Dot gain
Dot gains cannot be edited if the process standard is imported from Calibration Tool.
The dot gain targets (process curve set) can be specified as follows:
· Define the targets yourself in local mode when no MDS is used.
· Do this via Calibration Tool when MDS is enabled in the Preferences.
When "any other spot color" was enabled in Calibration Tool (MDS enabled), you can
choose from the following:
– CMY target curve (default for standard process curve sets)
– K target curve
– User-defined target curve
– No target curve (the first existing primary color is used; if it is not present, the K curve
is used.)
You can also select target values for spot colors by the respective names (orange, green, blue...)
using specially created dot gain curves.
5. Click "Save" to save your input.

6. Check the new spot color process standard in the "Measure > Process standard" main function.
i
i
Note: When you open the respective test chart or control strip, some process standards
might not be assigned automatically. In such a case you must manually assign colors.

7. Choose the desired color in the list boxes.

Click "OK" to assign this color to the respective color channel.
362 Version 2015

"Administration" View
You can open this view by clicking the "Administration" tab.
"Select and edit process standard"

This part of the dialog displays a tree structure with all existing process standards.
The printing process type is indicated in square brackets:
• "[CMYK]": Process standard for conventional four-color printing
• "[Multicolor]": Process standard for 5-color, 6-color or 7-color printing (CMYK + red (orange),
green and/or blue)
• "[Spot Colors]": Process standard for a maximum of 8 colors (CMYK + max. 4 spot colors or max.
8 spot colors)
Some of these process standards are defined for a number of printing materials. The following paper
grades are defined by default:
• PT1 - gloss coated
• PT2 - matt-coated
• PT3 - gloss coated web

• PT5 - uncoated yellowish
Each standard defined by printing material is filed in its own folder. You can open or close these fold-
ers with a single click on an arrow or a double click on a folder icon.
You go to the overview if you double-click the name of a process standard. All the diagrams and data
tables of this process standard display.
You can select, import or export a process standard in the "Administration" view. You can edit a
selected process standard in the edit mode in "Overview". After you makes your changes, you can
write the process standard back to the MDS.
364 Version 2015

Import a standard
Click "Import" to open a dialog where you can select a file that has a process standard.
The process standards included in the shipment are filed either in the local and/or external MDS.
You can access the process standards directly through the local and/or external MDS if you are work-
ing with the new Prinect Image Control (2).
If you are working with Prinect Image Control (1) as of version 5.0/5.1 and/or QualityMonitor 2.5, you
can import the shipped or user-defined process standards to Color Toolbox. All the process standards
are located in the "ProcessStandard.ini" file. They are converted automatically during import. The dot
gains are generated automatically from the existing dot gain curves.
i
i
Note: Process standards from older QualityMonitor versions 1.1 and 2.0 are not compatible
and cannot be imported.
You can import a process standard only if you haven't already one with the same name. If you have,
you must delete or rename the existing process standard first.
You will find more details in ""Open" Dialog", Seite 66.

Export a standard
Click "Export" to open a dialog where you can save (export) your custom process standard (see also
""Save file" Dialog", Seite 75).
The process standards included in the shipment are write-protected and cannot be deleted. You can
save custom standards you created either in the local or external MDS, as you set in the "Prefer-
ences" dialog.
You can export process standards for data backup, archiving or data exchange with external media.
You must save the process standards as a separate file for every printing material that is defined. You
can give the file any name. It doesn't have to be the name of the process standard.
The name of the process standard and the selected printing material are written together with all
other data to the "ini file. These details are used when you import an exported process standard to
Color Toolbox" and the process standard is added accordingly to the list in "Administration".
366 Version 2015

Calculate wet process standard

Values measured on a wet sheet cannot be applied to a dry sheet because of the penetration behavior
of the inks into the printing material.
The process standards defined by ISO/Fogra, however, apply only to the dry state of sheets. For that
reason, a suitable wet process standard must be defined for a wet sheet.
To increase your production reliability, it is helpful if you can determine as early as possible, e.g.
during printing, whether the (dry) process standard will be reached.
Problem:
• The wet values comply with the process standard.
• The dry values do not comply with the process standard.
• The greatest deviations are found in black and yellow inks (depending on the color and printing
material).
Procedure for the Wet-Dry Assistant

1. Print a job with the CS4i or FOGRA4 control strip
· Proof print of a test chart is not necessary
· Use of a production job
2. When the job is finished, print an inking series with Prinect Image Control or Prinect Axis Control
The density range you will set can vary depending on the ink set and paper used and, as a result,
an inking difference of 2% or a density difference of 1% per zone may not be enough. You should
then check whether the standard can be reached with the maximum density or inking during
drying. If this is not the case, you should use a bigger range.

3. Measure the wet control strip with Prinect Image Control or Prinect Axis Control (inking series).
4. Wait until the sheet is dry (at least six to eight hours, perhaps even longer)
5. Measure the dry control strip
6. Check whether your inking range is sufficient.
Color Toolbox In "Measure > Ink zones > Show ΔE", check whether the ink stability curve inter-
sects the process standard curve in every color channel. If this is the case, the process standard
is reached during drying. If not, you must increase the density/inking range.
368 Version 2015

7. Go to the "Process standard" main function.

8. Start the Color Toolbox Wet-Dry Assistant in the "Process standard" main function by clicking
"Dry -> Wet".
9. Open the color data of the control strip that was measured when wet.
10. Open the color data of the control strip that was measured when dry.
The optimal zones for the dry standard are found with the help of these two measurements and the
selected process standard. The table then shows the degree to which the dry standard can be
reached with the present paper and ink set. In addition, the ink zone of the optimal inking displays
for each color. You can then use these zone details in the measuring device for the definition of a wet
ink set.
11. Save the calculated wet process standard.
If you cannot calculate a wet process standard, the color channels causing this are red. The density/
inking range used was then too small. The "Save" button is dimmed.
370 Version 2015

After the wet process standard is calculated, you can see in the "Administration" view ("Process stan-
dard" main function) that the wet process standard was generated automatically.

When this standard is saved to the MDS, Prinect Image Control (NG), for example, can now access it
automatically and work with it. In other words, printers can check whether their wet sheets comply
with the process standard. In this case they can be sure that the dry sheet also complies with the pro-
cess standard. Consequently, Analyze Point (Prinect Pressroom Manager) also can work with this wet
standard and check the effect of the process standard on production.
372 Version 2015

"Use tonal values from Calibration Manager"

To view or edit a process standard you can import dot gains (curves and associated data) from Cali-
bration Manager. To do this, you must first set up a connection to the external MDS. Proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Open the "Preferences > MDS" dialog, see ""MDS" tab", Seite 49.
2. Select "Save process standards in the Master Data Store".

3. Enter the computer name on which the external MDS is located.
4. Test the connection, if necessary.
5. Enable "Use tonal values from Calibration Manager".
6. Close the Preferences and restart the program.
7. Open the "Process standard" main function and choose a process standard.
Editing dot gain curves is only possible when you create and save process standards locally. "MDS"
must be disabled in the Preferences for this purpose.

In the Preferences, you can choose from the following options:

• "Save process standards locally" is enabled: Color Toolbox and MDS are located on the same
PC. Calibration Manager is not involved.
Dot gain curves are created and edited in Color Toolbox.
• "Use tonal values from Calibration Manager" and "Save process standards locally" are enabled:
Color Toolbox and MDS are located on the same PC. Calibration Manager provides the dot gain
curves but is not involved otherwise. You cannot edit dot gain curves.
• "Use tonal values from Calibration Manager" and "Save process standards in the Master Data
Store" are enabled: Color Toolbox, Calibration Manager and MDS can be installed on different
PCs. Calibration Manager provides and edits the dot gain curves. You can select but not edit
them in Color Toolbox.
374 Version 2015

Migrate local process standards

In the ""MDS" tab", Seite 49 in "Preferences", you can choose whether user-defined process stan-
dards will be saved locally or externally in the MDS (Master Data Store). You can migrate process
standards that are stored locally if you wish to make them available in the external MDS.
To do this, you must first set up a connection to the external MDS. Proceed as follows:

4. The "Migrate local process standards" button is now enabled. Click it to open the "Process stan-
dard migration" dialog.

5. Select all the process standards that you wish to migrate by checking the appropriate boxes.
6. Click "OK" to start migration. The dialog closes.
The migrated process standards are now available on the external MDS.
376 Version 2015

"Tools" Menu
"Tools" Menu
Functions of the "Tools" Menu

The "Tools" menu is found in all the main functions and contains the following functions:
• Tools > Color calculator: You can use the color calculator to view color data and tonal values
calculated using profile conversion tables.
• Tools > Device link profile: Two CMYK device profiles are connected to a device link profile in this
dialog.
• Tools > Profile smoothing: Press profiles are smoothed with a low-pass filter in this dialog.
• Tools > Gray Balance Calibration: In this dialog, you calculate gray balance data for gray balance
calibration in the Calibration Manager.
• Tools > Gray Balance Optimization: In this dialog, you calculate gray balance data for gray bal-
ance optimization in the Calibration Manager.

"Tools" Menu
Color calculator
You can display a color calculator with the "Tools" menu in all the main functions. In the color calcu-
lator, you can view color data and tonal values calculated using profile conversion tables:
• Input of a LAB, LCH or XYZ color value or a tonal value as CMYK and S1 thru S3.
• Selection of a PANTONE® or HKS color palette
• Selection of a spot color (Name) from the color palette The Lab values of the spot color appear
automatically and are converted by means of the ICC profile.
• Calculation and display of a tonal value using a loaded CMYK press profile for four different Ren-
dering Intents. Shown as CMYK tonal values
• Calculation and display of a tonal value using a loaded multicolor profile for four different Ren-
dering Intents. Shown as CMYK or spot color tonal values
• Calculation and display of the attainable accuracy for the reproduction of a color value using a
loaded profile (calculated print simulation).
• Display of the visual difference in color in two color patches on the monitor and display of the
differential values.
i
i
Note: You can open several color calculator dialogs at the same time with the "Tools >
Color calculator" menu and use them to compare different profiles and color data.
2 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
"Reference profile"
The color calculator can only be used for press profiles. You must open a press profile to view source
and target color values.
Click "Open..." to open the profile browser where you can select and open a press profile.
i
i
Note: The profile browser shows details about the process properties if these process
parameters are also saved in the ICC press profile.
In the ""Profile Browser Configuration" Dialog", Seite 73, you can define which parameters you want
displayed and in what order.
"Rendering intent"
"Rendering Intent" defines the approach taken in color reproduction. The target value can be calcu-
lated for four different rendering intents:
• "Perceptual": reproduction is based on perception or is "photographic" (separations). In this
variant, the colors you wish to reproduce are mapped to the color gamut of the reproduction
process (gamut mapping) so that there is no loss of definition in the image when it is repro-
duced. Normally, the very chromatic colors are desaturated slightly and a pure (neutral) white is
reproduced on the white of the medium (for example, of the paper).
• "Relative colorimetric": color matched to the medium through lightness and color cast. All col-
ors that cannot be displayed as a result of these measures are located along the outer edges of
this gamut and lose some of their definition.
• "Saturation": widely used option for reproducing chroma in colors, with less importance
attached to retaining lightness. This method is not really suitable for traditional color reproduc-
tion but rather for synthetically produced images such as business graphics. Now and again, the
"Saturation" intent is implemented in profiles in such a way that you obtain the same results as
with "Perceptual".
• "Absolute colorimetric": refers to colorimetrically accurate reproductions. This is particularly

important for proofs or soft proofs. All colors that are in the displayable range of the process are
reproduced without any colorimetric changes. However, to obtain this result, all non-displayable
colors must be confined to the outer edges of the gamut, and as a result, a greater loss of defi-
nition can occur here in this restricted color gamut than with "Relative Colorimetric".
"Table"
You can select a PANTONE® or HKS color palette in this list box. The names of all colors in this palette
are then show in the "Name" box. Select "manually" to enter your own color values. In this case, the
"Name" box is disabled.

"Tools" Menu
The following tables can be selected:

• PANTONE® color bridge coated/uncoated/coated EURO
• PANTONE® solid coated/uncoated/matte/

coated 2006/uncoated 2006/matte 2006
• PANTONE® solid to process coated/EURO
• PANTON PLUSE® solid to process coated/uncoated
• PANTONE® process coated/EURO/uncoated
• PANTONE® solid in hexachrome coated
• PANTONE® hexachrome coated/uncoated
• PANTONE® pastel coated/uncoated/coated 2006/uncoated 2006
• PANTONE® metallic coated/coated 2006
• PANTONE® GOE coated/uncoated
• HKS-E_2001
• HKS-K_2001
• HKS-N_2001
• HKS-Z_2001
"Name"
Select a color from the currently selected palette in this list box.
"Input"
As a source value, type any Lab, XYZ or LCH value (from existing color samples or known color data).
The values are automatically converted when you switch over the model in the popup menu.
"Output"
The target value is then calculated for the source value using the loaded profile. The CMYK value and
the ΔE deviation to the reference profile that display depend on the profile that was selected.
"S1" thru "S4" refer to the spot color channels. These boxes are enabled only if a multicolor profile
(Multicolor option) is open. These display the additional colors.
If the names of the colors are known, they appear as a tooltip when you point the mouse pointer at
the initial letter.
"Changes"
The accuracy that is possible for the reproduction of the source value is calculated for the print pro-
cess set by means of the profile and shown as color difference values (color distance) ΔEab or ΔE00
(2000), ΔL, Δa and Δb, ΔH (hue distance) and ΔC (chroma distance).
4 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
The two color patches shown (displayed on the monitor using a fixed sRGB profile) let you visually
compare the difference in color between the source and target value:
• The upper color patch shows the original value.
• The lower color patch shows the value calculated using the loaded profile (soft proof).
i
i
Note: The color difference values calculated are specified as ΔEab as well as the newer ΔE00
(2000). ΔEab is the current definition for calculation of color distance based on the ISO stan-
dard of 1976. The new formula ΔEab is noticeably more complex and gives you more accu-
rate values (see also following example). ΔE00 is more suited than ΔEab especially when
replacing spot colors.
"Include quantization effect"

The ΔE values are calculated from the comparison of the original CIELab values with the result of the
internal conversion of CIELab to CMYK and the transformation of CMYK back to CIELab. Normally,
these values are calculated with the highest level of accuracy possible but which cannot be achieved
in real conditions.

"Tools" Menu
Example showing quantization effect excluded/included for a 7c multicolor profile and a Pantone
spot color:
Calculation
Click the "Blue arrow to right" button to convert the input color value (Lab, XYZ or LCH) to the output
tonal value (CMYK and, if necessary, S1, S2, S3).
Click the "Blue arrow to left" button to convert CMYK and, if necessary, S1, S2, S3 to Lab, XYZ or LCH.
Usage
If you use the color calculator on several press profiles, you can determine which profile is best suited
to obtain a selected hue if the latter is changed by gamut mapping. You can open the color calculator
several times for this.
For that reason, this function is very suitable for simulating the reproduction of spot colors and in-
house colors.
For example, you want to decide whether a certain hue can still be printed true-to-color on a less
expensive type of paper or whether you have to select a different quality. By selecting the appropriate
profile, you simulate the various types of paper and can then judge how much they deviate by com-
paring the reproduced colors.
6 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
Device link profile

You can open the "Device link profile" dialog using the "Tools" menu in all the main functions. Two
CMYK device profiles are connected to a device link profile in this dialog. You can also set special
options for keeping black plus CMY and RGB colors in this dialog.
"Calculation of device link profiles"

Device link profiles describe the reproduction properties of an entire process chain. You can use
them, for example, to simulate newsprint on a proof system.
In the method used in this case, the device link profile will be calculated from existing profiles of the
two processes or print conditions. Total dot area and gamut mapping can be taken from the press
profile, and black can be set with the appropriate parameters.
First of all, the profiles you want to link are opened. "Profile 1" is the profile that describes the color
space of the input device and "Profile 2" is the profile that describes the color space of the output
device.
Following that, the options for totaling the profiles are selected (rendering intent, preserve black, pre-
serve colors and black point compensation).

"Tools" Menu
"Profile 1"
Click "Open" to open the profile browser where you can select and open a source profile.
"Profile 2"
Click "Open" to open the profile browser where you can select and open a target profile.
"Rendering intent"
Then select one of the four rendering intents for this target profile. The rendering intent defines the
approach taken in color reproduction.
• "Rel(ative) colorimetric": color matched to the medium through lightness and color cast. All
colors that cannot be displayed as a result of these measures are located along the outer edges
of this gamut and lose some of their definition.
• "Saturation": widely used option for reproducing chroma in colors, with less importance
attached to retaining lightness. This method is not really suitable for traditional color reproduc-
tion but rather for synthetically produced images such as business graphics. Now and again, the
"Saturation" intent is implemented in profiles in such a way that you obtain the same results as
with "Perceptual".
"Absolute colorimetric": refers to colorimetrically accurate reproductions. This is particularly

important for proofs or soft proofs. All colors that are in the displayable range of the process are
reproduced without any colorimetric changes. However, to obtain this result, all non-displayable col-
ors must be confined to the outer edges of the gamut, and as a result, a greater loss of definition can
occur here in this restricted color gamut than with "Relative Colorimetric". In addition, the hue of the
source process is simulated in the target process.
8 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
"Preserve black"
During a device color space conversion, you can select four different options for keeping black:
• "None": Black of the source profile (Profile 1) is not preserved and is replaced by that of the tar-
get profile (Profile 2). This is always a good idea if the processes differ a lot, for example, going
from offset printing (chromatic reproduction) to newspaper printing (achromatic reproduction).
• "K=K": Black remains identical. Only the chromatic colors C, M and Y are converted to the target
CMY color space, K is not converted, so that the hue effect is kept as far as possible. This option
makes sense, for example, whenever one of the chromatic process colors is to be replaced by a
similar color and all the other process conditions are to stay the same. This setting is also ideal
for documents with a large amount of text and line art. Through "K=K", you can avoid that black
elements suddenly have a considerable amount of chromatic colors. The total dot area of the
output profile is NOT preserved in this process! For example, CMY 100%, 100%, 100% becomes
95%, 100%, 85% + 100% black.
i
i
Note: This setting can cause problems during output if the black inks have different densi-
ties in the source and target color spaces.
• "Basic": Like with "K=K", C, M and Y are converted to the target CMY color space, K is con-
verted to the target density with the help of a gradation curve. This setting is also ideal for doc-
uments with a large amount of text and line art (grayscale images). The gradation curve solves
any problems you may have with differing black ink densities. The total dot area of the output
profile is NOT preserved in this process! For example, CMY 100%, 100%, 100% becomes 95%,
100%, 85% + 100% black.
i
i
Note: With this method, it is possible that a 100% black may not be reached and text and
graphics may be reproduced inadequately in some cases.
• "Special" (default): This is a special setting that works as follows:
· C, M, Y are converted to the target CMY color space for mid-range and light hues. K is
converted by means of a gradation curve. The lightness curve is kept in this process.
· A special four-dimensional model keeping K is used for dark hues. The original black is
kept in the shadows. The chromatic colors are converted in such a way that color per-
ception is preserved as far as possible.
The overall performance is a mixture of the "None" and "Basic" settings in "Preserve black".
Extensive tests have shown this procedure to be the best. The "Special" parameter eliminates
most of the problems in complex documents. This parameter is only provided by the Heidelberg
CMM. This setting is suitable for documents with text, color and gray images. The total dot area
of the output profile is preserved!

"Tools" Menu
"Preserve colors"
You can choose from five different options for keeping colors when creating device link profiles:
• "None": The colors of the primary and secondary tonal values of the device link profile are
taken from "Profile 2", the press profile. The color composition of the input profile is overwritten.
This is always meaningful when the processes differ greatly from each other.
• "Primary": The solid tints of the primary chromatic colors (cyan (C), magenta (M) and yellow
(Y)) are kept.
• "Primaries and tonal values": The smooth shadings (blends) are preserved as well as the solid
tints. These are single-color tonal gradations of the chromatic colors going from 0% to 100%.
• "+ Secondary": In addition to the solid tints of the primary chromatic colors (cyan, magenta
and yellow), the two-color overprints red (MY), green (CY) and blue (CM) plus the overprints of
a chromatic color with black (CK, MK, YK) are preserved.
• "Secondaries and tonal values": The two-color smooth shadings of the chromatic colors or of
a chromatic color plus black are preserved in addition to the primary colors (cyan, magenta and
yellow) with single-color smooth shadings and the secondary colors (red, green and blue).
You should prefer this setting in day-to-day operations when you want to save chromatic inks
and preserve the overprint properties by creating special color compositions in the data to be
printed (achromatic composition).
"Black point compensation"

The "Black point compensation" option is only effective in combination with the "Rel. colorimetric"
rendering intent. With this option, the different shadows (the maximum achievable four-color black
in the print) in the input and the output processes are mapped to each other. The same is done with
the chromatic colors. This makes shadow compensation a special form of gamut mapping (linear
gamut mapping). Apply this option is feasible if the gamut differences between two processes are not
too great and the objective is to obtain a reproduction as uniform as possible.
"Keep GCR"
In GCR (Gray Component Replacement), conversion from the Device Link is by default to the target
GCR values. In PDF documents that already have elements with a higher GCR value or have user-
defined elements with a high amount of K, this can result in a reduction of the calculated K percent
compared to the initial value. If you enable "Keep GCR", the GCR values and consequently the per-
centage of K are preserved for these elements. The total dot area of the output profile is preserved!
10 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
Standard process:
"Keep GCR" enabled:
"Profile description"
The description tag is generated automatically from the names of the source and target profile and
the profile parameters. This entry is suggested as the file name of the ICC target profile when it is
being saved.
Use this name or type any description for the ICC target profile into this box. We recommend that your
description shows you at once what type of profile it is.
i
i
Note: If you use a device link profile as a source profile in MetaDimension or Prinect Pre-
press Manager, any existing target profile will be ignored. For that reason, we recommend
that you assign a name that contains a reference to a link profile.
"Calculate device link profile"

RGB is calculated to CMYK or CMYK to CMYK when you create device link profiles.
Click "Calculate" to link both selected ICC profiles and calculate the device link profile.
An appropriate message appears if calculation is successful.
"Save profile"
Click "Save" to open the "File Save" dialog.
The "Start folder for ICC profiles" defined in "Preferences" displays showing all inputs. By default, the
file name box displays the profile description. "ICC profile (.icc)" is selected as the file type.
If needed, you can change these settings.
Click "Save" (in the "File Save" dialog) to save the device link profile.

"Tools" Menu
After calculation of the profile is finished, close the dialog box by clicking "OK".
i
i
Note: Device link profiles are not supported by all applications. However, numerous work-
flow programs and RIPs support device link profiles (e.g. Heidelberg's Prinect Integration
Manager and MetaDimension).
You can find more information in the brochure "Prinect User Guides – Color and Quality: DeviceLink
Profiles".
12 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
Profile smoothing
You can filter ICC profiles with a low-pass filter in Color Toolbox. This function is optional and you can
display it in all the main functions using the "Tools" menu. The filter creates smoother transitions in
the color space and is applicable mainly for press profiles.
"Correct profile by smoothing" Dialog

You can call up this dialog with the "Tools > Profile smoothing" menu.
"Convert profile with filter properties"

This is where you set a low-pass filter to make the color space even smoother and thus enhance the
profile quality.
"Input profile name"
Click "Open..." (beside Input profile name) to open the profile browser where you can select and open
an input profile.
"Output profile name"
The name of the input profile appended by "_Filtered" automatically displays in the text box.
You can overwrite this name or click "Open..." (beside Output profile name) to open the profile
browser where you can select the output profile.

"Tools" Menu
"Rendering intent"
Profile conversion occurs with the "Perceptual" rendering intent. Enabling this option also lets you
enable the additional calculation with the "Rel(ative) colorimetric" and "Abs(olute) colorimetric" ren-
dering intents.
• "Rel(ative) colorimetric": color matched to the medium through lightness and color cast. All
colors that cannot be displayed as a result of these measures are located along the outer edges
of this gamut and lose some of their definition.
• "Abs(olute) colorimetric": refers to colorimetrically accurate reproductions. This is particu-

larly important for proofs or soft proofs. All colors that are in the displayable range of the pro-
cess are reproduced without any colorimetric changes. However, to obtain this result, all non-
displayable colors must be confined to the outer edges of the gamut, and as a result, a greater
loss of definition can occur here in this restricted color gamut than with "Relative Colorimetric".
"Profile smoothing"
You can set a value between "0" (no smoothing) and "10" (maximum smoothing) using the slider.
14 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
Gray Balance Calibration

You can open the "Gray balance calibration" dialog using the "Tools" menu in all the main functions.
In this dialog, you can set gray balance data for process calibration (see "Calculate Correction Data",
Seite 19).
General Information about Gray Balance

The gray balance is defined as a "set of dot gain values for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow" that results
in an achromatic color when printed and viewed according to specified conditions. Print conditions
are defined in the applicable process standards ("Process Standard Offset Print" published by bvdm,
German Association of Print and Media) based on ISO standards ("ISO12647-2:2004/Amd1 2007").
Gray balance optimization does not contradict the ISO standard and the Process Standard Offset
(PSO) but is a sensible complementary method. The correct perception of gray values is a key quality
feature of a printed product. Gray values deviating from the printing material regarded as neutral
color are rated disturbing.
There are special control elements for visual and metrological checking of the gray balance, such as
"ECI_GrayConS_FOGRA39".
Gray Balance in Real Printing

As a rule, prepress uses standard profiles for defined print conditions. These standard profiles apply
to defined tints and dot gains on a defined paper grades.
One example is the "ISOcoated_v2_eci" profile based on characterization data FOGRA39L for paper
grades 1 and 2 (coated paper). This profile features a specific chromatic gray axis resulting from the
overprinting of the Cyan, Magenta and Yellow process colors.
But deviations in gray rendition (paper white, inks, ink absorption, screening, etc) occur again and
again in daily print shop practice. This means the gray balance in a print process is not a static but
rather a dynamic factor depending on various parameters and therefore is prone to more or less read-
justment as need be.

"Tools" Menu
The rendition of gray will vary on different paper whites (e.g. due to optical brighteners) and with dif-
ferent inks in spite of correctly set tints and correctly calibrated dot gains.
Processes where defined dot gains are replaced with a defined gray balance cannot be correctly
described by conventional process calibration methods and require new methods.
Gray Balance Calibration

Heidelberg's gray balance calibration is a method for setting up the gray balance for a four-color print
process. The advantage of this method is an even gray balance and a continually optimized layer
thickness or color of primary inks:
• Color values remain unchanged.
• Dot gain is adapted.
Gray balance calibration is suited for visually mapping print conditions that do not exactly meet the
standard:
• paper grades and paper tints deviating from the reference
• inks deviating from the reference
• screens deviating from the reference
• ink absorptions deviating from the reference
16 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
Workflow
1. Linearize the platesetter and plate making (Calibration Tool)
Linearize the platesetter as usual.
2. Image a plate set with a test chart without process calibration

Imaging is done with linear printing plates and the "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual/Random" or
"ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual/Random" test chart. The IDEAlliance P2P25 test chart is now
also supported. In addition, the printing plates should have elements for a process check (print
control strips, step wedges) and for a visual check of the gray balance.
3. Run the press to a standard printing condition

Linear plates are run to standard values for inking using the color bar.
4. Press proof the plate set using the process standard

After sheets are up to color and conform to standard values (usually run several hundred to a
thousand sheets to stabilize the press conditions) several samples are pulled and inspected for
any possible defects.
5. Measure the test chart (Color Toolbox)

The test charts are measured with Prinect Image Control or a suitable external measuring device
and averaged, smoothed and analyzed in the Quality Monitor of Color Toolbox.
6. Optional: Calculate an ICC profile (Color Toolbox)

A standard ICC profile can be created from the linear test forms using the Profile Tool. The profile
settings for area coverage, black composition and gamut mapping are of no significance here as
only the absolute color values from the ICC profile are used for gray balance optimization.
7. Calculate gray balance optimization (Color Toolbox)

The gray balance optimization feature in the Prinect Color Toolbox calculates and saves a cor-
rection data record by analyzing the characterization data or the ICC profile of the reference
printing condition and the characterization data (ISO 12642-2 or P2P25) or the ICC profile of the
linear print.
8. Import the color data of gray balance optimization to Calibration Tool

In the Calibration Tool a process calibration is calculated based on a linear set of process curves
and saved in the internal database.
9. Output and print a set of calibrated printing plates

When the process calibration is activated, the calibrated set of plates is output again and printed
according to the process standard in use. Again the sheets are brought up color using the same
standard condition as the linear run, and again the press is allowed to stabilize. When sheets are
ready several samples can be removed and checked both visually and metrological. At this point
to the results can be compared to a proof which corresponds to the reference printing condition.

"Tools" Menu
10. Measure the test chart again

The calibrated test chart can be used for process monitoring and creating a profile of the printing
process during production. The inking values of the printing process and the (various) tone value
increase curves can be saved as target values in the Quality Monitor.
11. Check process in print

Besides a check of the color values and the (different) dot gains, it is also possible to use an ECI/
BVDM special gray control strip. This strip (large, medium or small) must be placed on the press
sheet for the check. After it is measured, it can be evaluated with the Quality Monitor.
12. Iterative gray balance optimization

Iterative optimization of gray balance is a feature worth using if you discover that gray has to be
constantly readjusted during a day's work. For this purpose, place the ECI/BVDM gray control
strip for the appropriate print condition on a press sheet (see Gray Balance Optimization).
i
i
Note: You can find more details in the following brochure:
Prinect User Guide – Color and Quality
Gray balance optimization

Fundamentals and Application (3rd Edition)
18 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
Calculate Correction Data

1. Open the "Gray balance calibration" dialog with "Tools > Gray balance calibration".
"Calculate gray balance correction data for a process calibration"

The first step is to open either a reference profile or reference data (characterization data).
The second step is to open the color data or the ICC profile of the printing process to be calibrated
and select the correction data format. Gray correction data can be calculated with 5 or 8 reference
points. You set the format in the "Data format" list box.
If gray balance calibration with five reference points is selected, corrections are calculated at 25%,
50% and 75% (the values relate to cyan; magenta and yellow are lower at 19%, 40% and 66%). This
would seem to be adequate in most cases. Gray balance calibration with eight reference points is
slightly more accurate. In this case, corrections are calculated for 15%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60% and
75%.
Gray balance calibration at values greater than 75% is not advisable because at these values black
already dominates in the usual color separations. This can cause unnaturally sharp corrections if the
three-color overprint deviates greatly from the reference values in the shadows.
At the same time as gray balance calibration, the dot gain of black is corrected. The number of refe-
rence points here is also five or eight, with these values geared towards cyan.

"Tools" Menu
Calculation starts after you have set your data. This presently takes a few seconds. After that you can
save the correction data for further processing in Calibration Tool.
You can view the correction data in the tables on the right of the dialog. Interpretation of the numbers
is somewhat unusual: You must now correct the reference tonal values on the left by a calibration
curve to produce the process tonal values on the right. Calibration has to change the reference value
C = 25% into the process value C = 21.6%. This also applies to the values for magenta and yellow.
This behavior becomes clear if you take a look at the dot gains again in the diagram below (the dot
gains are clearly too high).
20 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
Gray Balance Optimization

You can open the "Gray balance optimization" dialog using the "Tools" menu in all the main functions.
In this dialog you can calculate the required gray balance optimization data for process calibration in
order to optimize the gray balance.
Gray balance optimization is used in cases where it is clear that manual correction of gray must be
done at the press on a regular basis.
Gray balance optimization optimizes existing process calibrations to enhance their gray balance. Suit-
able minispots are also printed on the production jobs for this (ECI-GrayCON_L. M or S). The use of
a G7-compatible print control strip is now possible if you are printing compliant with the G7 specifi-
cation. These measured data are evaluated in the Color Toolbox. After that, the correction data for
process calibration are calculated. These data are then imported to the Calibration Tool and set off
against the existing process calibration. Afterwards a new plate set is imaged and a new proof print
is made to check dot gain and gray balance.

"Tools" Menu
ECI together with BVDM developed gray control strips for the usual print conditions for a visual check
and a technical one with an instrument. For this purpose, the color data for specific black patches
(30%, 50%, 70%) were determined on the printing material and chromatic color combinations with
the same degree of brightness were calculated from the ICC profile. These two patches (black, chro-
matic gray) were placed side by side, making a visual comparison possible. A technical comparison
using an instrument is also possible and implemented in the Quality Monitor.
Gray balance optimization in the Prinect workflow

Print minispots
• use a calibrated process as a basis
• use ECI_GrayCon_L/M/S (see ""ECI_GrayConL", "ECI_GrayConM" and ECI_GrayConS" with 52,

32 or 6 Patches", Seite 126) if you are printing using ISO 12647-2 or Process Standard Offset
(PSO) or use a G7 print control strip if you are printing using the G/ specification.
Gray balance optimization

The color data of the minispots and a reference print condition are used in the Profile Tool to
calculate the correction data. Correction data
The correction data are saved in Color Toolbox and imported to the Calibration Tool.
Calibration Tool
In Calibration Tool, the existing process calibration is optimized using the correction data from
Color Toolbox.
Prinect Workflow
The new calibration is enabled for plate output.
22 Version 2015
"Tools" Menu
Procedure
1. The color data of the minispots are checked in the Quality Monitor in the "Analysis" main func-
tion. The data of five to eight press sheets are used for this. Ideally there are two ECI-Gray-
CON_xx control elements on each press sheet. The data outliers are disabled; the remaining
data sets are averaged to generate the correction data.
2. Go to gray balance optimization with the "Tools" menu. First, open the reference profile of the
target process and after that the data that were averaged beforehand. Then calculate the correc-
tion values that will display in the table on the right. To conclude, save your correction data.
3. In the Calibration Tool open the process calibration matching the process. Select "Curve Modifi-
cation" and "Correction of Gray Balance". A window for the import of the correction data opens.
After the correction data are included, image a new plate set and make a proof print to check
the enhanced gray balance.
New minispots for the evaluation of gray balance

Four variants of a new minispot are also available for the evaluation of the gray balance:
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_39: Paper grade 1 and 2, gloss coated and matt coated
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_43: FM screen, paper grade 1 and 2, gloss coated and matt coated
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_44: FM screen, paper grade 4, uncoated white
• PCM_GrayConL_i1_47: Paper grade 4, uncoated white
The advantages of these minispots are that there are 10 color patches for each color channel, in addi-
tion six color patches for the evaluation and calculation of the gray balance: K30, K50, K70 as well
as CMY30, CMY50 and CMY70. You can measure these strips with the X-Rite EyeOne strip in two
measure runs.

Multicolor
Multicolor
What is Multicolor?
The term 'multicolor' comprises all technologies and processes that produce print results in a quality
superior to that of conventional four-color printing. These include:
• printing with five, six or seven process colors
• the use of spot colors
• the use of GCR reproduction
• the use of special screening methods
• the use of high-quality printing materials
• surface treatment of the printed products
Multicolor opens up a market segment to repro users that is characterized by high quality, high color
fidelity and enhanced color gamut. Seven-color printing expands the color space by special ink sets
with purer and more chromatic colors: in addition to cyan, magenta and yellow, the red, green and
blue inks are also changed.
As a result, it is possible to match real colors more closely. Consequently, reproductions with a
greater color intensity are possible. These points are interesting for art reproduction and for printing
calendars, posters or high-quality brochures.
Special techniques for separation such as GCR reproduction produce more stable neutral tones as
these are generated with black ink only. In addition to enhanced shadow definition, there is also less
color drift and wet-on-wet problems with this technology.
Frequency-modulated screening suppresses moirés and the formation of rosettes, thus producing a
photo-realistic quality in printing. This method is especially suited to printing with more than four
inks.
Multicolor is used to refer to printing processes where the color space is extended by additional chro-
matic process colors. In this process, separation of image data and graphics is not only with the nor-
mal process colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) but also with additional chromatic process col-
ors (HiFi Color, Hexachrome, five, six or seven-color printing).
By contrast, all processes where any number of single spot colors are used are not referred to as mul-
ticolor. In this case, there is no separation of image data and/or graphics with the additional colors.
It is also not a multicolor process if one of the process colors is replaced by a spot color (e.g. magenta
by red) in conventional four-color printing.

Multicolor
Multicolor profiles are especially suited for the use of classic screening methods. Each color is repro-
duced by a maximum of four optimal colors. This minimizes the risk of moiré. The use of amplitude-
modulated screening is possible. The screen angles for the additional colors are selected so that the
angle of the complementary color is used, for example:
• Orange with the screen angle of cyan, its complementary color
• Green with the screen angle of magenta, its complementary color
• The formation of moiré, however, must be expected if blue is used with the screen angle of its
complementary color (yellow). For that reason, it's better to use the angle of magenta or black.
Definition of the Process Colors for Multicolor
Combinations
The vertices cyan (C), magenta (M) and yellow (Y) on the a*b* plane produce three sectors. In mul-
ticolor, one additional color is added to these process colors per sector. Together with black, the fol-
lowing combinations result:
26 Version 2015
Multicolor
• Five-color printing:
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black and red (or orange)
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black and green
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black and blue (or purple)
• Six-color printing:
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, red (or orange) and green
· Hexachrome: Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, orange and green
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, red (or orange) and blue
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, green and blue (or purple)
• Seven-color printing:
· Cyan, magenta, yellow, black, red (or orange), green and blue (or purple)

Multicolor
Multicolor Features in Color Toolbox

Creating ICC profiles for five, six or seven process colors using the integrated Profile Tool application
is a "real" multicolor function (see Creating Multicolor Profiles).
The color calculator lets you calculate target values for four different Rendering Intents using a
loaded multicolor profile and view them as CMYK and spot color values. The accuracy that is possible
for the reproduction of the source value is calculated for the set printing process by means of the pro-
file and shown as differential color values.
It is also possible to convert percent target values (CMYK and spot color values) into Lab, XYZ or LCH
values.
Various application functions for evaluating and checking quality data are enhanced by Multicolor.
For example, you can check the print quality by using additional spot colors (not process colors)
because Color Toolbox supports the import and export of eight color channels. This means that you
can evaluate all the control strips used in Prinect Image Control.
The "Prinect_6S" and "Prinect_6S+" control strips let you check the dot gain for as many as twelve
the colors depends on the setup of the printing units in Prinect Image Control and it can be changed
there (see examples 1a and 1b).
Example 1a: Display of the dot gain curves of colors 1 thru 6 ("Prinect_6S" control strip)
28 Version 2015
Multicolor
Example 1b: Display of the dot gain curves of colors 7 thru 12 ("Prinect_6S+" control strip)
Process standards
At present, there are no process standards defined for printing processes with more than four process
colors. However, you can use the appropriate functions (e.g. dot gain, ink stability and gradual fading)
to check whether the color data of the four conventional process colors comply with a process stan-
dard you selected (see Example 2). In doing so, remember that the nominal values and tolerances in
the process standard are specified for colors of a four-color printing process. Special color sets are
used for HiFi Color/Multicolor printing processes. Consequently, the defaults can vary greatly.

Multicolor
Example 2: "Check measurement data for compliance with process standard" Only the process colors (cyan, magenta, yel-
low and black) are evaluated.
Color Toolbox 13.0 lets you create your own process standards for multicolors and spot colors. For
Multicolor printing processes, you can define reference and tolerance values for a maximum of seven
process colors (see Combinations):
• for the primary colors cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K)
• for as many as three additional secondary colors, red (R) or orange (O), green (G) and/or blue
(B) or purple (V)
30 Version 2015
Multicolor
Example 3a: "Select and edit process standard". Display of a multicolor process standard for seven colors.
Example 3b: "Check measurement data for compliance with process standard" All process colors defined (CMYK and RGB)
are evaluated.

Multicolor
Creating Multicolor Profiles

You can create multicolor profiles with Color Toolbox 13.0. To do this, you need the color data of spe-
cial multicolor test charts that you obtain either by measuring a suitable two-page test chart in "Mea-
sure" or directly from Prinect Image Control.
Multicolor test charts

Color Toolbox has special test charts as PDF files on a data CD shipped with the software. The follo-
wing two-page test charts are available:
• 5 colors (5 C): test charts for CMYK+R, CMYK+O, CMYK+G, CMYK+B or CMYK+V
• 6 colors (6 C): test charts for CMYK+RG, CMYK+OG, CMYK+RB, CMYK+OB, CMYK+GB
CMYK+GV
• 7 colors (7 C): test charts for CMYK+RGB, CMYK+OGB, CMYK+RGV or CMYK+OGV
You select the test chart that suits your work and then print it with the printing process you want.
i
i
Note: Field tests have shown that zonal influences can be minimized if you print the test
chart pages several times and average the measured data. The double positioning of the
two test chart pages at diagonal opposites on one sheet has also proven to be successful
(see diagram below).
To measure the data, pull three sheets so that you can average the color data of six elements in each
case.
32 Version 2015
Multicolor
You measure the printed test chart with a spectrophotometer in "Measure". The special test charts
suited for automatic measurement in the scan mode (with X-Rite Eye-One iSis) are located on the
DVD in the "DVD\Prinect Profile Tool Test Charts\Testcharts\Testcharts PDF\MultiColor Charts\5C
(6C or 7C)\i1-iSis" folders. As an alternative, you can measure the data in Prinect Image Control and
export them to Color Toolbox.
Procedure for Measuring Data in Color Toolbox:

To measure your data, create an empty color data file to which the color data will be sent directly
during online measurement.
1. Call up the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog by clicking "New" in the button bar
or with the "File > New" menu.
2. In this dialog, select the multicolor test chart for five, six or seven colors and the spot colors you
want.
3. Confirm with "OK".
The test chart consists of two pages. You can switch the view with the list box at the top right of the
dialog.

Multicolor
4. Open the "Color measurement of test chart" dialog by clicking "Measure" or with the "Test chart
> Measure" menu.
8. Click "Start" when calibration is finished.
9. Follow the instructions that are necessary for measuring the colors with your device.
10. Measure the first page of the test chart.
11. Check the measured values by clicking "Check".
12. Go to the second page of the test chart.
13. Measure and check this page too.
14. Then click "Save measurement data".
The color data of both pages are saved together in one file.
Importing the Measured Data from Prinect Image Control

In Prinect Image Control, the measured data of both test chart pages are saved separately in two
color data files. You must save these two files as one joint one if you wish to copy the data to Color
Toolbox.
34 Version 2015
Multicolor
1. Open the file with the color data of the first test chart page (e.g. "<jobname><date>Sheet1-
Mask-7cCMYKRGB-Page1-42x30-1.txt").
The list box at the top right no longer appears because the file only has the color data of one page.
2. Open the file with the color data of the second test chart page (e.g. "<jobname><date>Sheet1-
Mask-7cCMYKRGB-Page2-42x30-2.txt").
The list box displays again. The first page of the test chart displays but the file name of the second
page!

Multicolor
3. Click "Save measurement data".

The name of the second page is entered as the file name.
4. If necessary, change this name and then click "Save".
The color data of both pages are saved together in one file.
36 Version 2015
Multicolor
Smoothing of the Color Data
i
i
Note: Depending on the quality of your color data, you can still smooth them with factor "5"
and enable the automatic plausibility check (display this dialog with "Test Chart > Correct -
Smoothing").
Setup and Calculation

You can set up and calculate ICC profiles for five, six or seven colors from the color data in "Create".

Multicolor
Procedure:
1. Open the "Profile Generation Setup" dialog by clicking "Profile parameters" or with the "Profile
> Profile parameters" menu.
2. Define the following settings:

• Total dot area: 330%
• "Maximum black": 95%
• To have stable printing, gray is generated by GCR mainly with black.
"GCR setting/Black generation" > "GCR black generation" > "GCR value": 50%
This increases stability because no additional colors are needed for gray.
i
i
Note: You can also set higher values for GCR (e.g. 60% or 90%) that give you usable
results in printing.
Other settings are possible, in particular UCR.
3. Open the "Profile calculation" dialog by clicking "Calculate" or with the "Profile > Calculate"
menu.
38 Version 2015
Multicolor
4. Select "Large (16 bit profile)" as the profile size.

The profile size lets you determine what amount in the profile is needed for simulation of the printing
process.
• "Large" profile size: extended proof area
• "Medium" profile size: reduced proof area
• "Small" profile size: insufficient proof area
5. Check or add to the profile description that was set automatically.

6. Start calculation with "Start".
7. After calculation of the profile is finished, close the dialog by clicking "OK".
8. Click "Save" to save your profile as the suggested file name.
i
i
Note: Multicolor profiles do not support inverse gamut mapping (perceptual Rendering
Intent).
You can supplement existing ICC profiles and/or make corrections to them in the "Edit" main func-
tion.

Multicolor
Match a Multicolor Profile to Other Print Conditions

You can convert a multicolor profile if print conditions change (e.g. values of the process colors or
paper white).
Up to now, you had to make another proof print of the multicolor test chart with the modified process
colors and measure it. After that, you had to calculate a multicolor profile with the new parameters.
Color Toolbox 13.0 lets you convert the existing multicolor profile by entering the Lab values of the
modified process colors or of paper white. The existing multicolor profile is matched automatically
when you enter the new values and you can continue to use it.
Conversion of the color data (Lab color values) of paper white for a modified process
Conversion of color data (Lab color values) for a modified process
40 Version 2015
Multicolor
You can obtain the measured data by proofing and measuring a minispot with the modified print con-
ditions. Use one of the following minispots that suits your printing process.
PCS_5C for CMYK+R
PCS_5C for CMYK+G
PCS_5C for CMYK+B
PCS_6C for CMYK+R+G
PCS_7C for CMYK+R+G+B
This means that you do not have print and measure a (large) test chart and also do not have calculate
a new profile.

General Information about Preferences

"File > Preferences" invokes the function for basic settings in all the main functions. The "Prefer-
ences" dialog displays and you can define the following defaults after selecting the tab you want:
• General settings such as set file locations, select the language of the GUI, switch to the easy
mode (see the "General" tab)
• Settings for measuring colors in "Measure" (see the "Measurement" tab)
• Selection of a reference file for data comparison in "Compare" (see the "Compare" tab)
• Selection of maximum four hot folders and their backup folders for the analysis results in "Anal-
ysis" (see the "Hotfolder" tab)
• Settings for MDS (Master Data Store) for editing process standards (see the "MDS" tab)
• Selection of a License Server (see the "License Server" tab)
• Settings for the proof report in "Compare" (see the "CIE Report" Tab)
• Settings for the CIE report in "Compare" (see the "CIE Report" Tab)
• Setting of tolerances for ink zones and gradual fading in "Measure" (see the "Tol [%]" (tolerance)
tab)
• Settings for a custom process standard index that you can use to customize the weighting of the
quality criteria (dot gain, ΔE (Delta E) and gray balance) (see the "Individual Quality Index (IQI)"
tab)
You can define preferences in every main function, irrespective of whether they are to be applied at
once. Some of the preferences do not affect the current document but only new ones you create or
the next document you open. Some preferences require that you restart the application, for example,
for a language switchover.
i
i
Note: After installation and initial launch of the application, we recommend that you cus-
tomize your preferences to your needs.

"Preferences" Dialog
"General" tab
In the "General" tab, you can define the following settings:

• Define locations separately for color data files, ICC profiles and series (Open/Save).
Click the button with the three dots to change the default location and select the one you want
for the data in the dialog that appears.
• Enable or disable a filter for files coming from Prinect Image Control.
When this function is enabled, the "Image Control Filechooser" window displays with six sorting
criteria that you can use for fast file selection: "Machine", "Job", "Date", "Print", "Sheet" and
"Element". Files created with Prinect Image Control are automatically given a name when saved
and, as a result, have the necessary information for the sorting criteria. The names of color data
files are broken down and the identifiers are added to the relevant lists.
• Select the language for the user interface.
Afterwards, you must restart the program.
44 Version 2015
• Switch to the easy mode.
Only the overall results of the quality assessments (reports and proof statistics) are displayed in
the "Compare" main function.
• Enable the function for setting and saving process parameters.
If this function is enabled, you can enter process parameters and save them along with the mea-
sured data.
The dialogs for entering process parameters are disabled if the function is not selected, and pro-
cess parameters are not saved along with the measured data.
• Enable the function for calculating tonal vales based on ISO 12647-1 if there are no tonal values.
Dot gain is determined from measured density values. If no density values were measured and
this function is disabled, you can calculate the density values from the spectral values or, if the
latter were also not measured, by general approximation from the Lab (xyz) values.
• Allow suppression of message dialogs
Messages that are issued when non-conform data are imported are suppressed when this func-
tion is enabled.
You can suppress further messages by checking the box in a message if this function is disabled.
• Fixed axis scaling in trend (CIE report)/Fixed axis scaling in trend (dot gain report) and/or Fixed
axis scaling in trend (density report)
A fixed axis scaling instead of a dynamic one is used for all diagrams if this function is enabled.
This lets you identify the analysis results more easily (especially for dot gain analysis) and com-
pare them with each other.

"Measurement" tab
In the "Measurement" tab, you can define various preferences for measuring colors in documents:
• the measurement conditions to be used:
· density status, e.g. "ISO 5-3 Status T" or "Status DIN16536 (NB)" Your selection impacts
some calculations.
· with or without filters (D50, UV, Pol) Your selection does not affect calculations.
i
i
Note: If you change the type of filter in the "Color measurement" dialog, this change is
applied automatically to the Preferences.
· backing (black or white). Your selection does not affect calculations.

· density display (absolute or relative). Your selection impacts some calculations.
46 Version 2015
• whether to show a message if an inconsistent density status is found when you open a file
i
i
Note: The settings for color measurement (which values will be measured) and measure-
ment conditions (density status, filter, backing and density display) depend on the device
you use and are only possible in this dialog as they must be set before the instrument is ini-
tialized.
Changes to the instrument settings will apply to the next document to be measured!
• the colorimeter you last used
• the color data to be measured and saved to the data file
Normally, XYZ and Lab values are measured. Optionally, density and/or spectral values can also
be measured if this is supported by the device.
"Compare" tab
In the "Compare" tab, you can select a color data file or an ICC output file that has measured data.
When the application launches, this file loads automatically as the reference file in "Compare".
You can either enter the file name with its full path in the text box or click the three dots to the right
of it and select the reference file from the "Reference file for comparison" dialog (see also the ""Open"
Dialog", Seite 66). The file name with its full path is automatically entered.

"Hotfolder" tab
In the "Hotfolder" tab, you can select a total of four different folders and their backup folders. These
hotfolders are monitored in "Analysis" and can be started for the analysis results. After the data in
the hot folder are evaluated and displayed, they are copied automatically to their backup folder.
i
i
Note: In Prinect Image Control (1), the data for quality control (quality data) are stored in
the "Results" folder (D:\cpc24\QualityMonitor\Results). This folder often has a large data
volume because the quality data of different jobs are stored there and up to four presses
can access this folder. For that reason, to have a better overview of your data, you should
not define this "Results" folder as the hot folder. Select any other folder to which you can
copy the data you wish to evaluate from the "Results" folder.
If you are working with the new Prinect Image Control (2), you can set any output folder for
the quality control data in "Service > Integration/System > Prinect Configuration". Write
permissions are required for this folder.
48 Version 2015
"MDS" tab
In the "MDS" tab, you can define settings for editing process standards.
The Master Data Store (MDS) was introduced at Heidelberg for the centralization of common software
resources to enable their general integration. The MDS is one of the PIL components (Prinect Integra-
tion Layer) which the Messaging Service and the JDF Storage Service are also part of.
An MDS server is always installed (locally) along with Prinect Color Toolbox.
The Calibration Manager process curve sets (aim curves) are used if you enable "Use tonal values
from Calibration Manager". You can set your own custom dot gains, tolerances and spreads if the box
is not checked.
By enabling the appropriate radio button, you can choose whether the process standards will be
saved locally or in the MDS (Master Data Store). You must enter the name and port of an external
MDS server if you wish to save to it. You can test the connection with the appropriate button. The
Calibration Manager dot gain values are always used when process standards are saved externally.
i
i
Note: You must restart the application if you switch to MDS.
Process standards that are saved locally can be sent to the MDS where they can then be evaluated
when you click "Migrate local process standards".
You can edit and save a process standard in the "Process standard" main function. All changes can
be written back to the MDS.

Migrate local process standards

You can migrate process standards that are stored locally if you wish to make them available in the
external MDS.
To do this, you must first set up a connection to the external MDS. Proceed as follows:

4. The "Migrate local process standards" button is now enabled. Click it to open the "Process stan-
dard migration" dialog.
50 Version 2015
5. Select all the process standards that you wish to migrate by checking the appropriate boxes.
6. Click "OK" to start migration. The dialog closes.
The migrated process standards are now available on the external MDS.
MDS backup
You can import and export the MDS with the "Add or Remove Programs" dialog (in the Control Panel).
The following options are available after you select "Heidelberg Prinect Master Data Service 2.5.36.7"
and click "Change/Remove":
• "Restore/Import": This option lets you restore the master data archives (current MDS data will
be replaced) and/or import the master data to the Master Data Store (will be added to the cur-
rent MDS data).
• "Archive": You can select the Master Data Store in a master data archive with this option.
• "Remove": This option lets you remove components that were installed by the Heidelberg Prinect
Master Data Service (only for a full uninstall).

"License Server" tab
You can select a different License Server in the "License Server" tab.
• "Server": This displays the name of the currently used License Server.
• "New Server": This is where you enter the name of the License Server you want.
• "License Information": This displays the name and location of the license file used.
• "Apply": If the new License Server is available, it is used after you click "Apply".
i
i
Note: You can find more details in the License Manager User's Guide and Help.
52 Version 2015
"CIE Report" Tab
In the "CIE Report" tab, you can define which data will be shown in "CIE report" (in the "Compare"
main function) by checking the boxes you want:
• Show/hide dot gain at 25%
• Show/hide density values
• Show/hide CIELAB color values
• Show/hide analysis
• Show/hide proof report
The sections you selected are shown even if they have no data. For a better overview, these sections
(except for "Total results") are minimized to a caption bar and can be shown or hidden by clicking this
bar.

"Tol [%]" (tolerance) tab
In the "Tol [%]" tab, you can enter tolerances for the "Ink zones" and "Gradual fading" views in the
"Measure" main function.
The tolerance range of the process standard is green in the views and can be hidden.
i
i
Note: These tolerances for ink zones and gradual fading do not refer to the process stan-
dard when you assess density. This is where you define a threshold that refers to an evalu-
ation diagram that displays for the single views (see "Show density", Seite 147 in "Ink zones"
and "Show density", Seite 147 in "Gradual fading").
you selected.
54 Version 2015
"Individual Quality Index (IQI)" tab
In the "Individual Quality Index [IQI]" tab, you can set custom values for weighting the quality criteria
(dot gain, ΔE and gray balance).
The valuation system is applicable for all the available process standards, "CMYK", "Multicolor" and
"Spot colors". The IQI system (scoring model) provides a systematic method for the comparison and
valuation of the quality level of your print production. All decision-related criteria are listed and
weighted in this process; each property of the features is assessed using points. Scoring models try
to quantify quality and subjective expectations and make them comparable.
The sum of all single values (Scoring) produces the index (Maximum Value). This includes color val-
ues, dot gains, paper white and gray balance.
The default value is "3.0". Values ranging between "3.0" and "4.0" make sense. The permissible val-
ues for the evaluations lie between "0" and "10".
In "Gray balance" you can define the tolerance for the gray balance check within the process standard
check (see ""Process Standards"", Seite 103 in "Measure"). The sampling points are "K30", "K50" and
"K70".
i
i
Note: If the factors evaluated by IQI are not complied with in the color control strip or mini-
spot you are checking, as for example in the "Prinect 4GS" strip, the maximum value that is
possible is automatically matched accordingly.

Example for setting the individual quality index
Compilation of the maximum value for IQI in the "Preferences"
The maximum value is the sum of all enabled single valuations:

• Score for "Solid ink", "5.0" each for cyan, magenta, yellow and black results in "20".
• Score for "Dot gain" (20%), "3.0" each for cyan, magenta, yellow and black results in "12".
• Score for "Dot gain" (40% and 80%), "5.0" each for cyan, magenta, yellow and black results in
"40".
• Score for "Gray balance", "5.0" each for K30, K50 and K70 results in "15".
• Score for "Gray balance", "3.0" each for L, a and b results in "9".
This results in a "maximum value" of "96" that displays below in the middle of the dialog. In addition,
the "Type" and the currently set process standard also display.
56 Version 2015
General Information about Printing Your Data

Color Toolbox calculates quality characteristic values, e.g. statistical parameters from ΔE (Delta E)
evaluations, based on a comparison of color data sets. The results are shown in different lists and
diagrams in an easy-to-understand way and can also be printed as a record. This lets you create qual-
ity reports, for example, as are required for certified businesses.
You can call up the print dialog in all the main functions with "File > Print". The "Print" dialog appears
where you can select the diagrams and tables you wish to print by checking the appropriate boxes.
In addition, you can define settings relating to the job (job name and number, sheet number and com-
ment).
If a DYMO LabelWriter is connected, you can print proof reports ("Compare" main function) to labels
that you can then use to mark your proofs.
"Print" Dialog
You can print various diagrams and tables or labels with this dialog. The diagrams you can select and
their contents depend on the main function you are in when you call up the print function. After you
selected your diagrams and clicked "OK", a print preview is generated and displays everything you
selected (diagrams, data tables, reports and logs) one below the other, if necessary, on several pages.

The lower border of the print preview displays the current page number and total number of pages.
Depending on what you have selected and on your printer, you can print the diagrams and tables to
paper or archive them to a file using the "Print" button (at the bottom right). You can generate a PDF
file with "Adobe PDF" if you have a suitable application like Adobe Acrobat.
The arrows at the top left of the preview let you scroll to the next or previous pages or go to the first
or last page.
You can set the view of the print preview at the top right: whole page or just a section, scale up or
down using the magnifying glasses or select a default factor from the list.
The print function is available only if you loaded at least one color data file or profile. Quality results
from comparisons (e.g. reports) are printed with empty templates if reference and comparison data
are not open at the same time. The data of the open file are listed in the relevant table.
58 Version 2015
"Diagrams to be printed"
The following table shows you which diagrams and tables can be printed in each of the six main func-
tions:
Print Diagrams/Tables Measure Compare Analysis Create Edit Process

standard
Color quality certificate – – –
Process standard – – –
Dot gain report – – –
Ink zones – – – – –
Gradual fading – – – – –
xy diagram – – – –
ab diagram – – – –
La/Lb diagram – – – –
ΔLab Report – – – – –
CIE report – – – – –
Proof report – – – – –
Statistical results – – – – –
Data table – – –
Profile parameters – – – – – –
Analysis report – – – – –
Production check conform with – – – – –
ISO 12647-2

Please note the following items:

• Some diagrams can only be printed if the relevant data are loaded.
• You can print some diagrams and tables in "Compare" if two color data sets or two ICC profiles
are open, in "Analysis" if a series is open.
• You can only print the xy, ab and La/Lb diagrams and data tables if you have measured data.
Select the diagrams and tables you want to print by checking the appropriate boxes. All selectable
diagrams and tables are enabled automatically if you selected "Color quality certificate". A flyleaf is
also generated with the following details:
• a graphic of the test chart or test strip used
• the names of the loaded files
• process standard used and paper grade
• the measuring method
• the job/customer
i
i
Note: Take note of the number of pages that will be printed for the color quality certificate
or data table. For example, more than 40 A4 pages are required to print all the color data
of a large test chart.
"Job number", "Job name", "Sheet number" and "Comment"

You can assign every diagram and table a job number, a job name, a sheet number (if present) and
any comment that will also be printed. Check the appropriate boxes and type in your text.
You can also check the boxes and not type anything if you want line spacing that you can later fill out
by hand.
60 Version 2015
You can print a proof report with the Dymo LabelWriter in the "Compare" main function. To do this,
in the print dialog select "Label printer (Dymo LabelWriter)" as the current printer.
"Labels to be printed"
This section displays if you selected a DMO LabelWriter as your printer in the "Compare" main func-
tion. You can print a label if you checked the "Proof Report" box.
Job number:
Job name:
Sheet number:
Comment:
ΔE Printing Material = 0.57(3.00)OK

Mean ΔE all patches 3.75 (4.00) Attention
Maximum ΔE all patches10.58(10.00) Not OK
Maximum ΔE primary colors8.46(2.50) Not OK
Maximum ΔH primary colors1.28(2.50) OK
Mean ΔH CMY gray patches 3.12(1.50) Not OK
Data 1: OffsetPT1_glosscoated_PCS60.txt
Data 2: Proof_semimatt_PCS60.txt
Tuesday, July 24, 2007 ABC
i
i
Note: Always install the latest driver for the DYMO-LabelWriter for printing your data.

The following example is a printout of a CIE report from "Compare".
62 Version 2015
Change Logo
You can print the diagrams and data tables with the Heidelberg logo at the bottom right margin.
Example:
You can also print the pages without this logo or with a custom logo.
Proceed as follows:
1. Create a "gif", "jpg" or "png" file that has the logo you want.
The optimal width-to-height ratio for the logo is 60:5.
2. Name this file "ReportImage.gif" (.jpg or .png). This file name is case-sensitive. "R" and "I" must
be upper case.
3. Copy the file to this location:
<Drive>:\Color Toolbox\Color Tool 13.0\settings\preference
The logo you set will be printed the next time instead of the Heidelberg logo. The image is scaled auto-
matically.
Result:
i
i
Note: The Heidelberg logo displays if the image cannot be loaded. There is no error mes-
sage.
Create a file with a white background if you do not want a logo.

File Selection
File Selection
General Information about File Selection
Explorer panel
For fast file selection in Color Toolbox, the central workspace (red area) of the user interface was
enhanced by an Explorer panel that is normally hidden. Drag the vertical bar to the left with the
mouse. You then see the Explorer panel (yellow area) where you can look for and open the folders
and files you want with a double click.
After you selected your file, you can push the Explorer panel back again to the right until you can only
see the vertical bar. The view you selected in the panel remains unchanged even if you open other
files or folders with menus or buttons in the meantime. We recommend that you select files/folders
in the Explorer panel especially if they are located in different sources to the default folders, e.g.
through your network or on other data media.
"Sorting by date"
Files are sorted by their creation/modification date (most recent file first) and not by alphanumeric
order when you check this box.

File Selection
"Open" Dialog
You can open a file with this dialog.

You can call up the dialog with appropriate buttons or menu functions. These vary depending on the
main function selected:
• Open
• Open file
• Open series
• Open profile
• Open reference/comparison data
• Reference file for comparison
You can make the dialog bigger or smaller by dragging at its edges. The new size will be saved.
"File name"
In this box, you can type in the name directly or select the required file name from the list box.
This box only displays those files with the file extension specified in the "Files of type" box or that
match this file type.
66 Version 2015
File Selection
"Files of type"
This popup menu displays the types of files and their extensions which you can open with the appli-
cation. All files with the selected file extension are displayed in the list box and can be opened there
with a double-click.
• "Measured data (.txt, .it8)", if they are in a text file in the ISO 12642 (IT8.7) format.
• "ICC profile (.icc, .icm)", with an extended display if the ICC profile specification is complied
with.
• "Data sets (.xml)": reference and comparison data with measured values for a comparison or
long-term analysis (trend) in xml format.
• "Reference data (.ref)": Reference data with measured values for creating a user-defined control
element.
• "Process standard (.ini)": Process standard with nominal values for a defined printing material
("Import").
• All files saved in the current folder are listed, for example, if the file you wish to open doesn't
have an extension or one that is not ".txt", ".it8", ".icc", ".icm", ".xml", ".ref" or ".ini". However,
you can only open files in the selected data format. Other files are rejected with an error mes-
sage.
Click "Open" to open the file selected in the list box and that also displays in the "File name" text box.
Alternatively, you can open a file in the list box by double-clicking it.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without opening a file.
"Look in"
This list box shows the start folder defined in "Preferences" or the folder last selected when you
opened a file.
Click the list box arrow if this doesn't match the source drive or folder you want. The entire drive or
folder structure then display (if necessary, use the scroll bar).
You can change the drive or the folder by clicking on the drive or folder icon. The folder or file tree is
then displayed in the open list box. Double-click a folder icon to go to the corresponding subfolders.
i
i
Note: You can also select folders on other computers/servers through the network ("net-
work browsing").

File Selection
Click this button to go up one level.

The display in the large list box is refreshed. The input in the text box doesn't
change.
Click this button to go to the desktop folder of the current user (...Documents and
Settings\<username>\Desktop).
change.
Click this button to create a new folder in the current folder which you can name
as desired.
• 1: Details (size, type, date/time, ...)
• 2: List
• 3: Profiles (process parameters saved in the profile)
68 Version 2015
File Selection
ImageControl File Selection

You can enable a filter for file selection in the ""Preferences" Dialog", Seite 44 if you work with quality
data from Prinect Image Control. The "ImageControl Filechooser" dialog then displays when you open
or add a file.
In Prinect Image Control the quality data are automatically given a name when saved (see Save
quality data in Prinect Image Control and Automatic naming in Prinect Image Control). The name is
made up of separate identifiers that you can use to sort the color data files in Color Toolbox.
The top part of the "ImageControl File Selection" dialog has six settings that you can use for fast file
selection. The files that you can select in these lists depend on the content of the folder where the
quality data are filed. The names of the data files that are in this folder are broken down and the iden-
tifiers are added to the relevant lists. In addition, these lists always have "All" as an option.
• "Machine": Selection by name of the press used, e.g. "XL105_10"
• "Job": Selection by job name
• "Date": Selection by creation or modification date of the job
• "Print": Selection by surface (front or back)
• "Sheet": Selection by sheet number
• "Element": Selection by control element type (color control strip or minispot)
When you open the dialog, only those files that match the settings for "Machine", "Job", "Date",
"Print", "Sheet" and "Element" will display.
The appended position number defines the order in the list box if you have similar control elements
of the same name. Any subfolders are not shown and not opened.

File Selection
"File selection"
If the file with the measured data you want is not in the list box (e.g. a different name, folder), you
can click "File selection" and go to an extended file selection dialog like the one found in normal Win-
dows operation (see "Open" Dialog). In this case, you do not have the six sorting options.
The file marked in the list box opens when you click "OK". Alternatively, you can open a file in the list
box by double-clicking it.
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without opening a file.
Save quality data in Prinect Image Control

In Prinect Image Control, the color data are generated by measuring a press sheet with a spectropho-
tometer and by saving the quality data. In this process, all the measured data for each test element
defined on the current sheet are saved in a format that complies with the ISO 12642 or ANSI IT8.7
specification (ISO 28178). The color data files are automatically given a name when filed.
Automatic naming in Prinect Image Control

The file name comprises six separate identifiers that are linked by a hyphen "-".
Example:
XL105_10-0815BN-IC2-2011_03_11T18_06_55-Sheet1-PCS_40A-2
• "XL105_10": Name of the press used
• "0815BN": Job number
• "IC2": Code for Prinect Image Control
• "2011_03_11": Creation date of the current scan (year_month_day) and time (T =

hour_minutes_seconds)
• "Sheet1": Current sheet number
• "PCS_40A": Name of the current control element (color control strip or minispot)
• "2": Position number in the ("Used") list
• ".txt": File extension for the text file
70 Version 2015
File Selection
The single identifiers are separated by a minus sign ("-").

The name of the control element is before the ".txt" file extension (e.g. "PCS_40A").

File Selection
Profile Selection
The normal dialog for opening a file was enhanced to facilitate access to ICC profiles. In addition to
the profile name, the dialog also shows you details about the process properties, such as printing
process, process colors, paper properties, screening.
i
i
Note: You can save any settings you define in a parameter set. However, you cannot load
these parameter sets with the "Open" dialog (see "Load parameter set" Dialog).
You can select ICC profiles in the "Open" dialog not only by their name but also by specifying their
process properties. You can only do this if the process parameters were saved in the file as well.
You can enter these parameters in the "Process parameters" Dialog in the "Measure", "Create" and
"Edit" main functions. To do this, you must have enabled this option in the ""Preferences" Dialog",
Seite 44 (General tab).
You can set the extended view in the list box for files of type "ICC profile (.icc, .icm)" and "All files".
To set it, select the lower icon (with profile) at the top right in the list box.
i
i
Note: If you are opening a folder with a great number of ICC profiles for the first time, it may
take a while to display the list of profiles with their process parameters as the profile
browser first has to read in the process parameters from all the profiles.
In the "Profile Browser Configuration" Dialog, you can define which parameters you want displayed
and in what order.
Click "Settings..." to call up this dialog.
To sort the items, click the triangle in the respective column heading (ascending or descending order).
Click another column heading to move the sorting icon to this column.
72 Version 2015
File Selection
You can change the column width by dragging the column separators. The new column width will be
saved.
"Profile Browser Configuration" Dialog

Click "Settings..." in the file selection dialog to call up this dialog.
In this dialog, you can check which process parameters you want displayed in the list box for profile
selection. The parameters are only displayed if the information was saved in the profile.
You can enable/disable the function for setting and saving process parameters in the ""Preferences"
Dialog", Seite 44. If this function is enabled, you can enter process parameters in the "Measure" main
function that will then be saved together with the measured data. You can also do this for older pro-
files.
The following parameters display by default:
• Filename
• Profile description
• PCS = Profile Connection Space
• Device color space
• Date
• Size
Click "Default" to set this configuration.

You can also view the following process parameters:
• Information about the output (output process, output device, manufacturer)

File Selection
• Information about the paper (paper grade, paper brand name)
• Information about the process color (color order, color name, color brand name)
• Information about screening (screen system, screen frequency, dot shape, angle)
• Information about the process and plate (process standard, plate process, plate brand name)
A box is left empty if the selected parameter was not saved in the profile.
During the configuration, the process parameters are selected from lists or entered in text boxes. The
descriptions used in the list for the process parameters are linked to specifications based on the cur-
rent ICC specification (e.g. output process, paper grade, process standard). Some items are in the
process of being approved for future ICC specifications.
You can freely select the number and order of parameters during the profile selection configuration,
but you cannot deselect "Filename".
You define the order by clicking the parameter and dragging the line (colored) to the position you
want.
By checking a parameter in the first column, you define the column in the list that is sorted in alpha-
numeric order. Only one box can be selected. The column heading has two small triangles that you
can use to sort the items in ascending or descending order. You can change this selection at any time
by clicking another column heading in the list. The two triangles move to this column.
74 Version 2015
File Selection
"Save file" Dialog
You can save a file with this dialog.

You can call up the dialog with appropriate buttons or menu functions. These vary depending on the
main function selected:
• Save
• Save file
• Save series
• Save table (Lab data) as CSV file (export function)
You can make the dialog bigger or smaller by dragging at its edges. The new size will be saved.
i
i
Note: You can save any settings you define in a parameter set. You cannot save these
parameter sets with the "Save file" dialog but only after clicking the "Store" button in the
"Store parameter set" Dialog.
"File name"
In this box, you can type in the name directly or select the required file name from the list box.
This box only displays those files with the file extension specified in the "Files of type" box or that
match this file type.
i
i
Note: The profile description is suggested as the default file name when you save profiles
you created.. We recommend that you do not change this setting as some applications base
their profile selection on the profile description and not on the profile file name.

File Selection
"Files of type"
This popup menu displays the types of files and their extensions which you can save with the appli-
cation. All files with the selected file extension are displayed in the list box and can be selected there
with a single click.
Depending on the main function you selected, you can save a file in the following file formats:
• "Measured data (*.txt)" are saved in a text file in the ISO 12642 (IT8.7) format The file can be
opened by Color Toolbox again and be used for archiving, for example, if the profile is saved
without measured data.
Toolbox and is the default setting.
• "ICC profile without measured data (.icc)": only contains the calculated profile data (benefit:
small file size) and cannot be opened by Color Toolbox again.
• "Data set (.xml)": reference and comparison data with measured values for a comparison or
long-term analysis (trend) are saved in xml format.
• "CSV file (.csv)": Lab measured data or selected item from the data table are saved in a "CSV
file". In the CSV file, the order of the data is matched to the analysis file for the "Ugra/FOGRA
CMYK media strip CMYK V2.0" for further processing with Microsoft Excel.
• "Reference data (.ref)": Reference data with measured values for creating a user-defined control
element.
• "Process standard (.ini)": custom or modified process standard with nominal values for a defined
printing material ("Export").
• "All files (*.*)" saved in the current folder are listed, for example, if you wish to use the name of
a file that doesn't have an extension or one that is not ".txt", ".it8", ".icc" or ".icm".
The files are saved in the selected format (e.g. ".txt") even if you enter a different extension (e.g.
".xml" instead of ".txt")!
Click "Save" to save the file as displayed in the "File name" text box.
Alternatively, you can select a file in the list box with a double click if you wish to save it using a name
that already exists (overwrites existing file).
Click "Cancel" to close the dialog without saving a file.
76 Version 2015
File Selection
"Save in"
This list box shows the start folder defined in "Preferences" or the folder last selected when you saved
a file.
Click the list box arrow if this doesn't match the source drive or folder you want. The entire drive or
folder structure then display (if necessary, use the scroll bar).
You can change the drive or the folder by clicking on the drive or folder icon. The folder or file tree is
then displayed in the open list box. Double-click a folder icon to go to the corresponding subfolders.
i
i
Note: You can also select folders on other computers/servers through the network ("net-
work browsing").
Click this button to go up one level.

change.
Click this button to go to the desktop folder of the current user (...Documents and
Settings\<username>\Desktop).
change.
Click this button to create a new folder in the current folder which you can name
as desired.
• 1: Details (size, type, date/time, ...)
• 2: List
• 3: Profiles (process parameters saved in the profile)


In this chapter, you will find useful information about the test charts supported by Color Toolbox,
what they look like, their use, advantages and disadvantages and other features.
How to Record a Printing Process

The properties of a printing process can be determined by measuring its chromatic features and its
linearity. To do this, a test chart is printed with a color scale where the combinations of the four pro-
cess colors cyan, magenta, yellow and black are systematically graduated, each going from 0% to
100%. Following the proof, this color scale must be measured with a colorimeter and analyzed.
What are Test Charts?

Test charts, often referred to as targets, are reference originals that are used for the characterization
of color output devices such as color printers, presses and proofers.
There are different types of test charts, depending on the printing process:
• CMYK test charts are used for profiling printing processes in normal four-color printing with
cyan, magenta, yellow and black (e.g. offset and newspaper printing).
The test charts have various graduations of the four primary colors cyan, magenta, yellow and
black.
• RGB test charts are used for printing processes with output devices that only support RGB data
(e.g. slide imagesetters, desktop printers).
The test charts have combinations of red, green and blue.
• CMY test charts are used for output devices that only print three colors, cyan, magenta and yel-
low, achieving enough saturation with them to give satisfactory results (e.g. sublimation print-
ers).
The test charts only have graduations of the three primary colors cyan, magenta and yellow but
no black.
• Test charts for spot colors (e.g. Hexachrome) are used for printing processes with more than
four primary colors (spot colors, HiFi Color).
Test charts were developed for these cases, differing in the number of patches and their layout. Most
of the profiling software manufacturers use their own test chart that can only be evaluated with a
matching program. In addition, test charts based on international standards were developed such as
the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart (ANSI = American National Standards Institute) or the "ISO
12642-2 / ECI 2002" test chart.
The drawback of test charts that are arranged in blocks of similar colors (visual layout) is that there
are often problems with an uneven distribution of ink.

Since it's not possible for a printing expert to intervene and make specific corrections, there are
"scrambled" versions of these charts (random layout, rearranged) where the patches are arranged in
such a way that the ink is always applied evenly to the ink zones during printing. However, adjacent
colors in these test charts are no longer located beside each other, something that could be visually
disturbing when viewing the test charts.
The random version is recommended for characterization of conventional printing processes.
A proof print is made of the test chart matching the printing process that is then measured with a
spectrophotometer.
There are test charts with a small number of patches that can be measured simply with a hand-held
instrument and others with more than 800 patches (large test charts) where automatic measuring is
recommended.
The test chart that you will use for profiling basically depends on
• the profiling software
• the printing process
• the spectrophotometer used
• the profile quality you expect
• the time involved
80 Version 2015
Overview of the Test Charts
CMYK Test Charts Patches

ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual 928
ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Random 928
ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual 1617
ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Random 1617
ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual 1485
ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random 1485
HD Packaging 4 Color 1485
PrintOpen Basic 135 135
PrintOpen Basic 210 210
PrintOpen Standard 210 210
PrintOpen Extended 840 840 (4 x 210)
Multicolor test charts Patches

PrintOpen Multicolor 5-C 2 x 1229
CMY Test Chart Patches

PrintOpen CMY Standard 135
RGB test charts Patches

PrintOpen RGB Standard 135
PrintOpen RGB Extended 840 (4 x 210)

Overview of the Control Strips
CMYK Control Strips Patches

ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip L Coated/Uncoated/ 52
Coated FM/Uncoated FM
ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip M Coated/Uncoated/ 32
ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip S Coated/Uncoated/ 6
ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip M i1 Coated i1/Uncoated 39
i1/Coated FM i1/Uncoated FM i1
ECI/bvdm TVI_10 45
G7 P2P25
GRACOL-DCS 54
HD Proof Color Bar 32
MB_100_80_40_CMYK 13
MB_100_70_40_CMYK 13
MB_100_75_50_25_CMYK 17
PCM Gray Control Strip L i1 Coated i1/Uncoated i1/ 54
Coated FM i1/Uncoated FM i1
PCM Gray Control Strip L G7 52
PCM Gray Control Strip M G7 32
PCM Gray Control Strip M G7 i1 31
PCM Gray Control Strip S G7 6
PCS40 Gray i1 39 40
PCS19-100-80-40-Gray Coated/Uncoated 19
PCS control strip 40AB/40A 40
PCS control strip 60AB/60A 60
Prinect 4GS strip 29
Prinect/Fogra 4 strip 41
Prinect 4GS strip 29
Ugra/FOGRA media strip V1 52
Ugra/FOGRA media strip V2-agx 46
Ugra/FOGRA media strip V2-bcde 46
Ugra/FOGRA media strip V3 72
82 Version 2015
CMYK Control Strips Patches

User defined variable
(user-defined control strips)
Overview of the Linearization Strips
Linearization Strips Patches

PCM 13 CMYK 4 x 13
PCM 25 CMYK 4 x 25
MB_Process_Standard 7
MB_Process_13 13
MB_Process_25 25
MD_C2_TotalInkLimit
MD_C3_InkLimitchannel
MD_C4
MD_C5_QualityControl

CMYK Test Charts
"ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" Test Chart with 928 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Standardized ISO/ANSI test chart
• Optimized for offset printing and general application
• Many different combinations of black with CMY
• For special black calculations, e.g. PrintOpen 4.x for PC and Mac OS X
(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
• Very good profile quality for prints and proofs
Disadvantages
• Problems with the distribution of ink because of the regular arrangement of patches
• CMY colors "only" 6 x 6 x 6
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 70%, 100%
• CMY colors often not enough for high-end proofs
• Measuring 928 patches takes longer
Recommended for
• automatic measurements only
• profiling prints and proofs in general
84 Version 2015
Test chart structure
The test chart is divided into 27 blocks with a total of 928 patches which are marked by a two-digit
number (00 to 26). The name of each color patch is made up of:
• the two-digit block number (00 to 26)
• the letter referring to the row or column (A to max. N)
• the two-digit number for columns or rows (01 to max. 13)
Group Patches (928) Function

00 7 (CMYK and RGB) Solids (primary and secondary colors) for measuring
A1 - A7 density
00 10 Patches with CMY combinations with same amounts
A8 - B4 of 70%, 40% and 20%
00 8 Patches with CMY combinations with same amounts
B5 - B12 of 100%
00 1 Paper white
B13
00 4 x 13 = 52 C, M, Y and K step wedges for checking the dot gain
C1 - F13
00 43 Patches with CMY combinations of 20%, 40%, 70%
G1 - J4 and 100%


00 37 Patches with neutral grays (CMYK) for checking the
J5 - M2 gray balance
00 24 Patches with CMY combinations of 20%, 40%, 70%
M3 - N13 and 100%
01 - 06 6 x 6 x 6 = 216 Saturated patches without black
07 - 12 6 x 6 x 6 = 216 Saturated patches with 20% black
13 - 22 10 x 5 x 5 = 250 Patches for checking the shadows
23 - 26 4 x 4 x 4 = 64 Patches with a lot of color for checking the dot gain
Notes
• If possible, print the test chart in the recommended direction (direction of arrow).
• The regular arrangement of the patches causes the ink to be distributed unevenly over the areas.
You can eliminate this problem either by
· printing the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual" test chart once in longitudinal direction
and once in cross direction and then using the mean values or by
· using the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Random" test chart.
86 Version 2015
"ISO 12642 (ANSI IT8.7/3) Random" Test Chart

(Rearranged IT8.7/3) with 928 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Test chart with standardized color data
• Optimized for offset printing and general application
• For special black calculations, e.g. PrintOpen 4.x for PC and Mac OS X
(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
• No problems with the distribution of ink because of the irregular arrangement of patches
Disadvantages
• Arrangement of patches not standardized
• CMY colors "only" 6 x 6 x 6
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 70%, 100%
• CMY colors often not enough for high-end proofs
Recommended for

The "ISO12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Random" test chart contains the same 928 patches as the "ISO12642
/ ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual" test chart. However, the patches in this test chart are "rearranged" so that ink
is always applied evenly to the ink zones during printing. The test chart can be printed both in longi-
tudinal and cross direction.
88 Version 2015
"ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual" Test Chart with 1617 Pat-
ches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• New test chart as an extension of "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3"
• Contains all the patches of "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3"
• Contains all the patches of "ISO 12642 / ECI2002"
• Contains the CMY patches of "PrintOpen Extended"
• For special black calculation as of PrintOpen 4.0.5.2 for PC and Mac OS X

(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
• Very finely stepped CMY patches 9 x 9 x 9
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• Contains special patches with combinations of 3% and 7% for packaging printing
• Compared with "ISO 12642 / ECI2002" contains 132 additional combinations each with 10%
black
• Specially for high-end proofs
Disadvantages

Recommended for
1 3 4
11
- 7 14
13
8 - 10
2
6
The "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Visual / Random" test chart contains all 928 patches of "ISO 12642
/ ANSI IT8/7.3" as well as all 1485 patches of "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002". It also contains the CMY
patches of "PrintOpen Extended 840".
90 Version 2015
Like the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8/7.3" and "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002" test charts, "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI
IT8/7.4" comprises several blocks with a total of 1617 patches that can be grouped as follows:

1 9 x 9 x 9 = 729 Patches without black in CMY combinations 0%,
10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85% and
100%.
2 6 x 6 x 6 = 216 Patches with 20% black in CMY combinations 0%,
10%, 20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
40%, 70% and 100%.
40%, 70% and 100%.
7 4 x 20 = 80 C, M, Y and K step wedges at 100%, 98%, 95%,
90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%,
30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 7%, 5%, 3% and 2%
(for checking the dot gain)
8 1 Patch with paper white
9 37 Patches with neutral grays (CMY) and black overprint
at 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100%.
(for checking the gray balance)
10 9 Patches with primary colors and 70% black (com-
patible with ISO 12642)
11 11 Patches with all CMY combinations of 0% and 3%
(without repeats from group 1 thru 7)
13 50 Patches with all CMY combinations of 0%, 3% and
40% (without repeats from group 1 thru 7 and 11 thru
12)
14 4 x 33 = 132 Patches with CMY combinations and 10% black

Notes
· printing the "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Visual" test chart once in longitudinal direction
and once in cross direction and then using the mean values or by
· using the "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Random" test chart.
92 Version 2015
"ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Random" Test Chart with 1617

Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Contains all the patches of "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3"
• Contains all the patches of "ISO 12642 / ECI2002"
• For special black calculations, e.g. PrintOpen 4.0.5.2 for PC and Mac OS X
(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• Compared with "ISO 12642 / ECI2002" contains 132 additional combinations each with 10%
black
Disadvantages

Recommended for
The "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Random" test chart contains the same 1617 patches as the "ISO
12642-2 / ANSI IT8/7.4 Visual" test chart.
However, the patches in this test chart are "rearranged" so that ink is always applied evenly to the
ink zones during printing. The test chart can be printed both in longitudinal and cross direction.
94 Version 2015
"ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual" Test Chart with 1485 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Contains the patches of "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3"
(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
Disadvantages
Recommended for

3 4
1
11
- 7
13
8 - 10
2
6
The new "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual / Random" test chart was developed by an ECI workgroup
in cooperation with Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG. They are a superset of the present "ISO 12642
/ ANSI IT8/7.3" test chart. All 928 patches of this test chart are found in the 1485 patches of the new
"ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002". It also contains the CMY patches of "PrintOpen Extended 840".
Like the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8/7.3" test chart, "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Visual" comprises several
blocks with a total of 1485 patches that can be grouped as follows:

1 9 x 9 x 9 = 729 Patches without black in CMY combinations 0%,
10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85% and
100%.
10%, 20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
20%, 40%, 70% and 100%.
40%, 70% and 100%.
40%, 70% and 100%.
96 Version 2015

7 4 x 20 = 80 C, M, Y and K step wedges at 100%, 98%, 95%,
90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%,
30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 7%, 5%, 3% and 2%
(for checking the dot gain)
8 1 Patch with paper white
9 37 Patches with neutral grays (CMY) and black overprint
at 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100%.
(for checking the gray balance)
10 9 Patches with primary colors and 70% black (com-
patible with ISO 12642)
13 50 Patches with all CMY combinations of 0%, 3% and
40% (without repeats from group 1 thru 7 and 11 thru
12)
Notes
· printing the "ISO 12642 / ECI 2002 Visual" test chart once in longitudinal direction and
once in cross direction and then using the mean values or by
· using the "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random" test chart.

"ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random" Test Chart with 1485

Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• New test chart as an extension of "ISO 12642 / IT8.7/3"
• Contains the patches of "ISO 12642 / IT8.7/3"
• Contains the CMY patches of "PrintOpen Extended 840"
(not for Mac OS 9)
K: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• No problems with the distribution of ink because of the irregular arrangement of patches
Disadvantages
Recommended for
98 Version 2015
The "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 Random" test chart contains the same 1485 patches as the "ISO 12642-
2 / ECI 2002 Visual" test chart.
However, the patches in this test chart are "rearranged" so that ink is always applied evenly to the ink
zones during printing. The test chart can be printed both in longitudinal and cross direction.

"PrintOpen Standard 210" Test Chart with 210 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Basic PrintOpen test chart (since 1992)
• Measuring 210 patches is fast and simple
• Not much space required on the signature
• CMY colors 5 x 5 x 5 and black combinations optimized for print
• Even distribution of ink
• Good profile quality for printing (smoothness)
Disadvantages
• Not sufficient enough for high-end proofs
• Not enough black combinations for special black calculations
Recommended for
• manual measurements in particular
• profiling printing processes, giving an average of the color data
100 Version 2015

recommended
paper travel direction
The "PrintOpen Standard 210" test chart has a representative selection of 210 patches and, conse-
quently, contains all the important color areas for color conversion. The test chart is structured in
such a way that the ink is applied evenly to the ink zones during printing, running parallel to the direc-
tion the paper moves.
The first 135 patches are three-color CMY and are identical to those of the three-color "PrintOpen
Standard 135" (CMY) test chart. The remaining 75 patches are combinations with black.
This test chart is found as a single test chart ("POXT1_CMYK") in the "PrintOpen Extended 840" test
chart.

"PrintOpen Extended 840" Test Chart with 840 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Finely stepped CMY patches 9 x 9 x 9
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• Flexible positioning on the signature
• Very good profile quality for proofs
Disadvantages
• Not enough black combinations for special black calculations
• Problems with black with a lot of color cast
Recommended for
• profiling proofers without making any special allowance for black (color cast!)
102 Version 2015

recommended
The "PrintOpen Extended 840" test chart comprises four single test charts, each with 210 patches.
The first test chart ("POXT1_CMYK", top left) is identical to the "PrintOpen Standard 210" with 210
patches.
The test chart is structured in such a way that the ink is applied evenly to the ink zones during prin-
ting, running parallel to the direction the paper moves.

"PrintOpen Basic 210" Test Chart with 210 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• CMY colors 5 x 5 x 5
CMY: 0%, 20%, 40%, 70%, 100%
• Black combinations optimized for PrintOpen calculations (as of version 4.x)
Disadvantages
• Black combinations not compatible with previous "PrintOpen Standard 210".
Recommended for
104 Version 2015

The "PrintOpen Basic 210" test chart (CMYK) has a representative selection of 210 patches and, con-
sequently, contains all the important color areas for color conversion. The test chart is structured in
The first 135 color patches are three-color CMY. The remaining 75 patches are combinations with
black.

"PrintOpen Basic 135" Test Chart with 135 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• CMY colors only 4 x 4 x 4
CMY: 0%, 20%, 70%, 100%
• Black combinations optimized for PrintOpen calculations (as of version 4.x)
• Profile calculation possible for printing (smoothness)
Disadvantage
• Not sufficient enough for proofs
Recommended for
• profiling printing processes
• for quality assessments
• profile conversion
106 Version 2015

The "PrintOpen Basic 135" test chart (CMYK) has a representative selection of 135 patches and, con-
sequently, contains all the important color areas for color conversion. The test chart is structured in

CMY Test Chart
"PrintOpen Standard" Test Chart with 135 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Basic PrintOpen test chart
• CMY colors 5 x 5 x 5 optimized for printing
Disadvantages
Recommended for
recommended
108 Version 2015

The "PrintOpen Standard" test chart (CMY) has a representative selection of 135 patches and, conse-

RGB test charts
"PrintOpen RGB Standard" Test Chart with 135 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Basic PrintOpen test chart
• RGB colors 5 x 5 x 5 optimized for printing
Disadvantages
Recommended for
110 Version 2015

recommended
The "PrintOpen RGB Standard" test chart has a representative selection of 135 patches and, conse-

"PrintOpen RGB Extended" Test Chart with 840 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Finely stepped CMY patches 9 x 9 x 9
CMY: 0%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 55%, 70%, 85%, 100%
• Flexible positioning on the signature
• Very good profile quality for proofs
• For PrintOpen 4.x for PC and Mac OS X (not for Mac OS 9)
Disadvantages
Recommended for
• profiling transparency imagesetters, desktop printers
112 Version 2015

recommended
The "PrintOpen RGB Extended" test chart comprises four single test charts, each with 210 patches.
The first test chart ("POXT1_RGB", top left) is identical to the "PrintOpen RGB Standard".
The test chart is structured in such a way that the ink is applied evenly to the ink zones during prin-
ting, running parallel to the direction the paper moves.

General Information about Special Test Charts
i
i
Note: You need special test charts for some colorimeters, for example, for strip readers.
Special Test Chart for Strip Readers

You need special test charts for GretagMacbeth iCColor and EyeOne (strip) as well as X-Rite DTP41.
You can find these test charts as a data set on the test chart CD in the relevant subfolder of the "Test-
charts PDF" or "Tescharts TIFF" folder.
On this special test chart, the color patches are arranged in strips and are separated by ribs. The
strips either have 15, 30 or 45 color patches.
You can print the strip test charts in different formats. Afterwards, you must cut the strips along the
cutting marks.
The "PrintOpen Standard" test chart (CMYK, 210 patches) is an example of a strip test chart with 15
patches per strip used on X-Rite DTP41 and GretagMacbeth iCColor.
114 Version 2015

Example of the printed "PrintOpen Standard 210" (CMYK) special test chart for X-Rite DTP41 with 15 patches per strip.

Example of the printed "PrintOpen Standard 210" (CMYK) special test chart for GretagMacbeth iCColor with 15 patches per
strip.
116 Version 2015

Control Strips
"Ugra/FOGRA media strip" Version 1.2 with 52 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Standardized test strip for checking digital proofing
• CMY: 0%, 40%, 70%, 100% primary and secondary colors

Mixed colors K: 0%, 3%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 70%, 80%, 100%
(and gray balance values)
• Manual measuring of 52 patches is fast and simple
Disadvantages
• Some patches are not in the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart.
• Licensing by FOGRA necessary (strip replaced by Ugra/FOGRA V2.0)
Recommended for
• proof and print quality assessments (solid tints, dot gain, color gamut).

"Ugra/FOGRA media strip V2-agx" Version 2.0 with 46 Pat-

ches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Standardized test strip for checking digital proofing (bvdm/FOGRA)

Mixed colors K: 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, 100%
(and gray balance values from "IT8.7/3")
• All the patches are in the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart.
• Single-row strips are also available
Disadvantages
• Does not contain K 70% (for process check at 40% and 70%)
• Licensing by FOGRA necessary
Recommended for
118 Version 2015

"PCS control strip 40AB/40A" with 40 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Contains 40 patches of the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart

Mixed colors K: 0%, 40%, 70%, 80, 100% (and gray balance values)
• CMYK process check at 40% and 70% possible
• Single-row strips are also available (PCS 40A)
Disadvantage
• Not a standardized test strip but is similar to the "Ugra/FOGRA media strip".
Recommended for

"PCS control strip 60AB/60A" with 60 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Contains 60 patches of the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart
• CMY: 0%, 20%, 40%, 70%, 100% primary and secondary colors
Mixed colors K: 0%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 70%, 80, 100% (and gray balance values)
• CMYK process check at 40% and 70% possible
• Single-row strips are also available (PCS 60A)
Disadvantage
• Not a standardized test strip but is similar to the "Ugra/FOGRA media strip"
Recommended for
120 Version 2015

"MB_100_70_40_CMYK" and "MB_100_80_40_CMYK" Color

Control Blocks with 13 Patches and "MB_100_75_50_25_C-
MYK" with 17 Patches
At a glance ...
DIPCO "MB_100_70_40_CMYK" color control block
DIPCO "MB_100_80_40_CMYK" color control block
DIPCO "MB_100_75_50_25_CMYK" color control block
Advantages
• CMY: 0%, 40%, 70% (80%), 100% only primary colors and white
• CMYK process check at 40% and 70% (80%) possible
• Not much space required on the signature (color control block often at different positions on the
signature)
• Manual measuring of 13 or 17 patches is fast and simple
Disadvantage
• Measuring not possible with automatic devices
(exception: Prinect Image Control)
Recommended for
• quality assessments in print (dot check).

DIPCO "Prinect 4GS strip" with 28+1 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Mainly on the signature when printing with a Speedmaster
• The same test strip section for Speedmasters 102, 74 and 52
• CMY solid tints of primary and secondary colors (Lab color gamut)
• CMYK solid tints and 70% color steps (final density, dot gain)
• Manual measuring of 28+1 patches is fast and simple
• Automatic measurement with Prinect Image Control is possible.
Disadvantage
• Contains the (most important) CMYK color steps for process check
Recommended for
• print quality assessments (solid tints, dot gain, color gamut).
• print profile conversion
122 Version 2015

"Prinect/Fogra 4 strip" with 40+1 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Mainly on the signature when printing with a Speedmaster
• The same test strip section for Speedmasters 102 and 74 (but not for Speedmaster 52)
• CMY solid tints of primary and secondary colors (Lab color gamut)
• CMYK solid tints, 40% and 80% color steps (final density, dot gain)
• Manual measuring of 40+1 patches is fast and simple
Disadvantage
• Contains the (most important) CMYK color steps for process check
Recommended for
• print quality assessments (solid tints, dot gain, color gamut).
• print profile conversion

"HD Proof Color Bar" with 32 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Linearization strips for checking proofer calibration
• CMYK: 0%, 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% only primary colors
Secondary colors: 50%, 100%, some gray balance values
• Not much space required on the signature (automatic positioning by MetaDimension)
Disadvantages
• Not a standardized test strip but is similar to the "Ugra/FOGRA media strip".
• Only a few patches in the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test chart
Recommended for
• checking the quality of proofer calibration
124 Version 2015

"PCS 19_100_80_40_Gray" with 19 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Combined minispot with 19 patches:
· "MB_100_80_40_CMYK" for dot gain analysis
· "ECI_GrayCon_S" for gray balance analysis
• You can also measure the test strip with GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip) with scanning ruler.
Disadvantage
• Not a standardized test strip
Recommended for
• quality assessment for processes
· FOGRA39 - coated papers
· FOGRA29 - uncoated papers

"ECI_GrayConL", "ECI_GrayConM" and ECI_GrayConS" with

52, 32 or 6 Patches
At a glance ...
Advantages
• Minispots for a visual and metrological check of gray balance
· "ECI_GrayconL": Large ("L") variant with 52 patches (graduations of 10%), especially

suited for checking ink balance and any faults in gray balance
· "ECI_GrayconM": Medium ("M") variant with 32 patches (graduations of 20%). This strip
should be used only if there is not enough room for the "L" version.
· "ECI_GrayconS": Small ("S") variant with only six patches (three gray balance pairs); only
for a visual check
• Array of specific black patches (30%, 50%, 70%) beside chromatic color combinations with the
same degree of brightness ("composite gray") for a visual check
• Manual measuring is fast and simple
Recommended for
• Minispots for a visual and metrological check of gray balance
· FOGRA39 - coated papers
· FOGRA29 - uncoated papers
126 Version 2015

CMY-K Linearization Strips
"PCM 13 CMYK" and "PCM 25 CMYK" Four-color Linearization

Strips each with 13 or 25 Steps
At a glance ...
"PCM 13 CMYK" (MB_Process_13_CMYK)
"PCM 25 CMYK" (MB_Process_25_CMYK)
Advantages
• Linearization strips for creating and checking print and proof calibrations
• "PCM 13 CMYK": CMY-K 13 steps with
· 0% and 5%
· 10% steps between 10% and 90%
· 95% and 100%
• "PCM 25 CMYK": CMY-K 25 steps with

• Manual measuring of four times 13 or four times 25 patches is fast and simple
Recommended for
• creating and checking calibrations.
128 Version 2015

"MB_Process_13" and "MB_Process_25" single-color lineariza-

tion strips with 13 and 25 steps respectively
At a glance ...
"MB_Process_13"
"MB_Process_25"
Advantages
• Linearization strips for creating and checking film and plate calibrations
• "MB_Process_13": CMY-K 13 steps with
· 0% and 5%
· 95% and 100%
• "MB_Process_25": CMY-K 25 steps with
• Manual measuring of 13 or 25 steps is fast and simple
Recommended for
• creating and checking calibrations.

Linearization Strips for Color Proof Pro

Linearization strips for creating and checking base linearizations for proofing devices with Color Proof
Pro.
• "MD_C2_TotalInkLimit V1/V2": Linearization strips for determining the total ink limit.
• "MD_C3_InkLimitChannel": Linearization strip for determining the optimal ink limit for each pri-
mary color.
• "MD_C4_Lin4c/Lin6c/Lin7c": Linearization strips for linearization (4, 6 or 7 colors).
• "MD_C5_QualityControl": Linearization strip for checking the quality of linearization.
130 Version 2015

Colorimeters
Colorimeters
Colorimeters
This chapter will provide you with information about the devices that you can use for measuring test
charts and control elements in Color Toolbox.
You can use all devices that can furnish the measured values in a file format based on the ISO 28178
specification (CIEXYZ or CIELab).
The most important devices for measuring color, density or screen percents are:
• Densitometer
• Spectrophotometers
• Dotmeters
Densitometer
Densitometers measure the optical density of a color layer. Optical density increases the darker this
color layer is.
Reflective densitometers measure the density of the process colors. Color filters (red, green or blue)
are used when measuring process colors.
Spectrophotometers
Spectrophotometers that work with the CIE color system are used to measure the spectral reflectance
or transmission. XYZ or CIELab color data are determined from this.
Dotmeters
The dotmeters supported by Color Toolbox use a video camera system to determine the dot area, dot
size, screen frequency, screen angle and, if necessary, dot display and plate characteristic.

Colorimeters
Color measurements
Color measurements are basically influenced by the two parameters "Illuminant" and "Observer
angle". For that reason, you must set these two parameters:
• D50: Standard illuminant with a color temperature of 5000 K. This illuminant is often used in
the graphic arts industry for the assessment of originals, proofs and prints.
• Observer angle 2: Standard angle at which colors are perceived
Spectrophotometers are capable of calculating density values from spectral values.

You have two options for measuring a test chart with a colorimeter:
• Online measurement: The values measured in the color patches are transferred directly to Color
Toolbox via a serial or USB port.
• Offline measurement using the user program of the colorimeter in question. The values mea-
sured must be saved as a text file based on the ISO 28178 specification.
• Text files in this format can then be opened directly in Color Toolbox. For information about this
data format, see "Data Formats of Measured Data", Seite 165.
132 Version 2015

Colorimeters
Overview of Legacy Colorimeters (Online Measur-

ing)
For trouble-free operation, you should use short cables when connecting the colorimeters directly to
the PC. In addition, if you have a power adapter, a colorimeter should also always be connected to it
if power is to be supplied via the interface.
Online measurement is possible with the following colorimeters:
Automatic Devices
• GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip)
• GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO (spot)
• GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO (strip)
• GretagMacbeth iCColor
• GretagMacbeth SpectroScan
• Konica Minolta FD-7 (strip / IO meas. table)
• Techkon TCR
• X-Rite DTP41
• X-Rite DTP41T
• X-Rite DTP41 USB
• X-Rite DTP45
• X-Rite DTP70
• X-Rite Eye-One iSis
• X-Rite PULSE (strip)
• X-Rite i1Pro 2 (strip / IO meas. table)
• Prinect Image Control

Colorimeters
Manual Devices
• GretagMacbeth SpectroEye
• GretagMacbeth D19C/D196 (density measurement only)
• GretagMacbeth iCPlate (dot measurement)
• GretagMacbeth iCPlate II (dot measurement)
• GretagMacbeth Eye-One (spot)
• GretagMacbeth Spectrolino
• GretagMacbeth SpectroScan T
• GretagMacbeth SPM series
• Konica Minolta FD-7 (spot)
• Techkon R410/410e (density measurement only)
• Techkon SpectroDens (density measurement only)
• Techkon SD 620
• Techkon SP800 series
• X-Rite 520/528
• X-Rite 530
• X-Rite Digital Swatchbook
• X-Rite DTP32/DTP32HS (density measurement only)
• X-Rite QuickCal [DTP34] (density measurement only)
• X-RiteDot/CCDot (dot measurement)
• X-Rite PULSE
• X-Rite i1Pro 2 (spot)
134 Version 2015

Colorimeters
All colorimeters supported by the application are initialized when they are selected in the "Color mea-
surement of test chart" dialog. In other words, the following parameters are set:
• For profiling:
· Measurement of XYZ values
· Illuminant D50
· Observer angle 2
• For density measurements:
· Density status (if possible)

(Status DIN16536 NB, ISO 5-3 Status T)

Colorimeters
Measuring a test chart or a control element

You have two options for measuring a test chart or a control element with a colorimeter ( spectropho-
tometer, densitometer or dotmeter):
• Online measurement: The values measured in the color patches are transferred directly to Color
Toolbox via a serial or USB port.
• Offline measurement using the user program of the colorimeter in question. The values mea-
sured must then be saved as a text file in the IT8.7 format. Text files in this format can then be
opened directly in Color Toolbox. For information about this data format, see "Data Formats of
Measured Data", Seite 165.
To measure the patches, you need a data file with the same settings as your target.
i
i
Note: Please also remember the Notes on Measuring Data
For details about the colorimeters, in particular about connecting them to the power supply,
please refer to the user manuals of the respective manufacturers.
Notes on the Colorimeters

All colorimeters supported by the application are initialized when they are selected in the "Color mea-
surement of test chart" dialog. In other words, the following parameters are set:
• Measurement of spectral or XYZ values (if the device cannot measure spectral values)
• Illuminant D50
• Observer angle 2
You must define the measuring conditions in the Color Toolbox preferences before you start measur-
ing.
i
i
Note: Try the following action if you cannot connect between the measuring device and
application:
• Set the device to its default setting as described in the respective user guide.
• Check the connection to the PC.
• If necessary, load the USB driver.
Techkon Colorimeters
Techkon SP 800 colorimeters (e.g. Techkon SP 810) are spectrophotometers, those of the CP 300
series (e.g. Techkon CP 300) are tristimulus colorimeters.
Some Techkon colorimeters can be connected to the TestChart Reader (TCR), enabling an automatic
measurement of the test chart.
136 Version 2015

Colorimeters
Colorimeters which have a built-in battery must be activated at the start by pressing the green button.
Devices without a battery are connected to the power supply module and are then continuously ready
for operation.
Techkon 300 devices must be calibrated before they are connected to the computer (see the device's
user manual for the procedure).

Colorimeters
Manual Measurement of the Test Charts

Varying according to the device you use, measurement is triggered by pressing down the measuring
head or by pressing the button on the device.
Each patch measured is shown on the screen in the open measured data file.
Procedure
1. Open the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog by clicking "New" in the "Measure"
main function.
2. Select a test chart, control element or linearization strip from the list boxes.
3. Open the "Color measurement of test chart" dialog by clicking "Measure" in the button bar or
with the "Test chart > Measure" menu.
138 Version 2015

Colorimeters

You must perform white calibration every time before you start measuring. Details can be found in
the documentation of the respective manufacturer. If necessary, black calibration is also required
(e.g. X-Rite 520 and 528).
You can check "Start automatically" in "Save and Repeat chart measurement" if you wish to run a
series of measurements with the same measuring device. This means that you do not have to recali-
brate your device before you measure the next element. You save your color data after measurement
by clicking "Save". You can then start to measure the next element immediately.
Notes on white calibration appear. These vary according to the device connected (for example,
"Place SPM on the base plate").
7. Follow the instructions and confirm with "OK".
White calibration is run.
8. Enable the “Autostart” option, if necessary.
9. Position the aperture of the device above the first patch in the test chart or control element.
10. Click "Start" to measure the various color patches of the test chart or control element.
11. Measure all the patches one after the other.
12. If all your data are correct, finish color measurement and save the data to a file in "ISO 28178
(IT8.7)" format by clicking "Save".

Colorimeters
GretagMacbeth SpectroScan Transmission

You can measure the color patches of a test chart or control element in transparent mode using a
combination of the GretagMacbeth SpectroScan T and GretagMacbeth Spectrolino. The values mea-
sured are transferred directly to the Color Toolbox program.
The SpectroScan T is connected to a serial port.
The Spectrolino is mounted on the bar of the SpectroScan.
1. Attach the tube without the polarization filter to the Spectrolino.
2. Push the Spectrolino onto the bar of the SpectroScan T.
3. Insert a diffused measuring aperture.
4. Connect the SpectroScan T to the PC.
5. Open the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog by clicking "New" or with "File > New"
in the "Measure" main function.
6. Select a test chart, control element or linearization strip from the list boxes. Confirm your selec-
tion with "OK".
8. Select "GretagMacbeth SpectroScan T" in the "Measurement device setup" list.
9. Click "Connect" to establish the connection between the colorimeter and the application.
The Spectrolino then will be automatically positioned over the measuring aperture. The process will
take about 20 seconds. Then the device will reposition the Spectrolino just behind the measuring
area in a stand-by mode.
Before the color patches are measured, you must calibrate the colorimeter.
The following message appears: "For calibration remove all matter from the aperture".
After clicking "OK", the Spectrolino will be automatically positioned over the measuring aperture, and
calibration is performed automatically.
Measurement is triggered by pressing the "Measure" button on the SpectroScan T. The device will
automatically move to the measuring aperture and perform a measurement. This process takes
approx. 5 seconds. The device will then return to the stand-by position.
11. Position the first patch of the test chart over the measuring aperture.
12. Click "Start".
The color patch is measured and its position shown in the measured data file.
13. Position the next patch of the test chart over the measuring aperture. Press the "Measure" but-
ton on the SpectroScan T. Wait until you hear a confirmation signal. If you don't, repeat the mea-
surement.
14. Measure all the patches in the test chart in the same way.
i
i
Note: After approx. every ten measurements or if you have not taken a measurement for a
few minutes, you will have to perform a calibration. A message appears reminding you to
remove the test chart from the measuring aperture.
140 Version 2015

Colorimeters
When you click "OK", calibration is performed automatically. After this, you can continue measuring
the color patches.
15. Measure all the patches one after the other.

Colorimeters
Automatic Measurement of the Test Charts

Automatic measurement of the test charts supported by Color Toolbox is possible with the following
devices:
• GretagMacbeth SpectroScan used in conjunction with the GretagMacbeth Spectrolino
• GretagMacbeth iCColor
• GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip) with scanning ruler
• GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO (spot)(strip) table
• Techkon TestChart Reader (TCR) used in conjunction with a Techkon colorimeter (e.g. SP 810)
• X-Rite DTP41, X-Rite DTP41-T and X-Rite DTP41 USB
• X-Rite DTP45
• X-Rite DTP70
• X-Rite Eye-One iSis
• X-Rite PULSE (strip) with Pathfinder guide
• Prinect Image Control
The values measured are transferred directly to the Color Toolbox program (except Prinect Image
Control). There you create the color data files by saving the quality data and you can then open them
in Color Toolbox.
i
i
Note: To save time, the "ISO 12624 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual/Random", "ISO 12624-2 / ANSI
IT8.7/4 Visual/Random", "ISO 12624-2 / ECI 2002 Visual/Random" and the (fourfold)
""PrintOpen" Extended 840" and the Multicolor test charts should be measured with an
automatic measuring device.
You can check "Start automatically" in "Save and Repeat chart measurement" if you wish
to run a series of measurements with the same measuring device. This means that you do
not have to recalibrate your device before you measure the next element. You save your
color data after measurement by clicking "Save". You can then start to measure the next
element immediately.
142 Version 2015

Colorimeters
GretagMacbeth SpectroScan
The GretagMacbeth SpectroScan is connected to a serial port.
The GretagMacbeth Spectrolino is mounted on the bar of the SpectroScan.
1. Connect the GretagMacbeth SpectroScan to a serial port and switch it on.
You will hear a series of sounds.
tion with "OK".
5. Select "GretagMacbeth SpectroScan" in the "Measurement device setup" list.
The measuring head moves to the position of the white tile. Calibration is performed automati-
cally.
8. Then click "Start".
A dialog showing the selected test chart type appears.
9. Place the printed test chart on the SpectroScan XY table in the same way as shown in the dia-
gram.

Colorimeters
10. Press the "Hold" button on the device. This will hold the test chart electrostatically in place and
will prevent it from slipping off the XY table.
If you place printing paper beneath the test chart as recommended, secure the sheets with
adhesive strips.
Three reference positions are required for the automatic measurement of the colors. These positions
are defined using the three "Set" buttons. The relevant color patches in the test chart are marked in
the graphic by the digits "1", "2" and "3". As soon as a position has been defined, the question mark
beside the "Set" button is replaced by „OK“.
11. Use the arrow keys on the SpectroScan to move to position "1".
Make sure that the positioning tool is centered over the color patch concerned in the test chart.
Confirm this position by clicking the "Set I" button.
You then move automatically to the second position.
12. Check this position. Correct it, if necessary, with the arrow keys. Then click the "Set II" button.
You then move automatically to the third position.
13. Check this position. Correct it, if necessary, with the arrow keys. Then click the "Set 3" button.
The measuring head returns to position "1".
14. If you wish to change or redefine positions after they are set, click "Reset".
All three positions are then deleted.
15. When all three positions have been set correctly, click "OK".
The dialog closes.
16. Then click "Start". The measuring head moves to the first color patch at the bottom left. All the
patches are measured in succession. When the last patch is measured, the measuring head
returns to the top left corner (beside the white calibration tile).
17. If you wish to measure single color patches again because they are dirty, for example, you
should redefine the three reference positions. If you do not change the positions or shift the test
chart, the values that are measured will still be the same.
i
i
Note: To be able to set the reference positions again, you must undo the connection:
• You can select "None" in "Measurement device setup" and continue with item 5.
• Or you can exit the "Color measurement of test chart" dialog with "Close" and start with item 4.
144 Version 2015

Colorimeters
GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO (spot)/(strip)

1. Connect the GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO to the power supply and then to a USB port.
tion with "OK".
i
i
Note: You can only measure the following test charts with the GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO
(strip):
• "ISO 12642 / ANSI 8.7/3 visual"
• "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI 8.7/4 random"
• "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002 visual/random"
5. Select "GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO (spot)" or "GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO (strip)" in the "Mea-
surement device setup" list.
The measuring head moves to the position of the white tile. Calibration is performed automati-
cally.
A dialog showing the selected test chart type appears.
9. Place the printed test chart on the measuring table in the same way as shown in the diagram.

Colorimeters
10. Press the "Electrostatic mat ON" button on the device. This will hold the test chart electrostati-
cally in place and will prevent it from slipping off the table.
If you place printing paper beneath the test chart, secure the sheets with adhesive strips.
Three reference positions are required for the automatic measurement of the colors. These positions
are defined automatically by pressing the button on the measuring device. The relevant color patches
in the test chart are marked in the graphic by the digits "1", "2" and "3".
You will hear two beeps when all three positions have been set correctly. The dialog closes and mea-
suring begins automatically.
146 Version 2015

Colorimeters
Techkon TCR
The color patches of the test chart can be measured automatically using the Techkon TestChart
Reader TCR in conjunction with a Techkon colorimeter (for example SP 810). This colorimeter can be
attached to the bar of the reader.
1. Secure the Techkon colorimeter to the bar of the reader and connect the cable to the reader.
2. Connect the Techkon TCR to a serial port and switch it on.
i
i
Note: When you switch on the test chart reader, the "Power" LED flashes and "Chart Hold"
does not light up. When you press the "Chart Hold" button, both LEDs remain lit. Only in
this state is the TCR device ready for operation. If the TCR cannot be made operational this
way, you must first switch off the device and then on again and establish the connection
again.
tion with "OK".
6. Select "Techkon TCR" in the "Measurement device setup" list.
Position the colorimeter on the base plate (white tile) and perform white calibration.
Then attach the device to the bar again.
A dialog showing the selected test chart type appears. Three reference positions are required for
automatic measurement of the colors. The relevant color patches are marked in the test chart.
10. Move the slide on the reader to the right using the "Position" keys. Place the test chart on the
reader as shown in the diagram and straighten it. When positioning the test chart, you can deac-
tivate the paper hold by pressing the "Chart Hold" button.
Activate the hold again before you start measuring (green LED on).
The first color patch to be measured is at the top left of PrintOpen" charts.
11. Click "Set 1".
You then move automatically to the second position.
12. Check this position. Correct it, if necessary, with the arrow keys. Then click the "Set II" button.
You then move automatically to the third position.
13. Check this position. Correct it, if necessary, with the arrow keys. Then click the "Set 3" button.
The measuring head returns to position "1".

Colorimeters
14. When all three positions have been set correctly, click "OK".
The dialog closes.
15. Start automatic measurement by clicking "Start".
All the patches are measured in succession.
When the last patch is measured, the measuring head returns to the top left corner.
i
i
Note: To be able to set the reference positions again, you must undo the connection:
• You can select "None" in "Measurement device setup" and continue with item 5.
• Or you can exit the "Color measurement of test chart" dialog with "Close" and start with item 4.
148 Version 2015

Colorimeters
Strip readers
X-Rite DTP41 (T/USB) and X-Rite DTP45 spectrophotometers are strip readers that require special test
charts. You can find these test charts as a PDF file or data set in TIFF format on the test chart CD in
a subfolder of the "Testcharts PDF" or "Testcharts TIFF" folder.
On these special test charts, the color patches are arranged in strips and are separated by ribs. The
strips either have 15, 30 or 45 color patches.
You can print the "PrintOpen" Standard 210" and "PrintOpen" Extended 840" strip test charts in dif-
ferent formats. Afterwards, you must cut the strips, if necessary along the cutting marks.
X-Rite DTP41 (T/USB)

On the base of the X-Rite DTP41 spectrophotometer, there is a block with which you can set the back-
ground color (black or white) for measurements.
1. Slide the block so that the aperture is over the white patch.
2. Connect the X-Rite DTP41 to a serial or USB port.
tion with "OK".
6. Select "X-Rite DTP41" ("X-Rite DTP41T" or "X-Rite DTP41 USB") in the "Measurement device
setup" list.
7. Click "Connect" to establish the connection between the strip reader and the application.
8. Position the calibration strip (Color Reflection Reference) in the device.
Then click "Calibrate".
The calibration strip is read. After calibration, a green LED lights up on the instrument. Repeat cali-
bration if it is not successful (quick-flashing LED).
You can now measure the test chart strips.

Colorimeters
A dialog appears, showing the number of color patches per strip in the "Strip type" box. Some test
chart types also show a graphic where the strips are marked by upper-case letters in alphabetical
order. An arrow marks the direction in which the color patches must be measured.
10. If necessary, set the number of patches (15, 30 or 45) your printed test chart has in the "Stripe"
box.
11. Click "OK".
The dialog closes.
12. Start with strip "A".
Insert this strip as straight as possible into the colorimeter (along guide) until it stops against the
drive rollers. The patches must be centered below the notch as they enter the device.
The strip is read. The measured values are shown soon after in the file with measured data. In "Prin-
tOpen" test charts, a strip with 15 color patches corresponds to one line in the test chart palette. A
strip with 30 patches to two lines.
14. Measure all the strips in this way. Make sure that you insert this strip along the guide of the col-
orimeter.
15. If you wish to measure single color patches again because they are dirty, for example, place the
strip into the device and measure it again.
150 Version 2015

Colorimeters
X-Rite DTP45
The X-Rite DTP45 lets you measure patches on large-format originals without having to cut these up.
1. Connect the X-Rite DTP45 to the power supply and then to a USB port.
tion with "OK".
5. Select "X-Rite DTP45" in the "Measurement device setup" list.
7. Calibrate as follows:
• Remove the device from the base assembly.
• Turn the device over and lift up the calibration reference cover at the front (take care not to
touch the calibration reference).
• Position the calibration reference over the optics and press down until it is secure.
• Then click "Calibrate".

The LED slowly flashes amber during calibration. The LED changes to green if calibration was
successful. Repeat calibration if it is not successful (quick-flashing amber LED).
Place the calibration reference back on its base.
You can now measure the color patches.

8. Click "Start".
A dialog appears, showing the number of color patches per strip in the "Strip type" box. Some test
chart types also show a graphic where the strips are marked by upper-case letters in alphabetical
order. An arrow marks the direction in which the color patches must be measured. The strip must
have a leader of at least 30 mm before the leading edge of the first patch.
9. If necessary, set the number of patches (15, 30 or 45) your printed test chart has in the "Stripe"
box.
10. Click "OK".
The dialog closes.
11. Start with the first strip.
Insert this strip as straight as possible into the colorimeter (along guide) until it stops against the
drive rollers. The patches must lie between the two alignment marks of the base assembly.
The strip is read. The measured values are shown soon after in the file with measured data. In "Prin-
tOpen" test charts, a strip with 15 color patches corresponds to one line in the test chart palette. A
strip with 30 patches to two lines.

Colorimeters
13. Measure all the strips in this way. Make sure that you insert these strips between the alignment
marks of the base assembly.
14. You can measure single patches again manually in "Single step measurement". To do this,
remove the device from the base assembly.
152 Version 2015

Colorimeters
GretagMacbeth iCColor
The GretagMacbeth iCColor spectrophotometer is a strip reader that requires special test charts. You
can find these test charts as a PDF file or data set in TIFF format on the test chart CD in a subfolder
of the "Testcharts PDF" or "TestchartsTIFF" folder. On these special test charts, the color patches are
arranged in strips and are separated by ribs. The strips either have 15, 30 or 45 color patches.
You can print the "PrintOpen" Standard 210" and "PrintOpen" Extended 840" strip test charts in dif-
ferent formats. Afterwards, you must cut the strips, if necessary along the cutting marks.
Take note of the instructions shown in the display of the GretagMacbeth iCColor.
1. Connect the GretagMacbeth iCColor to a serial or USB port.
tion with "OK".
5. Select "GretagMacbeth iCColor" in the "Measurement device setup" list.
6. Click "Connect" to establish the connection between the strip reader and the application.
Calibration is performed automatically.
i
i
Note: There are three versions of the "ECI 2002" test chart:
• all of the test chart on one page (one strip)
• test chart on two pages (two strips)
• test chart on three pages (three strips)
For this test chart, you must select the type (number of pages) before you start measuring and con-
firm with "OK".
The strip test chart is read. The measured values are shown soon after in the file with measured data.
In "PrintOpen" test charts, a strip with 15 color patches corresponds to one line in the test chart pal-
ette. A strip with 30 patches to two lines.

Colorimeters
GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip)
i
i
Note: GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip) can record color data in strips. You can use the scan-
ning ruler included in the shipment for strips up to approx. 27 cm long. You must measure
strips that are longer than this either freehand or using a tool of your choice. Use the special
test charts for GretagMacbeth Eye-One ("i1") that are found in the "Testcharts PDF/TIFF"
folder on the test chart CD.
1. Connect the GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip) to a USB port.

2. Open the "Color Toolbox - New measurement file" dialog by clicking "New" in the "Measure"
main function.
tion with "OK".
5. Select "GretagMacbeth Eye-One (scan)" in the "Measurement device setup" list.
You must perform white calibration every time before you start measuring.
7. Click "Calibrate", follow the instructions and confirm with "OK".
White calibration is run.
A dialog appears, showing the number of color patches per strip in the "Strip type" box.
9. If necessary, set the number of patches your printed test chart has in the "Strip type" box.
10. Click "OK".
The dialog closes.
11. Click "Start" to measure the various color patches of the test chart.
12. You must then place the GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip) before the first patch, press the mea-
sure button and wait for the starting beep. After around one second, move the Eye-One very
slowly over the strip still holding down the measure button.
Release the button after the last patch in this row. Wait until the end of the strip is detected.
13. Measure all the strips one after the other.
The color patches read are shown in the measured data file if their number corresponds to the
strip definition. If it doesn't, you must measure the strip again.
154 Version 2015

Colorimeters
X-Rite Eye-One iSis
i
i
Note: You can measure the "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 visual" and "ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002
random" test charts with the X-Rite Eye-One iSis.
1. Connect the X-Rite Eye-One iSis to the power supply and then to a USB port.
3. Select the test chart you want from the list boxes. Confirm your selection with "OK".
5. Select "X-RiteEye-One iSis" in the "Measurement device setup" list.
7. Click "Calibrate". Calibration is performed automatically.
i
i
Note: There are three versions of the two test charts:
• "A4"
• "A3" or "Letter"
• "XL (A3)"
For these test charts, you must select the suitable type before you start measuring and confirm with
"OK".
The strip test chart is read. The measured values are shown soon after in the file with measured data.

Colorimeters
X-Rite PULSE (strip)

You need a special test chart to measure color patches with the X-Rite PULSE (strip). You can find it
as a PDF or TIFF in the respective folder on the test chart CD.
1. If necessary, charge the battery of the device or optionally use a power adapter.
2. Connect the X-Rite PULSE (strip) to a USB port.
3. Follow instructions to install the driver from the application CD.
5. Select a test chart from the list boxes. Confirm your selection with "OK".
7. Select "X-Rite PULSE (strip)" in the "Measurement device setup" list.
The calibration reference is integrated into the Pathfinder. Always use the Pathfinder matching the
measuring device (check the serial number).
9. Calibrate as follows:
• Lift the cover off the calibration reference and push it to one side.
• Position the device over the the calibration reference of the Pathfinder.
• Click "Calibrate".
You can start measuring the patches if calibration is successful.
You must scan a target ID before you can measure the patches of the test chart. This is a colored bar-
code that is printed across the top of the first page of the test chart.
10. Click "Start".
11. Measure the target ID as follows:
• Position the Pathfinder over the target ID and the measuring device on the Pathfinder. Make sure
that the white paper can be seen on both sides.
• Press down the measure button and wait until you hear a "beep".
• Holding down the button, slide the device on the Pathfinder over the target ID.
• Stop on the white paper, release the button and wait for the "beep" to sound.
i
i
Note: The target has a dark bar on the left and right. Start and end measurements on the
white paper before / after this bar.
156 Version 2015

Colorimeters
12. Measure the patches in exactly the same way as the target ID.
13. Measure all the strips one after the other.
After the data are successfully measured, they are shown in the data file. If it doesn't, you must
measure the strip again.

Colorimeters
X-Rite DTP70
You need a special test chart to measure color patches with the X-Rite DTP70. You can find it as a
PDF or TIFF in the respective folder on the test chart CD.
1. Push the backer tray (black or white) with the white surface facing upwards into the front of the
device until it snaps into its correct position.
2. Connect the X-Rite DTP70 to the power supply.
3. Switch on the device with the power switch ("I" position).
4. Connect the X-Rite DTP70 to a USB port.
5. Check the position of the UV lever, changing it to the position you want, if necessary.
Caution: Never slide the measuring head by hand to gain access to the UV lever.
7. Select a test chart from the list boxes. Confirm your selection with "OK".
9. Select "X-Rite DTP70" in the "Measurement device setup" list.
i
i
Note: The X-Rite DTP70 is auto-calibrating, requiring no user intervention.
11. Click "Start" when the device is ready.

12. Position the test chart (with the patches facing up) in the center of the tray on the device and
slowly insert it into the device until it rests against the rear feed rollers.
13. Press the Operation button to start measuring.
The LED slowly flashes green while the test chart is being measured.
14. After the test chart is measured, remove it from the device.
The LED stays green if the readings are successful. The measured values are shown soon after in the
file with measured data.
15. Measure all the pages in the test chart in the same way.
158 Version 2015

Colorimeters
Notes on Measuring Data

• Each time before you start measuring, calibrate the spectrophotometer to the white standard of
the base plate (white calibration tile). The color values of this reference white are stored in the
colorimeter. This is why this white patch must not be dirty, scratched or covered with dust par-
ticles. Make sure that the serial number of the white reference matches the serial number of the
spectrophotometer.
Contact the manufacturer of the device if the calibration patches are defective.
• If you create ICC output profiles with Color Toolbox for printing or separations, you can measure
the data on a black background following standardized measuring conditions.
If you wish to use the ICC output profiles for proofs as well, you must then place unprinted white
stock below the test chart you are going to measure so that the layer underneath is invisible.
Take several sheets if the paper is very thin. If you measure the data on a black background, it
is possible that the black background will falsify the paper white simulation of the proof.
You cannot place anything beneath the special test chart for the X-Rite DTP41 strip reader. In this
case, to follow standardized measuring conditions, you can set the block on the base of the
device to black background color.
i
i
Note: X-Rite's "DTP41-55-KIT" (raised white backing block) is available as an option for opti-
mal proofing with the X-Rite DTP41.
• When you measure the data manually and move the colorimeter over the test chart, slight
scratch marks may occur if the material is sensitive and affect the measurement at these posi-
tions. To prevent this, use a piece of paper to cover the lower part of the test chart where you
place the colorimeter.
• If color patches are dirty or have scratches, position the aperture on a clean part of the relevant
patch, if possible.
• Incident light may cause the colors on the printed or proofed test chart to fade. Aging and fading
are factors which change colors, particularly on paper used for newspapers or certain color
printers.
We therefore recommend that you measure the test chart as soon as possible after creating it.
However, make sure that the colors or inks are really dry before you start measuring (1 to 2 hours
after printout).
• There are prints which dry very slowly (several days are possible). In such a case, you should
measure the test chart by positioning the spectrophotometer so that the aperture points towards
you and that the colorimeter always rests on those points where you have already measured the
color patches. This does not affect the sequence in which the color patches are measured (left
to right and top to bottom).
• If the majority of the measurements is faulty (e.g., in the case of wrong-reading printing sheets
or due to incorrect measuring) and the patches are not remeasured or show the same errors
once again, corrections are pointless as any further calculation can produce unusable results.

Colorimeters
• Faults in data transfer can occur with hand-held instruments, making another measurement
necessary.
• Connection problems can occur in devices with a USB port. Pull off the connector and plug it on
again.
If the device driver is not recognized, you will find the drivers of devices with a USB port that are
supported by the program in the "USB_Driver_Instruments" folder.
• For trouble-free operation, you should use short cables when connecting the colorimeters
directly to the computer. In addition, if you have a power adapter, a colorimeter should also be
connected to it if power is to be supplied via the interface.
New Devices
The conditions defined in ISO 13655 for measuring colors and the emergence of papers with UV opti-
cal brighteners for greater brilliance are the reasons for the use of the new colorimeters. The human
eye perceives these papers as "white" whereas the colorimeters detect some blue.
Consequently this resulted in the following measurement conditions:
• M0: non-specified illumination
• M1: D50 (daylight)
• M2: UV-cut filter
• M3: Polarization filter
i
i
Note: You set the type of filter you wish to use in the "Preferences" in "Measurement > Fil-
ter" and this displays in the print report on the title page and in the status bar in "Measure".
Modification of the ISO Measurement Condition

You can change the ISO measurement condition not only in the Preferences but also in the "Color
measurement" dialog. This change is then applied as a new setting in the Preferences. This lets you
measure paper white directly in the test chart under different conditions, for example, to determine
the degree of fluorescent whitening in the paper.
160 Version 2015

Colorimeters
For example, if there is a significant amount of fluorescent whitening agents, there will accordingly be
negative b* values for M1 (D50) whereas the values for M2 (UV cut filter) are around 0 or even in the
positive range.
You can use the ISO measurement condition with "Compare > CIE report" for an analysis by defining
the data of one ISO measurement condition as the reference and the data of the other setting as the
comparison data (great difference = significant amount of fluorescent whitening agents).
i
i
Note: We recommend that you first change the ISO measurement condition and then con-
nect the measuring device. If you don't, the connection to the measuring device may be lost
after you change the ISO measurement condition.
Konica-Minolta FD-7
Konica-Minolta FD-7 is the first spectrophotometer that supports not only M0 and M2 but also M1
conform with ISO 13655. It can be used for both strip and spot measurements. In addition, an auto-
matic measuring table "XY-table ColorScout A+" (dimensions 445 mm x 365 mm) is available.
This device can be used to measure any test charts or minispots flexibly and automatically. In other
words, special test charts are no longer needed. To measure a test chart, fix it in place on the mea-
suring table and mark it for flexible measurement:
• Select the base plate (white calibration tile) as the reference.
• Mark the top left and right corner of the test chart as well as the bottom right corner.

Colorimeters
X-Rite i1Pro 2
X-Rite i1Pro 2 also supports the following filter conditions conform with ISO 13655:
• M0: non-specified illumination (measurement used to date)
• M1: D50 daylight illumination (optimal illumination of new standard)
• M2: UV cut filter (IC-NG, fluorescent whitening agents in papers have no impact)
In this case, an additional UV LED and a position sensor were added to the new model.
The status LED on the device guides you through measuring: White = ready to measure, green = mea-
surement successful.
i
i
Note: If necessary, you must open the base plate before calibration.
Strip and spot measurement are supported as well as spot measurement with an automatic measur-
ing table. Only filter condition M0 is supported for measuring strips with an automatic measuring
table.
X-Rite i1Pro 2 can run in three modes:
• Spot (single measurement)
• Strip (scan mode)
• IO (as a chart device on the measuring table)

in the spot mode: M0-M2
in the scan mode: only M0
The additional UV LED provides the following technical solution:

While M0 can measure in one run, M1 and M2 need two runs. The internal UV LED switches on during
the second run. In a single measurement and with the automatic measuring table, this switching hap-
pens so fast that no significant difference in time can be noticed. On the other hand, in the scan mode
two separate scans are needed to measure using M1 and M2 conditions.
162 Version 2015

Colorimeters
During a spot measurement for M1 and M2, the two internal illumination runs are done in succession
unnoticed by the user. For that reason, with M1 and M2 you should wait until the status LED switches
to "white" again before measuring again.
Measure with tray and scan ruler

Besides using X-Rite i1Pro 2 with the automatic measuring table, you can also operate it with a tray
and scan ruler. The position sensor in conjunction with the strip on the scan ruler makes measure-
ment of smaller patches possible and, consequently, the double scan runs mentioned above that are
required for M1 and M2. The tray and scan ruler are essential for measuring in the scan mode with
M1 and M2.
Scan process for M1 and M2:
1. Status LED white = ready to measure
2. Press the measure button, the LED goes out = ready for the first scan run
3. After the first scan run: Status LED green (briefly) = first measurement successful
4. Status LED blue = ready for second scan run (LED lights up on one side to indicate direction)
5. Press the measure button again, LED goes out = second scan run (with UV LED) can start
6. Status LED green (briefly with additional ring tone) = measurement successful
7. Status LED white = ready for new measurement
• Status LED red (briefly) = measurement not successful, e.g. scan too slow or too fast or auto-
matic internal synchronization of both runs failed
Notes:
• It is extremely important that the positions of the start and end patches are not changed during
scanning so that the measured patches can be synchronized with each other.
• The tray is too small for minispots ECI_BVDM_TVI_10 and ECI_GrayConL.
• Field work has shown that the two scan runs cannot always be coordinated exactly and this
results in faulty measurement results. For that reason we recommend that you measure the data
twice to be sure.
Caution: Make absolutely sure that the scan ruler is inserted the right way round into the
tray because your results will be back-to-front if this is not the case.


In this chapter, you will find details about measuring test charts and control elements, saving the
color data as well as a brief technical description of the data format of the measured data.
Color Measurement
The proof print of a test chart or the control element is measured with a colorimeter. Supporting spec-
trophotometers (see "Colorimeters", Seite 131) let you transfer the measured data of the color patches
directly to Color Toolbox via the serial or USB port (online measurement). You can also measure a
test chart or a control element with a device that is not supported if the device software can create a
color data file in a standardized format for exchanging color data (see sections on saving and import-
ing color data).
Settings for the Colorimeter

The measuring conditions are defined in the "Measurement" tab in the "Preferences" dialog before
you start measuring:
• Favored test chart type, name and layout
• Remember instrument used
• Whether density and/or spectral values will be measured if the colorimeter supports these mea-
surements (recommended)
• Density status
· "ISO 5-3 Status A"
· "ISO 5-3 Status E"
· "ISO 5-3 Status I"
· "ISO 5-3 Status T"
· "Status DIN16536"
· "Status DIN16536 NB"

• Filter setting
· "none (M0:ISO-13655)"
· "D50 (M1:ISO-13655)"
· "UV (M2:ISO-13655)"
· "Pol (M3:ISO-13655)"
• Backing
· normally "white"
· for Prinect Image Control "black"
• Density display
· "absolute"
· "relative"
The following default settings are used for measuring colors:

• Illuminant D 50, observer angle 2 and reference white
Measurement sequence
The order in which data are measured depends on the test chart used and is specified by Color Tool-
box. When a patch is measured, the next patch you wish to measure is automatically selected and/
or measured (exception "Single step measurement"). For example, the color patches in the printed
"ISO 12642-2 / ECI 2002" and "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI’ IT8.7/4" test charts are measured with the Gre-
tagMacbeth SpectroScan from left to right and from top to bottom. Rows are marked by letters and
columns by numbers. You will find more details in "Test Charts and Control Strips", Seite 79.
You need special test charts for some colorimeters (GretagMacbeth iCColor and EyeOne (i1) as well
as XRite DTP41). The test charts differ in the layout of their patches (e.g. as a strip).
You can find all the test charts and test elements on the program CD in the respective subfolders of
the "Testcharts" folder.
166 Version 2015

Saving of the measured color data

Color data are saved in an ASCII text format compliant with the ISO 28178 specification for the
import/export of measured data. In this process, the color data are saved in the order they are mea-
sured. This order is defined by Color Toolbox. The XYZ and Lab color data are saved in addition to the
CMYK (or RGB) reference data of the patches and optionally the density and/or spectral values.
Details about the device used and the measuring conditions are also saved along with the data. Infor-
mation about the printing process is also saved with the data as an option.
Saving Color Data in the ICC Profile

A tag for saving the measured data is provided in the ICC specification. In this case, the color data
used for profile calculation are also saved in the ISO 28178 format. It's also possible to save the ICC
profiles without color data.
Importing the Color Data

You can also open saved color data directly in Color Toolbox if the data are in a format which com-
plies with the ISO 12642 specification for import/export of measured data.
Such a data file must have at least the CMYK (or RGB) values of the patches and the related XYZ and/
or Lab values of these patches. Color Toolbox can calculate an ICC profile directly from this data set.
You have a data file in this format, for example, if you use the GretagMacbeth SpectroChart Lite soft-
ware in conjunction with the GretagMacbeth SpectroScan xy table (offline measurement).

Format of File with Measured Data

Using your colorimeter, measure the CIE XYZ or CIE Lab values which are saved in ASCII format in
the text file. The data format is defined in the ISO 12642 specification for the import/export of mea-
sured data. A data file in this format contains the data measured in the test charts (data sets)
together with data format IDs as well as keywords for describing the test chart, the color data and
measuring conditions and has the following structure:
• Header with
· general details (originator, creation date, purpose)
· details about the device used
· details about device settings/measuring conditions
• Format definition of the color data (order) and number of sets of XYZ or Lab values (equivalent
to the number of patches)
• Color data as a block in the order measured
• Optional details about the printing process and the process colors
A file with measured data in ISO12642 format can be imported and interpreted by Color Toolbox.
Measured data are also exported in this format by Color Toolbox.
The number of data in the color data file corresponds to the number of patches in the test chart or
control element:
• "ECI 2002 Visual/Random": 1485 patches
• "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual/Random": 1617 patches
• "PCS control strip 40A (AB)/60A (AB)": a total of 40 or 60 patches
• "Prinect 4GS strip": 28+1 patches
• "ECI/bvdm Gray Control Strip" (three variants): a total of 51 (L), 32 (M) or 6 (S) patches
In addition to the above data, the CMYK defaults must be specified for the color patches concerned.
The beginning and end of the data block is marked by "BEGIN_DATA" and "END_DATA" respectively.
i
i
Note: To calculate an ICC output profile, you must use a test chart with at least 100 color
patches.
The following graphic is an example of an IT8.7 file for a four-color printing process.
168 Version 2015

Example of a color data file for four process colors in Color Toolbox

General Information about Color Data Files

The various fields (keywords and values/data) in the color data file are separated by delimiters.
Valid delimiters are:
• "SPACE" (ASCII 32)
• "TAB" (ASCII 9)
The patches are enclosed by

• "Carriage Return CR" (ASCII 13) and/or
• "Line feed LF" (ASCII 10)
A "#" sign precedes a comment. Comments may begin at any position in a line. They are concluded
with either "CR" or "LF".
The values for most of the keywords are in the form of a string. All strings must be in quotes. The "
sign must be at the beginning and end of the string. A string can also contain blanks.
There are default or custom keywords. "KEYWORD" describes a custom keyword.
Header
The first line of the color data file has a code for the type of test chart or control element:
• "ECI2002" for the standardized "ECI 2002 Visual/Random" test chart.
• "ISO 12642" or "IT8.7/3" for the standardized "ISO 12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3 Visual/Random" test
chart.
• "ISO 12642-2" or "IT8.7/4" for the standardized "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI IT8.7/4 Visual/Random"
test chart.
• "CQM40" or "CQM60" for the PCS control strip in variants 40A, 40AB, 60A or 60AB.
• "PROP405" as an example for test charts and control elements, depending on the PrintOpen
program version with which the test chart was created.
• "CTS 2.1" as an example for a data set with calibration data that were generated with the Cali-
bration Tool (Prinect Color Toolbox).
• "ISO 28178" for data sets of test charts or control elements that were created with Prinect Image
Control.
• Various codes for a number of test charts and control elements, e.g. "GRAYCONL" for the "ECI/
bvdm Gray Control Strip L".
The header contains the following keywords:

• "ORIGINATOR": Name of the creator of the file
• "DESCRIPTOR": Comment about contents of the file
170 Version 2015

• "CREATED": Date file was created
• "INSTRUMENTATION": Device used (manufacturer, device type and serial number), for Prinect
Image Control version number of the software
• "MEASUREMENT_SOURCE": Measuring conditions, such as details about illuminant D50 and

observer angle 2 and about the density status
• "FILTER_STATUS": Details about the filter setting
• "POLARIZATION": Details about the polarization filter set
• "SAMPLE_BACKING": Details about the backing
• "PRINT_CONDITIONS": Details about the printing conditions
• "INKINFOS": Details about the inks used (ink name, density filter, Lab values)
• "PROCESSCOLOR_ID": Details about the number of process colors and color order in multicolor
processes (five, six or seven-color printing)
Format definition of the color data

The following keywords are used for defining the formats of the color data:
• "NUMBER_OF_FIELDS": Data format IDs which are contained in the format definition
• "BEGIN_DATA_FORMAT": Beginning of format definition
• "END_DATA_FORMAT": End of format definition

Color Data
The following keywords are used for the color data:
• "NUMBER_OF_SETS": Number of data sets
• "BEGIN_DATA": Marks the start of the data sets
• "END_DATA": Marks the end of the data sets
"NUMBER_OF_FIELDS" and "NUMBER_OF_SETS" each have integers as their values.

Keywords "BEGIN_DATA_FORMAT" and "END_ DATA_FORMAT" or "BEGIN_DATA" and "END_DATA" do
not have values of their own. They enclose data format definitions or related data sets.
A set of measured data is structured as follows:
NUMBER_OF_FIELDS
BEGIN_DATA_FORMAT
.....
END_DATA_FORMAT
NUMBER_OF_SETS
BEGIN_DATA
.....
END_DATA
The data format (enclosed by "BEGIN_DATA_FORMAT" and "END_DATA_FORMAT") describes what

each field in a data set means.
Data formats must be defined with the IDs specified. Unknown entries are ignored by the automatic
read programs. The data allocated to a data format ID are generally floating numbers (that is, they
have a decimal point).
The data format IDs used by Color Toolbox are listed below:
• "SAMPLE_ID": ID of a color patch (the ID is defined for the "ECI 2002", "ISO 12642-2 / ANSI
IT8.7/4" and "ISO12642 / ANSI IT8.7/3" test charts)
• "CMYK_C": Cyan component of the CMYK data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid)
• "CMYK_M": Magenta component of the CMYK data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid)
• "CMYK_Y": Yellow component of the CMYK data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid)
• "CMYK_K": Black component of the CMYK data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid)
172 Version 2015

• "RGB_R": Red component of the RGB data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid)
• "RGB_G": Green component of the RGB data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid)
• "RGB_B": Blue component of the RGB data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid)
• "XYZ_X": X component of the tristimulus values
• "XYZ_Y": Y component of the tristimulus values
• "XYZ_Z": Z component of the tristimulus values
• "LAB_L": L* component of the CIELAB data
• "LAB_A": a* component of the CIELAB data
• "LAB_B": b* component of the CIELAB data
• "D_RED": Red filter density in density measurements
• "D_GREEN": Green filter density in density measurements
• "D_BLUE": Blue filter density in density measurements
• "D_VIS": Visual density (for black) in density measurements
Spectral values are filed as floating numbers ranging from 0.0 to 1.0.
• "NM_XXX", with XXX the wavelength of the spectral range, e.g. "NM_680"
The filing of spectral values is defined in a complex way in the ISO 28178 specification. A proprietary
but more simple definition for spectral values is used.
In multicolor processes, codes are used for the number of process colors and order of printing instead
of the "CMYK" or "RGB" identifiers:
• "PC5" indicates five-color printing
• "PC6" indicates six-color printing
• "PC7" indicates seven-color printing
The names and the order of the process colors used are defined with the "INKINFOS" custom keyword
and the "PROCESSCOLOR_ID" keyword.
• "PC5_1", "PC5_2", "PC5_3", "PC5_4" and "PC5_5": first to fifth component of the process color
data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid) for five-color printing
• "PC6_1", "PC6_2", "PC6_3", "PC6_4", "PC6_5" and "PC6_6": first to sixth component of the pro-
cess color data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid) for six-color printing
• PC7_1", "PC7_2", "PC7_3", "PC7_4", "PC7_5", "PC7_6" and "PC7_7": first to seventh component
of the process color data in percent (white 0% to 100% solid) for seven-color printing

Optional details about the printing process

Details about the parameter settings from the "Process parameters" Dialog are filed with special key-
words. The process parameters are marked by the comment sign "#":
# --- process parameters ---
# machine:
KEYWORD "TECHNOLOGY"
TECHNOLOGY "ndef"
KEYWORD "DEVICEMANUFACTURER"
DEVICEMANUFACTURER ""
KEYWORD "DEVICEMODEL"
DEVICEMODEL ""
# media:
KEYWORD "MEDIATYPE"
MEDIATYPE "user"
KEYWORD "MEDIABRANDNAME"
MEDIABRANDNAME ""
# process colors:
KEYWORD "COLORANTORDER"
COLORANTORDER "default"
KEYWORD "COLORANTNAMES"
COLORANTNAMES "CYAN,MAGENTA,YELLOW,BLACK"
KEYWORD "INKBRANDNAME"
INKBRANDNAME ""
# screening:
KEYWORD "SCREENINGSYSTEM"
SCREENINGSYSTEM "DEFAULT"
KEYWORD "SCREENFREQUENCY"
SCREENFREQUENCY "0.0 dpi"
KEYWORD "SCREENANGLE"
SCREENANGLE "0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0"
KEYWORD "DOTSHAPE"
DOTSHAPE "other_unknown"
174 Version 2015

# process:
KEYWORD "PRINTSTANDARD"
PRINTSTANDARD "user"
KEYWORD "PLATEMAKING"
PLATEMAKING "user"
KEYWORD "PLATEBRANDNAME"
PLATEBRANDNAME ""

Theory and Practice
Theory and Practice
Definitions and Fundamental of Color

The subject of color is by its very nature so extensive that there is a confusing amount of terms which
are often misunderstood and make communication difficult. We have devoted this chapter to some
definitions, all related to the subject of color, so that you can can have a better idea of what lies
behind this multitude of complex terms.
Color
Color in colorimetric terms is a visual sensation. In color, there are three independent perception val-
ues that are referred to as "hue", "chroma" ("colorfulness" in everyday usage) and "lightness"
("brightness"). Perception of color can be described with these properties.
A quantitative, standardized description is necessary in order for color to be communicated precisely.
This is done by using colorimetry which is the theory of dimensional relations among colors, on a
well-defined colorimetric basis.
Primary Colors
Primary colors are the colors used to produce secondary colors. A primary color cannot be produced
by mixing two secondary colors.
• In additive color mixing: Red, green and blue
• In subtractive color mixing: Cyan, magenta and yellow
Mixed Colors
Mixed colors are mixtures of two or three primary colors.
Secondary Colors
Secondary colors are mixed colors of first order. They are produced from equal or unequal amounts
of two primary colors, such as red from magenta and yellow or orange from a large amount of yellow
and a little magenta.
Tertiary Colors
Tertiary colors are mixed colors of second order. They are produced from equal or unequal amounts
of three primary colors, such as brown from cyan, magenta and yellow.

Theory and Practice
Complementary Color
A color and its complementary color together form gray. Depending on the hues, a complementary
color can consist of one or two inks or light colors.
Dominant Colors
Dominant colors determine the hue and chroma of mixed colors in the overprint.
Complementary Colors
Complementary colors are also referred to as the dirtying colors.
Color Circle
The color circle (chromatic circle) shows the fundamental order of colors. The six sections in this cir-
cle portray the primary colors of additive color mixing (red, green, blue) and those of subtractive color
mixing (cyan, magenta, yellow). Each color is produced from a mixture of its two adjacent colors. In
this way, complementary colors lie opposite each other.
Color Spaces
A color space is a three-dimensional model used to portray colors, e.g. RGB color space, CIELAB
color space.
Color Gamut
The color gamut contains all the colors that can be displayed with a certain process.
Rules of Color Mixing
Additive Color Mixing

Light colors (primary light sources, e.g. monitor phosphors) undergo additive mixing. The three main
areas of the spectrum are the primary colors: red, green and blue. Any mixed color in any intensity
can be created from these three primary colors:
178 Version 2015

Theory and Practice
• When equal parts of all three light colors are mixed together, they produce white.
• Blue and green produce cyan.
• Blue and red produce magenta.
• Green and red produce yellow.
The counterpart of additive color mixing is subtractive color mixing.
Subtractive Color Mixing

Color solids (colorants, e.g. inks) undergo subtractive color mixing. When white light falls upon col-
ored layers, part of the light is absorbed. The color layers act as color filters. For example, a red filter
allows only the red part of light to pass through, the blue and green parts are absorbed. A great num-
ber of colors can be created from the three primary colors, cyan, magenta and yellow:
• In theory, mixing all three colors produces black.
• Cyan and magenta produce blue.
• Cyan and yellow produce green.
• Magenta and yellow produce red.
Halftone color mixing

Chromatic reproduction is based on the principle of halftone color mixing, in other words on the com-
bination of additive and subtractive color synthesis. The chromatic colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and
black) are printed one on top of the other in transparent screened layers. Each color layer acts as a
color filter in front of white paper, i.e., a subtractive color synthesis takes place in the superimposed
areas. The superimposed areas of the screen dots are so minute that they cannot be dissolved and
perceived individually by the human eye when looked at from a normal distance. Here the relevant
color stimulants are mixed together in the eye to produce the hue it perceived. For that reason, we
also talk about an optical mixture of colors.
The impinging light is in part "swallowed", in other words subtracted, and in part rejected (reflected).
The more colors are superimposed, the less light can be reflected. If all light colors are absorbed, the
composite print of the three chromatic colors appears almost as a solid black area.
Inks
Printing ink is the medium used to display the image on paper. Therefore, its properties play an essen-
tial role. The pigment content of these process colors determines the opacity and saturation level of
an ink (the more pigment there is, the more saturation there is, and the more intense a color is).
In offset printing, chromatic inks are mostly transparent. If these inks are printed in consecutive lay-
ers using different inks, they do not actually mix together but their transparency has an optical color
mixing effect. For example, a red layer on a yellow layer will appear orange.

Theory and Practice
Certain additives are used in the ink to change its properties. For example, this can be its appearance
(matt, glossy or metallic), its viscosity and its drying properties. Even its smell may be influenced in
this way.
The quality of paper plays an essential role in color reproduction. Colors will appear more intense on
coated paper, for example, on art paper, but the ink takes longer to dry and is more likely to smudge.
Fibrous paper partially absorbs the ink, causing it to appear matt and more dull.
Ideal chromatic inks (optimal colors) must be extremely transparent so that a clean color mixture
occurs in the composite print. If white light falls on one of the three chromatic colors, a third of the
visible spectrum must be totally absorbed. The other two thirds must be completely reflected. With
ideal process colors, it would thus be possible to reproduce any image using only the three process
colors cyan, magenta and yellow.
In reality, these process colors do not exist. In the case of cyan, for example, red is only absorbed to
approximately 85%: the rest is reflected. Blue and green together are reflected and absorbed by
about 50%. Following this, almost 50% of the three light colors are absorbed together which causes
a more neutral hue (grayish) to occur. As a result, cyan appears dirty in the print. In other words, cyan
loses its chromaticity. Cyan also appears desaturated, however, because around 15% of the three
light colors are reflected together. This leads to less color saturation in the print.
Only the use of pure special colors is effective in counteracting a dirty color reproduction. These are
special color mixtures which are printed as a solid tint in addition to primary colors (e.g. HKS or Pan-
tone colors). The problem of insufficient color saturation can be neutralized in dark colors by printing
more black color at the relevant areas of the reproduction.
Black is used quite often to increase the density range. Another reason to print black is the impres-
sion of increased sharpness of the reproduction if the contours are defined with only one (strong)
color, if possible, with a screen.
An image whose gray tones are composed mainly of black is less sensitive to ink fluctuations in the
printing press. In addition, chromatic inks are more expensive than black ink. The obvious thing to do
would thus be to substitute the chromatic color with black which would result in gray anyway.
A disadvantage, however, is that screen rosettes may be more noticeable in the so-called tertiary
tones, i.e., mixed colors of the third order which are composed of equal or unequal percentages of
the three chromatic inks.
Chromatic/Achromatic Reproduction
Each tertiary color or color shade can be divided into two parts: a chromatic and an achromatic
value. The gray component contained in the mixed color is defined as the achromatic value. In chro-
matic reproduction with ideal process colors, it consists of equal parts of cyan, magenta and yellow.
These parts neutralize each other, lose their chromatic nature and as a result appear achromatic.
With ideal process colors, the achromatic value can be replaced partly or entirely by black. Achro-
matic reproduction takes place when the achromatic value is removed completely.
The other part of the chromatic inks is called the chromatic value. This makes the color shade appear
colored and consists of one or at the most two primary colors. The reduction of chromatic inks in
print makes the printing process more stable and considerably improves the way ink is absorbed.
180 Version 2015

Theory and Practice
Total Dot Area

The total dot area refers to the addition of geometric area coverages (screen percentages) of all color
separations at a given point in an image for halftone printing.
Total dot area is well suited as a means of differentiating between chromatic, UCR and achromatic
reproduction when the position in the image it applies to is also indicated. Generally, values for the
neutral image shadow are almost always used.
UCR
UCR (= Under Color Removal) is an additional setting option in chromatic reproduction. In this pro-
cess, the gray component of the chromatic printing inks is replaced by black in neutral image shadow.
Less color is needed to create a specific hue, i.e., the dot area is reduced. This means that the gray
axis is more stable. Also, there are fewer trapping problems during the printing process. Since fewer
chromatic colors are used, costs can be reduced. UCR can also be set together with GCR.

Theory and Practice
GCR
The GCR (= Gray Component Replacement) function permits the gray component of the chromatic
printing inks to be replaced by black process color, with an effect in the entire color space. The
amount replaced can be set as desired. The color impression remains the same.
Less color is needed to create a specific hue, i.e., the dot area is reduced. This means that the gray
axis is more stable. Also, there are fewer trapping problems during the printing process.
Since fewer chromatic colors are used, costs can be reduced. However, screen rosettes may be more
noticeable under certain circumstances.
The following simplified example illustrates how the same hue can be composed with and without
GCR.
RP% C M Y K RP% C M Y K RP% C M Y K

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 80 80
70 70 70
60 60 60
50 50 42% 50 60%
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
60% 87% 93% 20% 18% 79% 85% 59% 0% 77% 83% 65%
Chromatic reprod. without GCR GCR with 70% Maximum GCR with 100%
Dominant colors: Y, M = Red
Complementary color = Cyan
Example of GCR with brown mixed color
those on the film. The ideal printing characteristic is linear and rises at an angle of 45°.
182 Version 2015

Theory and Practice
Dot Gain
Dot gain refers to the increase in the size of screen dots caused by printing. This can make an image
appear darker (fuller) and/or color shifts can occur. Dot gain depends on the printing process, the
type of paper or printing medium used and the ink. It also depends on the settings of your printer/
press as well as on the screen settings. Consequently, different dot gains result for prints and proofs.
Dot gain is the deviation from the ideal characteristic printing curve.
Gray Balance
Gray balance defines the ratio of the three chromatic inks cyan, magenta and yellow to each other so
that gray tones in the original are also gray, i.e. neutral, in the reproduced image.
Gray balance depends on the paper used, in particular on its hue, on the process colors and their
intensity in print. It also depends on the printing process and the printing form.
Visually, magenta and yellow penetrate more than cyan. For that reason, the value for cyan is gener-
ally greater than the value for magenta and yellow to produce a neutral tone in the overprint. Same
amounts of cyan, magenta and yellow produce a brownish hue in the overprint.
Gradation
A gradation (reproduction of the tonal value) defines the relation between the original density and the
reproduction density.
With transparent originals, density is defined as the logarithmic ratio of transmitted light to incident
light, with reflective originals, it is the logarithmic ratio of reflected light to incident light.

Theory and Practice
Notes on the CIE XYZ System and xy Diagram

Color is produced in the brain by the retina of the eye being stimulated by radiation (in other words,
by a color stimulus). The eye of an observer with normal color vision assesses the light intensity
according to three independent factors of evaluation known as color-matching functions. A colorime-
tric standard observer is defined by specifying these three functions on a spectral basis.
International uniform standards for evaluating color stimuli were established in 1931 by the Commis-
sion Internationale de l'Eclairage (CIE). Color-matching functions with three imaginary light sources
(X, Y and Z) were defined to describe a standard observer whose visual perception corresponds to
what the average person sees. The spectral curve for "Y" (l) was chosen to be equivalent to the
human perception of lightness.
So-called tristimulus values are calculated both from the spectral curve of the color and from the
color-matching functions.
If you change "X", "Y" and "Z" by the same factor, only the intensity of the color changes. Based on
this finding, a color, irrespective of its lightness, can be defined using only two variables which can
be plotted in a graph.
The CIE defined these variables with "x" and "y". If these two values are computed for every spectral
color on the basis of the X, Y and Z values and plotted in a graph, a horseshoe-shaped diagram,
known as the chromaticity diagram, will be produced.
Notes on the CIELAB Color Space

CIE established the fundamentals for the L*a*b* color space in 1976, and which is usually referred to
as the CIELAB color space.
LAB denotes a color coordinates system which is closely related to visual perception. The CIELAB
color space consists of the lightness axis L*, the red-green axis a* and the yellow-blue axis b*. The
distances in this color space are the same and reflect approximately what we perceive. This color
space can be calculated from or to the CIE XYZ color space on the basis of clear mathematical cor-
relations.
The L* value describes the lightness of the color and can lie between 0 (for absolute black) and 100
(for reference white). Color coordinates a* and b*, which can have positive and negative values,
define its chroma.
Chroma values for color solids range from around -80 to +120, with reference white and absolute
black having a value of 0. The a* axis describes the red-green parts in the color measured, with pos-
itive a* values referring to reds and negative a* ones to greens.
The b* axis describes the yellow-blue parts in the color, with positive b* values referring to yellows
and negative b* ones to blues.
In general, one unit of these L*a*b* dimensions is the barely perceptible difference between two val-
ues when looked at under normal viewing conditions.
The position of a color on the a* b* axis provides the user with information about its hue and its
chroma. By definition, the chromatic circle begins on the positive a* axis with magenta (purple) and
runs in a mathematically positive direction (counterclockwise) through red, orange to yellow (positive
184 Version 2015

Theory and Practice
b* axis), then passes yellowish-green to green (negative a* axis) on to cyan and blue (negative b* axis)
and from there back to magenta.
Chroma results from the distance of the hue from the lightness axis. Lightness refers to the position
in the color space.
Hue
The term "hue" describes the pure chromatic quality of a color. Yellow, red, green, blue are used to
describe this property (primary colors). Every other hue can consist of two of the four primary colors
named.
This property of a color differentiates one chromatic color from another.
The other two properties of a color are saturation and lightness.
Hue Angle
The hue angle (h) refers to the position of a hue in a rectangular, two-dimensional coordinates sys-
tem. The positive x axis frequently defines the angle of 0". The primary colors, red, yellow, green and
blue, lie approximately at 0°, 90°, 180° and 270° (in counterclockwise direction) in the CIELAB sys-
tem (see "Notes on the CIELAB Color Space", Seite 184).
Saturation
Saturation is used to refer to the property of a color which defines its degree of purity and intensity.
The less a hue is made darker or lighter by the addition of a third component, the greater its satura-
tion. Colors of the same chromaticity but different lightness have the same saturation. Saturation is
not really something we actually perceive.
The other two properties of a color are hue and lightness.

Theory and Practice
Chroma
Chroma (C*) describes the intensity of a color we perceive. It describes what makes this color differ-
ent from one which is perceived as achromatic and has the same degree of brightness. Terms such
as gray, pastel-colored, very chromatic, etc. are used to describe this property.
Chroma depends greatly on lightness. Colors perceived as being very light or very dark have only a
slight amount of chroma.
C = a 2 + b 2
Relative Chroma
Relative chroma is the unit of measure used to differentiate one color from another which is per-
ceived as achromatic and has the same degree of brightness. One unit generally corresponds to a
change in chroma (colorfulness) that is just about perceptible (max. values up to approx. 120 with
natural objects).
Lightness
In a color, lightness defines the amount of light reflected from the surface. It is influenced by the way
a surface reflects impinging light.
Reflectance refers to the way light is reflected off the surfaces of non-luminous bodies. The minutely
fine unevenness of the surface ensures that a mirrored image does not result but that the image is
remitted diffusely (scattered).
Lightness describes the intensity of light in a color. Terms such as dark, light, very light, etc. are used
to describe this property. Colors with the same spectral distribution but different lightness are differ-
ent colors. This must be remembered in color matching.
The other two properties of a color are saturation and hue.
Relative Lightness
Relative lightness is the unit of measure used to define the relation of a color to an area perceived as
white under the same lighting conditions. Values lie between "0" (dark) and "100" (light).
186 Version 2015

Theory and Practice
Color Distance ΔE (Delta E)

Color distance ΔE* is calculated using the differences of space coordinates ΔL*, Δa* and Δb* to
describe the color distance between two colors:
E =  L  2 +  a  2 +  b  2
with
• Lightness difference ΔL*
L = L  2  – L  1 
• Red-green axis difference Δa*
a = a  2  – a  1 
• Yellow-blue axis difference Δb*
b = b  2  – b  1 
In this way, the direction that color deviation takes can be seen in achromatic colors and grays with
a slight color cast. In chromatic colors, color distance ΔE* is divided into three partial amounts for
lightness, chroma and hue:
• Lightness difference ΔL*
• Chroma distance ΔC*
• Hue distance ΔH*
Chroma distance ΔC* indicates the saturation difference:
C = C  2  – C  1  =  E  2 –  L  2 –  C  2
Hue distance ΔH* indicates the hue difference:
H =  E  2 –  L  2 –  C  2
This results in the following relation for ΔE*:
E =  L  2 +  C  2 +  H  2
i
i
Note: The tolerance of color distances of the same size depends on the locus of the chro-
maticity coordinate. A deviation is less noticeable in hues with a high degree of saturation
than in pastels or grays. Therefore, for practical use, other formulas for calculation of the
color distance (ΔE*(94), ΔE*(2000)) were developed, in which the lightness difference
(ΔL*), chroma distance (ΔC*) and hue distance (ΔH*) are weighted.

Theory and Practice
Process Standards, Reference Files and Profiles in

Color Toolbox
Process standards are specifications of process parameters and their values that are to be applied
when creating color separations, separation films or printing plates for four-color printing and for
proof printing. Process standards include color data for printing materials, inks, dot gains and toler-
ances.
Reference files are characterization files based on a process standard and used to check printing or
proof printing.
Profiles are files for color separation based on characterization data with process-specific restrictions
for color composition and color gamut.
The sections below describe the process standards, reference files and profiles shipped with Color
Toolbox.
Overview of the Process Standards

The following process standards for offset printing for white and black backing are stored in the local
or global master database.
Process standard Paper grade Comment

ISO 12647-2:2004 Amd1:2006 PT1 Offset printing, gloss-coated
White Backing PT4 Offset printing, uncoated, white
ISO 12647-2:2004 Amd1:2006 PT1 Offset printing, gloss-coated
Black Backing PT4 Offset printing, uncoated, white
ISO 12647-2:2007 Fogra PT1 FOGRA39, gloss- and matte-coated
White Backing PT4 FOGRA47, uncoated, white
ISO 12647-2:2004 HDM PT1 HDMcoated, gloss- and matte-coated
Black Backing PT4 HDMuncoated, uncoated, white
i
i
Note: HDMcoated (white backing) is equivalent to FOGRA39.
Overview of the Reference Files

The following reference files (characterization data, media strip data and gray control strip data) are
included in the shipment.
188 Version 2015

Theory and Practice
FOGRA reference files:
Characterization Data Media Strip Data Gray Control Strip Data

FOGRA39 FOGRAMK2_FOGRA39 ECI_GrayConL_FOGRA39
FOGRA39L PCS60AB_FOGRA39 ECI_GrayConM_FOGRA39
PCS40AB_FOGRA39 ECI_GrayConS_FOGRA39
FOGRA47
FOGRA47L
Heidelberg reference files:
Characterization Data Media Strip Data Gray Control Strip Data

HDMcoated FOGRAMK2_HDMcoated ECI_GrayConS_HDMcoated
PCS40AB_HDMcoated ECI_GrayConM_HDMcoated
PCS60AB_HDMcoated ECI_GrayConL_HDMcoated
HDMcoated_bb FOGRAMK2_HDMcoated_bb ECI_GrayConS_HDMcoated_bb
PCS40AB_HDMcoated_bb ECI_GrayConM_HDMcoated_bb
PCS60AB_HDMcoated_bb ECI_GrayConL_HDMcoated_bb
HDMuncoated FOGRAMK2_HDMuncoated ECI_GrayConS_HDMuncoated
PCS40AB_HDMunoated ECI_GrayConM_HDMuncoated
PCS60AB_HDMuncoated ECI_GrayConL_HDMuncoated
HDMuncoated_bb FOGRAMK2_HDMuncoated_bb ECI_GrayConS_HDMuncoated_bb
PCS40AB_HDMunoated_bb ECI_GrayConM_HDMuncoated_bb
PCS60AB_HDMuncoated_bb ECI_GrayConL_HDMuncoated_bb
In addition, the reference files from older versions of Profile Toolbox are also shipped for compatibility
reasons.

Theory and Practice
Overview of the Reference Profiles

The following ECI and Heidelberg reference files are included in the shipment.
ECI profiles:
Profile Description Basic

ISOcoated_v2_eci.icc ISOcoated_v2_info.pdf FOGRA39
ISOcoated_v2_300_eci.icc ISOcoated_v2_300_info.pdf FOGRA39
ISOuncoated.icc ISOuncoated_info.pdf FOGRA29
ISOuncoatedyellowish.icc ISOuncoatedyellow_info.pdf FOGRA30
ISOwebcoated.icc ISOwebcoated_info.pdf FOGRA28
SC_paper_eci.icc SC_paper_info.pdf FOGRA40
Heidelberg profiles:
Profile Description Basic

HDMcoated.icc HDMcoated.txt HDMcoated_IS12642.txt
HDMcoated_G60.icc HDMcoated_G60.txt HDMcoated_IS12642.txt
HDMcoated_bb.icc HDMcoated_bb.txt HDMcoated_bb_IS12642.txt
HDMcoated_bb_G60.icc HDMcoated_bb_G60.txt HDMcoated_bb_IS12642.txt
HDMuncoated.icc HDMuncoated.txt HDMuncoated_IS12642.txt
HDMuncoated_G60.icc HDMuncoated_G60.txt HDMuncoated_IS12642.txt
HDMuncoated_bb.icc HDMuncoated_bb.txt HDMuncoated_bb_IS12642.txt
HDMuncoated_bb_G60.icc HDMuncoated_bb_G60.txt HDMuncoated_bb_IS12642.txt
In addition, the profiles from older versions of Profile Toolbox are also shipped for compatibility rea-
sons.
190 Version 2015

Index
Index
Global setting 276

"Conversion of color data - paperwhite" Gray Component Replacement (GCR) 271
Dialog 89 Multicolor 232
"Compare" (main function) 159 Total dot area 267
"Edit" (main function) 313 Calculate V4 profile 290
3D color space 180 Caption bar 24
3D color space (with central projection/an- Check boxes 33
imation) 185 Chroma 276, 8184
Chromatic colors 8179
A ab diagram 176, 299 Chromatic reproduction 8179, 8180
ab plane 176 Chromatic value 8180
Achromatic reproduction 8180 CIE color space
Achromatic value 8180 Display of ab plane 176, 299
Additive color mixing 8178 Display of the La/Lb diagrams 178, 301
Administration (process standards) 363 Display of the xy diagram 174, 297
Analysis (CIE report) 202 CIE color space diagrams 99, 292
Analysis (main function) 219 CIE report 199, 238
CIE report 238 Analysis 202
Density report 242 CIELab color values 201
Dialogs 225 Density values 201
Display of the result 230 Dot gain 201
Dot gain report 240 Proof report 202
Menu commands and buttons 222 Total results 200
Print preview Production check 251 CIELAB color space 8184
Production check 244 CIELab color values (CIE report) 201
PV CIE report 247 Color calculator 12
PV dot gain report 249 Color composition 8178
PV Overview 245 Color data
Automatic Measurement of the Test Charts Import 7165
6142 Use 7165
Averaging color data 76, 228 Color patches Measurement sequence 7166
Color space,CIELAB 8184
B Black Color values 136
Generation Colorimeter, Setup 71
with GCR 271 Compare (main function)
with length and width 273 3D color space 180
Length 273 ab diagram 176
Long (full range) 273 CIE report 199
Maximum 267 Data table 216
Narrow 274 La/Lb diagrams 178
Standard 273, 274 Menu commands and buttons 163
Wide 274 Proof statistics 204
Width 274 Error distribution (trend) 206
Black length 273 Error histogram 205
Black width 274 Statistics 195
Button bar 29 Error distribution (trend with mean) 198
Error distribution (trend) 197
C Calculate correction data 119 Error histogram 196
Calculate ICC profile Test chart 167
Gamut mapping 268 Tonal values 211
Optimized 268 Density curves (density profile) 215

Index
Dot gain 213 ues 90

Printing characteristic 214 Correction of color data 85, 280
Views and diagrams 166 Edit control strip 67
xy diagram 174 Extracting test chart data 81
ΔLab report 207 Gamut mapping 275, 280
ΔLCH report 209 GCR setting/Black generation 271
Context-sensitive menu in curve diagrams Gray balance calibration 115
142, 234, 307, 311 Gray balance optimization 121
Correction of proofer profile 337 ImageControl File Selection 469
Correction/smoothing of color data, ex- Load parameter set 83, 97
ample 284 Mean calculation of test chart data 76
Create (main function) 253 Open 466
ab diagram 299 Preferences 344
Dialogs 263 Print 357
Dot gain/Printing characteristic 303 Process parameters 287
Gray balance/Density curves 308 Profile Browser Configuration 473
La/Lb diagram 301 Profile calculation 289
Menu commands and buttons 261 Profile Generation Setup 263
Test chart 293 Profile parameters 270, 322
Views and diagrams 292 Save file 475
xy diagram 297 Smoothing of color data 83, 282
Creating a File with Measured Data 42 Store parameter set 96
Displays 34
D Data table 216 Dot gain 135, 136, 138, 143, 211, 213, 303,
Delta Lab report, ΔLab report 207 305, 326
Delta LCH report, ΔLCH report 209 CIE report 201
Density curves (density profile) 215 Curves 140
Density report 242 Dot gain curves 325
Density values (CIE report) 201 Dot gain report 240
Device link profile 17
Diagram E Edit (main function)
Miscolors 170 Dot gain 325
Diagrams Global gradation 332
ab diagram 299 Gray balance 329
ab plane 176 Lightness gradation 335
La/Lb diagram 301 Menu commands and buttons 315
La/Lb diagrams 178 Printing characteristic 325
Print 357 Process parameters 343
xy diagram 174, 297 Profile information 317
Dialog Profile modifications 324
Change entry 225, 228 Edit the process parameters 343
Color Toolbox - New measurement file 59 Error distribution (trend with mean) 198
Merging of test chart data 228 Error distribution (trend) 197, 206
Save table as CSV file 218 Error histogram 196, 205
Dialogs Example of a special test chart, "PrintOpen
Color measurement of test chart 71 Standard" (CMYK) for
Conversion of color data 87 GretagMacbeth iCColor 5116
Conversion of color data - Calibration data X-Rite DTP41 5115
91 Explorer panel 31
Conversion of color data - color values 88
Conversion of color data - Test chart val- F File Selection 465
192 Version 2015

Index
Folder/directory 34 Production check 244

Compare 159
G Gamut mapping 268, 275 Menu commands and buttons 163
Global setting (darker/lighter slider) 278 Views and diagrams 166
Global setting of color saturation (gray/ Create 253
colored slider) 278 Dialogs 263
Keep gray axis (min/max slider) 278 Menu commands and buttons 261
Optimized 268, 276 Views and diagrams 292
Setting for dark colors (darker/lighter) 277 Edit 313
Setting for light colors (preserve lightness/ Menu commands and buttons 315
preserve contrast) 276 Profile information 317
GCR (Gray Component Replacement) 271, Profile modifications 324
8182 Measure 39
Global gradation 332 Dialogs 59
Global settings 276 Menu commands and buttons 56
Gradual fading 152 Views and diagrams 99
Gray balance 308, 309, 329, 115 Process standard 345
Gray balance calibration 115, 116 Menu commands and buttons 348
Calculate correction data 119 Views and diagrams 350
Workflow 117 Main function bar 26
Gray balance optimization 121 Manual Measurement of the Test Charts
Gray Component Replacement (GCR) 271 6138
Gray values 143 Measure (main function) 39
Color values 136
H Halftone color mixing 8179 Dialogs 59
Header/menu bar 27 Dot gain/Printing characteristic 138
Hue Gradual fading 152
8185 Gray values 143
Ink zones 146
I ImageControl File Selection 469 Linearization strip 42
Include optical brightener 85, 280 Menu commands and buttons 56
Ink zones 146 Process standard 103
ISO mesurement condition 6160 Substrate 135
IT8 data file Test chart 42, 100
Format 7168 Test strip 42
Number of measured data 7168 Views and diagrams 99
Measure colors 46
L La/Lb Diagrams 178, 301 Measured data
Lightness adaption for proofs 281 Check for compliance with process stan-
Lightness axis L* 8184 dard 107
Lightness gradation 335 Measuring the test chart
Linearization strip, measure 42 Notes 6159
List box 33 Merging of color data 76, 228
Lists 32 Multicolor 225
Log printout 357 Functions in Color Toolbox 228
Process colors 226
M Main function Test charts 232
Analysis 219 Multicolor profiles
Dialogs 225 Create 232
Display of the result 230
Menu commands and buttons 222 N Notes

Index
on diagrams ("Compare" main function) Edit 343

166 Process standard 103, 346
on measuring colors 6159 Check measured data 107
on the Diagrams 231 CMYK 346
Export 366
O Offline measurement Import 365
Order measured 7166 Menu commands and buttons 348
Procedure 6132 Multicolor 346
Online Help 35 Create 360
Online measurement Overview 350
Colorimeters Spot colors
automatic measurement 6133, 6142 Create 361
GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip) 6154, Process standard (main function) 345
6155 Views and diagrams 350
GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO 6145 Profile calculation
GretagMacbeth iCColor 6153 Gamut mapping 268
GretagMacbeth SpectroScan 6143 Profile size 289
manual measurement 6134, 6138 Profile Information 317
Techkon 6136 Profile Modifications 324
Techkon TCR 6147 Profile size 289
X-Rite DTP41 6149 Proof report
X-Rite DTP45 6151 in CIE report 202
X-Rite DTP70 6158 Proof statistics 204
X-Rite Eye-One iSis 6155 Error distribution (trend) 206
X-Rite PULSE (strip) 6156 Error histogram 205
Notes 6159 Proofer profile, correction 337
Order measured 7166 PV CIE report 247
Procedure 6132 PV dot gain report 249
Operating elements (overview) 24 PV Overview 245
Output profile 289
R Red-green axis a* 8184
P Paper white correction Rules of color mixing 8178
Include optical brightener 85, 280
Lightness adaption for proofs 281 S Slider
Print Gamut mapping
Diagrams 357 Global setting (darker/lighter slider) 278
Reports 357 Global setting of color saturation (gray/
Print preview colored slider) 278
Production Check 251 Keep gray axis (min/max slider) 278
Printing characteristic 135, 136, 138, 140, Setting for dark colors (darker/lighter)
143, 211, 214, 303, 305, 325, 326 277
Printing process General 579 Setting for light colors (preserve light-
Printout of the logs 357 ness/preserve contrast) 276
Process color modification GCR 271
Dot gain 326 Smoothing of color data
Global gradation 332 Example 284
Gray balance 309, 329 Special functions
Lightness gradation 335 Gray balance calibration 115, 116
Printing characteristic 326 Workflow 117
Process colors with Multicolor 226 Gray balance optimization 121
Process parameters 343 Spectrophotometers 6136, 6159, 7165
194 Version 2015

Index
Standard black 273 Tonal values 211

Statistics 195 Display of the density curves (density pro-
Error distribution (trend with mean) 198 file) 215
Error distribution (trend) 197 Display of the dot gain curve 213
Error histogram 196 Display of the printing characteristic 214
Status bar 29, 99, 237, 292 Tools menu
Status bar ("Compare" main function) 166 Color calculator 12
Substrate 135 Device link profile 17
Subtractive color mixing 8179 Gray balance calibration
Calculate correction data 119
T Tabs 28 Total dot area 267
Test chart Total results (CIE report) 200
Calculate mean data 76, 228
Combined 69 U UCR (Under Color Removal) 8181, 8182
Example of a special test chart, "Prin- Under Color Removal (UCR) 8181
tOpen Standard" (CMYK) for Example 8182
GretagMacbeth iCColor 5116 User interface 23
X-Rite DTP41 5115 Structure 23
Measure 42
Notes on measuring colors 6159 V V4 ICC specification 290
Select and print 42 View
Test chart color data ab diagram 299
Average 76 Dot gain/Printing characteristic 138
Test chart data Edit
Average 228 Global gradation 332
Test chart display 100, 167, 293 Gray balance 329
Test chart measurement Lightness gradation 335
automatic 6142 Printing characteristic 325
automatically Process parameters 343
with GretagMacbeth Eye-One (strip) La/Lb diagram 301
6154, 6155 Test chart 293
with GretagMacbeth Eye-One iO 6145 xy diagram 297
with GretagMacbeth iCColor 6153 View profile parameters 322
with GretagMacbeth SpectroScan 6143 Views
with Techkon TCR 6147 3D color space 180
with X-Rite DTP41 6149 3D color space (with central projection/
with X-Rite DTP45 6151 animation) 185
with X-Rite DTP70 6158 ab diagram 299
with X-Rite Eye-One iSis 6155 ab plane 176
with X-Rite PULSE (strip) 6156 Administration of process standards 363
manual 6138 CIE report 199, 238
with GretagMacbeth SpectroScan T 6140 Color values 136
Test chart view Data table 216
with absolute values 169 Density report 242
with differential values 170 Dot gain curves 325
Test strip Dot gain report 240
Measure 42 Dot gain/Printing characteristics 135, 136,
User-defined 65, 67 138, 143, 211, 303
Text box 33 Edit
Text file Dot gain curves 325
Data format, ANSI IT8.7 7168 Gradual fading 152

Index
Gray balance/density curves 308

Gray values 143
Ink zones 146
La/Lb diagram 301
La/Lb diagrams 178
Overview of process standards 350
Patches 100, 293
Print preview Production Check 251
Process standard 103
Process standards 350, 363
Proof statistics 204
Error histogram 205
PV CIE report 247
PV dot gain report 249
PV Overview 245
Statistics 195
Error distribution (trend with mean) 198
Error histogram 196
Substrate 135
Test chart 100, 167, 293
with absolute values 169
with differential values 170
Tonal values 211
Density curves (density profile) 215
Dot gain 213
Printing characteristic 214
xy diagram 174, 297
ΔLab report 207
ΔLCH report 209
W Window
3D color space (with central projection/
animation) 185
Workspace 28
X xy diagram 174, 297
Y Yellow-blue axis b* 8184
196 Version 2015

Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG
Kurfuersten-Anlage 52–60
69115 Heidelberg
Germany
Phone +49 6221 92-00
Fax +49 6221 92-6999
www.heidelberg.com
Trademarks
Heidelberg, the Heidelberg logotype, Prinect, Suprasetter and Speedmaster are registered trademarks
of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG in the United States and other countries.
Adobe and PostScript and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems In-
corporated in the United States and/or other countries.
PANTONE and Hexachrome are registered trademarks of Pantone Inc.
All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
Subject to technical modifications and other changes.

Color Toolbox - Usr - Guid - Us

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Color Toolbox - Usr - Guid - Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

dress Copyright © 2014 Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG.

Prinect Signa Station 1

Before you start ...

Structure of this Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

General Information about Color Toolbox

Caption Bar (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 3

Button Bar (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Creating a File with Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

"Color measurement of test chart" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Main Program Function "Measure / Process Standard / Evalua-

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 5

"Test chart" View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

"Analysis" Main Function

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 7

Information about Long-term Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

"Process parameters" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Menus, Buttons and Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 9

Editing the Curves ................................................ 330

General Information about Gray Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 11

General Information about File Selection ................................... 65

Test Charts and Control Strips

How to Record a Printing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 13

At a glance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Automatic Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Techkon TCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

New Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Modification of the ISO Measurement Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Color Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 15

Complementary Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

About This Documentation

Structure of this Documentation

What you should already know

• in Heidelberg Prinect Licensing – Operation manual

• in the description of the "Prinect Color Toolbox 2015" installation

• in the "Calibration Manager / Calibration Tool" Reference and User's Guide

• in the "Prinect Image Control" User's Guide

• in the Prinect 2015 documentation

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 17

Symbols and Styles

Example: See Abschnitt "Symbols and Styles", Seite 18.

Example: Set the switch to "off".

• Menus, functions and sub-functions are separated by ">".

Example: Select "File > Open...".

Example: Press Alt+A.

What's New and Enhanced in Version 2015?

• Display of the "five recently used folders"

• New Process Standards

· Proof Check (ISO 12647-7)

· Digital Print Check (ISO 15311)

· G7® CheckISO 15339)

New devices have been released.

• Improved color scale with "Clipping-Rendering Intent"

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 19

What is Color Toolbox?

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 21

Structure of the User Interface

Color Toolbox – User’s Guide 23